CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.



Keywords

button, will, channel, that, this, select, press, Press, output, input, channels, field, This, knob, from, NOTE, settings, SETUP, INPUT, SEND, level, which, signal, screen, window, Reference, Manual, gain, when, MATRIX

Transcript

EN
How to Use This Reference Manual
The CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual (this document) allows you
to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software
you're using to view this document.
If you're using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box
and press the key of your computer keyboard to search
for occurrences of that term.
Displaying the next/previous view
If you're using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next
view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back
to the previous page after you've used a link to jump to a different
page.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the CL series is provided on page 4 and
following. You can use this function tree to find the page that
explains an on-screen display or function.
Reference Manual
Table of contents
Reference Manual
............................................................ 58
................................................................................... 58
................................................................................... 61
ries ............................................................................. 64
............................................................ 65
................................................................................... 65
................................................................................... 68
................................................................................... 70
................................................................................. 73
................................................................................... 76
ing a channel.............................................................. 81
................................................................................... 84
............................................................ 86
................................................................................... 86
................................................................................... 90
on.............................................................................. 93
on .............................................................................. 94
................................................................................... 96
o an external device in tandem with scene recall
................................................................................... 98
t links to a scene recall............................................... 99
................................................................................. 100
ions ................................................... 102
................................................................................. 103
................................................................................. 109
r......................................................... 114
................................................................................. 114
................................................................................ 116
.......................................................... 119
een ........................................................................... 119
(optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console ..................... 123
EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK..... 124
................................................................................. 124
................................................................................. 125
................................................................................. 128
................................................................................. 135
................................................................................. 137
zation ....................................................................... 1432
Table of contents
How to Use This Reference Manual .......................................................................... 1
Function Tree ............................................................................ 4
SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL Section ....................................................... 6
Centralogic section ................................................................. 12
Operations in the Centralogic section .................................................................... 12
Input and output patching..................................................... 16
CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching .......................... 16
Changing the input patching ................................................................................ 17
Changing the output patching .............................................................................. 18
Inserting an external device into a channel ............................................................ 20
Directly outputting an INPUT channel ................................................................... 23
Input channels ........................................................................ 26
Signal flow for input channels................................................................................ 26
Specifying the channel name/icon ......................................................................... 27
HA (head amp) settings ......................................................................................... 29
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus ................... 33
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .............................. 37
Channel name display indication ........................................................................... 40
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay) .................................................. 40
Surround output for input channels ....................................................................... 44
Channel library operations..................................................................................... 48
OUTPUT channels .................................................................... 49
Signal flow for output channels ............................................................................. 49
Specifying the channel name/icon ......................................................................... 50
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ............................. 51
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to
MATRIX buses............................................................................................. 53
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) ............................................... 56
Channel library operations..................................................................................... 57
EQ and Dynamics .........
Using EQ .............................
Using dynamics ...................
Using the EQ/Dynamics libra
Channel Job .................
DCA group..........................
DCA Roll-out function .........
Mute group.........................
Using the Recall Safe function
Channel Link function .........
Copying, moving, or initializ
About Mix Minus.................
Scene memory .............
Storing and recalling scenes
Editing scene memories.......
Using the Global Paste functi
Using the Focus Recall functi
Using the Fade function.......
Outputting a control signal t
(GPI OUT) ................
Playing back an audio file tha
Using Preview mode............
Monitor and Cue funct
Using the Monitor function .
Using the Cue function........
Talkback and Oscillato
Using Talkback ....................
Using the Oscillator function
Meters..........................
Operations in the METER scr
Using an MBCL meter bridge
Graphic EQ, Parametric
About the virtual rack ..........
Virtual rack operations .........
Graphic EQ operations ........
About AUTOMIXER..............
Editing the internal effects ...
Effects and tempo synchroni
Table of contents
Reference Manual
................................................................................. 220
nd MATRIX buses .................................................... 223
power supply on/off.............................................. 224
the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays,
................................................................................. 224
the internal clock ..................................................... 225
................................................................................. 225
s ............................................................................... 226
nterface) .................................................................. 237
.......................................................... 243
a USB flash drive ..................................................... 243
................................................................................. 243
recall Help directly................................................... 244
.......................................................... 245
default settings ....................................................... 245
t of the touch screen (Calibration function) .............. 245
tion function) ........................................................... 246
tput gain (Calibration function) ............................... 246
Calibration function)................................................ 248
he channel name display .......................................... 248
channel name display.............................................. 249
gs and Dante audio network settings........................ 249
es ...................................................... 250
.......................................................... 2533
Using the Premium Rack ...................................................................................... 144
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries ............ 153
I/O devices and external head amps .................................... 154
Using an I/O device ............................................................................................. 154
Remotely controlling an R series unit ................................................................... 156
Remotely controlling an amp............................................................................... 159
Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit..................................................................... 160
Using an external head amp ................................................................................ 160
MIDI....................................................................................... 165
MIDI functionality on the CL series console.......................................................... 165
Basic MIDI settings .............................................................................................. 165
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items.................................... 168
Using control changes to control parameters ....................................................... 170
Using Parameter Changes to control parameters ................................................. 172
Recorder................................................................................ 173
About the USB memory recorder ......................................................................... 173
Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder ....................................... 173
Recording audio to a USB flash drive.................................................................... 175
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive ..................................................... 177
Editing the title list............................................................................................... 178
Recording or playing back using a computer DAW .............................................. 179
Using the CL console with Nuendo Live............................................................... 182
Setup ..................................................................................... 186
About the SETUP screen....................................................................................... 186
User settings ........................................................................................................ 188
Preferences .......................................................................................................... 195
USER DEFINED keys ............................................................................................. 197
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ........................................ 199
USER DEFINED knobs........................................................................................... 203
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs ...................................... 204
Assignable encoders ............................................................................................ 206
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders .................................. 207
GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder) functions ..................................... 208
Custom fader bank .............................................................................................. 208
Master fader ........................................................................................................ 209
Custom fader bank functions ............................................................................... 210
Console Lock ....................................................................................................... 210
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive............................... 211
Formatting a USB flash drive ................................................................................ 217
Word clock and slot settings ................................................................................ 218
Using cascade connections ..
Basic settings for MIX buses a
Switching the entire phantom
Specifying the brightness of
and lamps ................
Setting the date and time of
Setting the network address
Dante audio network setting
Using GPI (General Purpose I
Help function...............
Loading a Help/text file from
Viewing Help.......................
Using USER DEFINED keys to
Other functions ...........
Initializing the unit to factory
Adjusting the detection poin
Adjusting the faders (Calibra
Fine-tuning the input and ou
Adjusting the channel color (
Adjusting the brightness of t
Adjusting the contrast of the
Initializing the console settin
Warning/Error Messag
Index............................
Function Tree
Reference Manual
I/O 156
AMP 159
WIRELESS 160
EXTERNAL HA 162
EXTERNAL HA RACK 162
EXTERNAL HA EDIT 162
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT 163
MONITOR
MONITOR 103
CUE 112
MONITOR 105
OSCILLATOR 117
TALKBACK 115
METER
INPUT METER 119
OUTPUT METER 119
SETUP
USER SETUP 186
PREFERENCE 195
USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP 197
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List) 197
USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP 203
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List) 203
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP 206
CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER 209
FADER ASSIGN SELECT 208
USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY 189
CREATE KEY 190
SAVE KEY 193
LOGIN 191
SAVE/LOAD 211
WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP 218
CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH 221, 222
I/O DEVICE4
Function Tree
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner's Manual(booklet).
Main
SELECTED CHANNEL 6
OVERVIEW 13
FUNCTION ACCESS AREA (18)
CHANNEL PARAMETER
PATCH/NAME 18, 28, 50
GAIN/PATCH 29
1ch 29
8ch 30
CH1-48 32
CH49-72/ST IN 32
OUTPUT Indication only
INPUT DELAY 40
8ch 41
CH1-48 42
CH49-72/ST IN 42
DELAY SCALE 41
INSERT/DIRECT OUT 21
1ch 21, 24
8ch 22, 24
HPF/EQ 58
1ch 58
8ch 60
CH1-48 60
CH49-72/ST IN 60
OUTPUT 60
DYNAMICS 61
1ch 61
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT 62
8ch 63
CH1-48 64
CH49-72/ST IN 64
OUTPUT 64
CHANNEL PARAMETER
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND 38
TO STEREO/MONO 51
8ch 51
CH1-48 52
CH49-72/ST IN 52
OUTPUT 52
SURROUND 44
LIBRARY
CHANNEL LIBRARY 48
EQ LIBRARY 64
DYNAMICS LIBRARY 64
GEQ/PEQ LIBRARY 153
EFFECT LIBRARY 153
Portico5033/Portico5043/U76/Opt-2A/
EQ-1A/DynamicEQ LIBRARY
153
DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY 155
RACK
VIRTUAL RACK 125
RACK MOUNTER 128
GEQ EDIT 129
RACK LINK 129
EFFECT RACK 139
EFFECT EDIT 139
EFFECT TYPE 139
PREMIUM RACK 144
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER 145
PREMIUM RACK EDIT 146
AUTOMIXER 135
PARAMETRIC EQ 132
I/O DEVICE
DANTE PATCH 154
DANTE INPUT PATCH 155
OUTPUT PATCH 156
Function Tree
Reference Manual5
NOTE
• The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5.
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, some screens will not show
channels and faders that do not exist on those models.
OUTPUT PORT 56
MIDI/GPI 165, 237
MIDI SETUP 166
PROGRAM CHANGE 168
CONTROL CHANGE 171
GPI 238
FADER START 241
BUS SETUP 223
CONSOLE LOCK 210
DATE/TIME 225
NETWORK 226
DANTE SETUP 226
SCENE
SCENE LIST 88
GLOBAL PASTE 93
Fade time 97
SONG SELECT 100
FOCUS RECALL 95
RECORDER
USB 173
NUENDO LIVE 182
CH JOB
CH LINK MODE 77
DCA GROUP ASSIGN 66
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN 66
RECALL SAFE MODE 74
CH COPY MODE 81
CH MOVE MODE 83
CH DEFAULT MODE 84
SETUP PATCH
PORT SELECT
23, 25, 106, 113,
155, 222
CH SELECT 20, 126, 174, 209
Others
CONFIRMATION 196
SOFT KEYBORD (21)
LOGIN 191
Startup Menu
MODE SELECT 245
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES 245
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES 245
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 245
INPUT PORT TRIM 247
OUTPUT PORT TRIM 247
SLOT OUTPUT TRIM 247
FADER CALIBRATION 246
LED COLOR CALIBRATION 248
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
elected, the channel selected with the
he knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL
w indicating the value of that parameter will
operate a knob.6
SELECTED CHANNEL section
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of the display corresponds to a channel
module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to use the knobs on the panel to set
all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL]
key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip,
either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels
will be linked.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL Section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
NOTE
• To select a MIX or MATRIX channel, use the Bank
Select keys to recall the desired channel to the
Centralogic section, and then press the [SEL] key for
the desired channel.
• The number and name of the currently-selected
channel is shown in the channel select field located in
the Function Access Area of the touch screen.
• If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been
assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch
between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same
[SEL] key.
• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel
select field located in the Function Access Area.
Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the field to
select the next channel.
• If you have turned on the option“POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the
PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button),
pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the screen (1 ch).
• Even if a different screen is s
[SEL] key can be set using t
section. In this case, a windo
appear on screen when you
STEP
1. Use the [SEL] key in the top panel INPUT section, ST IN section, or the STEREO/
MONO section, to select the channel to control.
2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
3. Use the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel.
Channel number
Channel name
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
are two mono channels:
e corresponding bus.
ng bus is indicated. If the type is VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE
on on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, the type is
the corresponding bus on or off.
o channel:
s the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (evenred). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the
ing bus is indicated.
the two buses on or off.
bus is set to FIXED, controllers 2 and 3 mentioned above will not
N knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch window.
2
3
7
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
SEND field
In this field, you can view the send level and pre/post from the channel
to each MIX/MATRIX bus. You can also switch the on/off status of the
send signals. The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in
the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels
(odd-numbered and even-numbered) are comprised of two mono
channels or a stereo channel.
1 Tabs
Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be
displayed in the SEND field.
• MIX1-16 tab............................ displays MIX buses 1-16.
• MIX17-24/MATRIX tab ........... displays MIX buses 17-24 and
MATRIX buses 1-8.
If the destination bus channels
1 SEND knob
Adjusts the send level to th
2 PRE indicator
The type of the correspondi
FADER], and if the PRE butt
displayed.
3 ON button
Switches the send signal to
If the destination bus is a stere
1 SEND/PAN knob
The right-hand knob adjust
numbered and odd-numbe
same signal.
2 PRE indicator
The type of the correspond
3 ON button
Switches the send signal to
NOTE
• If the type of the destination
be displayed.
• Press the SEND knob or PA
1
1
2
3
1
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
he on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel
adjust the pan and balance.
controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the
channel is selected:
gnal routed to the
STEREO/MONO 8ch
el is selected, you can
PAN knob or the
ow. For a MIX channel,
the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the
pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or
ange even if channel link is used.
N knob is selected, the pan level is nominal when panned either left
f the BALANCE knob is selected the balance level is nominal at
d either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link
f a signal sent from the
NO bus.
set to LCR mode, the
ion 2.The LCR button
r the signals sent from
MONO bus.
ONO channel is selected:
channel is stereo, the
enabling you to adjust
left and right channels.
aural, the BALANCE
not be used.
TO STEREO 8ch
1 2
2
1
8
GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also
view the operational status of the head amp.
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain/digital gain of the head amp.
Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.
2 GC indicator
Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio
network if the Gain Compensation function is turned
on.
3 OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the status of the phase setting.
5 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp.
6 HPF ON indicator
Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.
7 AG-DG LINK indicator
Indicates a link between the analog gain and digital gain of the head amp.
8 Digital/Analog gain value
If analog gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the digital gain value is shown here. If digital
gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the analog gain value is shown here.
NOTE
• For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp, 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7
will not be shown. For an output channel, 1 - 7 will not be shown.
• If a GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP  PREFERENCE
screen, the digital gain knob will appear for 1, and 2, 5, 6, and 7 will not be displayed.
For details, refer to “HA (head amp) settings” (page 29).
PAN/BALANCE field
This field enables you to switch t
to the STEREO/MONO bus, and
The view and the function of the
selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a si
STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the
window. If the ST IN chann
specify whether to view the
BALANCE knob in this wind
the PAN knob will appear if
signal is stereo.
NOTE
• For mono input channels, the
right. These levels do not ch
• For ST IN channels, if the PA
or right and -3dB at center. I
center and +3dB when panne
is used.
2 ST/MONO button
Switches the on/off status o
channel to the STEREO/MO
If an INPUT/MIX channel is
LCR button appears in locat
is an overall on/off switch fo
the channel to the STEREO/
When a MATRIX, STEREO, or M
1 BALANCE knob
If the signal on the selected
BALANCE knob will appear,
the volume balance for the
If the channel signal is mon
knob is not shown and can
Press the knob to open the
window.
41
76
3
5 8
2
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
parameter settings. Press each
indow.
d. is set to LPF or H.SHELF (highfilter type is set to L.SHELF (lowot be displayed. Only the filter
.
Q knob on the panel counterholding it down will set the filter
Q knob clockwise while pressing
he filter type to high-shelving.
knob on the panel clockwise while
will set the filter type to lown selected, fully rotating the LOW
unter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter
type in the HPF/EQ 1ch window.
r cutoff frequency) for each band.
st for each band.
set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN
set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN
1 2 39
When using Surround mode (MIX1- MIX6)
3 DOWN MIX
This field enables you to view the downmix
coefficient and L/R button settings.
Press this field to open the TO STEREO/MONO
window.
 INPUT DELAY field
This field enables you to view the delay settings.
1 ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
2 Delay time
The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If
the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the
ms value appears in the middle row.
Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch window.
HPF field (input channels only)
This field enables you to set the HPF. If an output channel
is selected, a gray circle will appear in location 1, and 2
will not be displayed.
1 HPF knob
Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
2 ON button
Switches the HPF on or off.
EQ parameter field
This field displays the 4-band EQ
knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch w
1 Q knob
Specifies the Q for each ban
If the HIGH band filter type
shelving), or the LOW band
shelving), the Q knob will n
type name will be displayed
NOTE
• Fully rotating the HIGH band
clockwise while pressing and
type to LPF. Fully rotating the
and holding it down will set t
• Fully rotating the LOW band Q
pressing and holding it down
shelving.
• If an output channel has bee
band Q knob on the panel co
type to HPF.
• You can also switch the filter
2 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the center frequency (o
3 GAIN knob
Sets the amount of cut/boo
NOTE
• If the HIGH band filter type is
knob on the panel.
• If the LOW band filter type is
knob on the panel.
3
1
2
1
2
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
sert settings.
e INSERT/DIRECT OUT
f. ium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit
.
ssigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is
irect Out settings.
e INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch
el value will appear below the
or off.
ecall Safe settings.
e RECALL SAFE window.
tus on or off.
hannel parameters are set to Recall Safe.
1
2
43
21
2
1
3
10
EQ graph field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open
the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF, and EQ.
DYNAMICS1/DYNAMICS2 field
This field enables you to set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.
1 OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
2 Level meter
Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange)
when the Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line.
3 Threshold
Specifies the threshold.
4 Parameters
Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected
dynamics type.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch window, in which you can
make detailed parameter settings.
 INSERT field
This field enables you to make in
1 Popup button
Press this button to open th
1ch window.
2 ON button
Switches the insert on or of
3 RACK EDIT button
Appears if an effect or Prem
screen for the inserted rack
4 IN indicator
Appears if a port has been a
sent to the insert-in.
DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make D
1 Popup button
Press this button to open th
window. The Direct Out lev
button.
2 ON button
Switches the Direct Out on
RECALL SAFE field
This field enables you to make R
1 Popup button
Press this button to open th
2 ON button
Switches the Recall Safe sta
3 PARTIAL indicator
Lights only if some of the c
1 2
3
4
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
lected:
hich the channel is assigned.
he mute group, this button lights
annel from the mute group.
which the channel is assigned.
4
5
6
11
FADER field
This field enables you to make settings for the channel on/off
status and the level.
1 Fader
Displays the current level.
Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels.
2 Level indicator
Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If
the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the Σ CLIP indicator will light.
3 ON button
Switches the channel on and off. The button is linked with the corresponding [ON] key
on the top panel.
NOTE
For CL V2.0 and later, the TOUCH AND TURN function assigned to one of the USER DEFINED
knobs enables you to control the fader in the FADER field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen.
DCA/MUTE field
This field enables you to select the DCA or mute group to which the
channel is assigned.
1 Tabs
Select a DCA or mute group. Press the selected tab once again
to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
When the DCA group tab is selected:
2 DCA group select buttons
Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
3 Mute group indicators
Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
When the mute group tab is se
4 Mute group select buttons
Select the mute group to w
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to t
orange.
5 SAFE button
Temporarily removes the ch
6 DCA group indicators
Indicate the DCA group to
1
2
3
1
3
2
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
Centralogic section
NEL VIEW screen is displayed, you can switch to the OVERVIEW
e multifunction knobs 1-8. This is convenient when you want to
IEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups
VIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be
] keys and [CUE] keys of the Centralogic section.
screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction
c section.
the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA
ntrol.
s of the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the (up
and switch them on/off.
IEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the
f up to eight channels.12
Centralogic section
The Centralogic section located below the touch screen lets you recall and simultaneously
control a set of eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. If you press one of the
Bank Select keys, the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to
the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys in
the Centralogic section.
Operations in the
NOTE
• When the SELECTED CHAN
screen by pressing any of th
quickly switch to the OVERV
selected for control.
• The bottom line of the OVER
controlled by the faders, [ON
• The top line of the OVERVIEW
knobs 1 - 8 in the Centralogi
Bank Select keys
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in
groups that you want to co
2. Use the faders and [ON] key
to) eight selected channels
3. Use the fields on the OVERV
parameters for the group o
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
A (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also
head amp.
controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the
head amp.
e GAIN knob to the corresponding multifunction knob in the
h enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation
indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to
n assigned to a multifunction knob, press the knob to open
dow.
put port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
ly if an input channel is selected.
er (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is
ad amp is patched to the channel.
channels only)
tting for the head amp
the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be
s set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen, the DIGITAL
d of knob 1, and indicator 3 will not be displayed.
n the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then
ON to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value
URN] knob.
ital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN  DIGITAL GAIN to a USER
ing an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key and then
D knob or the GAIN knob for the selected channel while 13
OVERVIEW Screen
CHANNEL NAME field
This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number,
name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected
channel is highlighted.
NOTE
If you have retained a specific channel (that is controlled by the faders or knobs in the Centralogic
section) by pressing and holding down the corresponding Bank Select key, the channel name
display at the top of the channel strip graphic may differ from the name displayed at the bottom
of the same channel strip.
GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make H
view the operational status of the
The view and the function of the
selected channel.
If the head amp is patched:
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the
• Press this field to assign th
Centralogic section, whic
function is turned on, an
the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has bee
the GAIN/PATCH 8ch win
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the in
This indicator is available on
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom pow
not displayed unless the he
4 Ø (Phase) indicator (input
Indicates the input phase se
NOTE
• If the slot is not connected to
displayed.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION i
GAIN knob will appear instea
• Press the SETUP button, the
set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTI
by using the [TOUCH AND T
• You can also operate the dig
DEFINED knob, or by assign
adjusting the USER DEFINE
ALTERNATE is on.
: Selected channel
: Unselected channel
1
4
3
2
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
value and meter for Dynamics
YNAMICS 1/2 1ch window.
selected, this field will be blank.
, send on/off status, and pre/post
s, use the [MIX 1-16] key/[MIX 17-24/
CHANNEL section.
bus, use the SEND knob of the
e type of the destination bus.
mono):
dicate the send on/off and pre/post
color turns gray. With the post setting,
stereo):
and even-numbered) are in stereo, the
PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will 14
 INPUT DELAY field (input channels only)
This field displays the delay status for the input channel. Press this field to open the INPUT
DELAY 8ch window.
1 DELAY ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
 INSERT/DIRECT OUT field
This field displays the Insert/Direct out status. Press this field to open the INSERT/DIRECT
OUT 8ch window.
1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the insert on/off status.
2 DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the Direct Out on/off status.
EQ field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of
the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in
which you can set the HPF and EQ.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
DYNAMICS 1/2 field
This field displays the threshold
1/2. Press this field to open the D
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been
SEND field
This field displays the send level
settings for 16 buses.
To select the 16 destination buse
MATRIX] key in the SELECTED
To adjust the send level for each
SELECTED CHANNEL section
This field varies depending on th
If the destination bus is VARI (
The knob color and scale color in
status. If the send is off, the knob
the knob scale color turns black.
If the destination bus is VARI (
If a pair of buses (odd-numbered
left-hand knob will function as the
function as the SEND knob.
If the slot is patched:
The slot name will appear.
If the rack is connected:
The patch and module name will appear.
If the output is connected:
Only the patch will appear.
1
1
2
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
hannel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field.
ily removed from the mute group, S (Safe) will appear on the
en specified for a mute group, the color of the characters will
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.15
If the destination bus is set to FIXED:
The SEND ON/OFF button for each bus is shown instead of the knob.
TO STEREO/MONO field
This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/
MONO bus.
This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected,
you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window.
For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE
knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
2 ST/MONO indicator
Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator
will be displayed.
When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected:
The Σ CLIP indicator will light if the signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating
the balance of the left/right channels.
DCA group field
A DCA group (1-16) to which the
in this field.
Press this field to open the DCA/
Mute group field
A mute group (1-8) to which the c
If the channel has been temporar
third row. If a dimmer level has be
change from red to orange.
Press this field to open the DCA/
1
2
2
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
l patching and Dante audio
signal flow through the CL series console, I/O devices, and
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
MONITOR L/R
MONITOR C
CUE L/R
NO ASSIGN
MIX 1-6
STEREO L/R
MIX17, MIX18, MIX19, MIX20, MIX21, MIX22, MIX23,
MIX24
STEREO L/R
STEREO L/R
Output channels
64/512
64
SW
ID #1
ID #2
UT PATCH
Dante Network
“Dante” (ports)
Up to 512 channels
(logical value)
Dante
patching
CL series
internal
patching
I/O Device
I/O Device16
Input and output patching
This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect
inserts, and how to use direct outputs.
When the CL series is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks/ports) are patched to
each input channel.
For CL5
For CL3
For CL1
When the CL is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks/ports) are patched to the following
output channels.
CL console interna
network patching
The following diagram shows the
Dante audio network.
Input channels Input port (jack/port)
CH1-48 DANTE1-48
CH49-64 DANTE49-64
CH65-72 OMNI1-8
ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)
Input channels Input port (jack/port)
CH1-48 DANTE1-48
CH49-64 DANTE49-64
ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)
Input channels Input port (jack/port)
CH1-48 DANTE1-48
ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)
Output port (jack/port) Output channels
DANTE1-24 MIX 1-24
DANTE25-32 MATRIX1-8
DANTE33-34 STEREO L/R
DANTE35 MONO
DANTE36-37 MONITOR L/R
DANTE38 MONITOR C
DANTE39-40 CUE L/R
DANTE41-64 NO ASSIGN
SLOT1 (1)-(16) MIX1-16
SLOT2 (1)-(8) MIX17-24
SLOT2 (9)-(16)
SLOT3 (1)-(2)
SLOT3(3)
SLOT3 (4)-(5)
SLOT3(6)
SLOT3 (7)-(8)
SLOT3 (9)-(16)
OMNI OUT 1 - OMNI OUT 6
OMNI OUT 7 - OMNI OUT 8
FX1L(A), FX2L(A), FX3L(A),
FX4L(A), FX5L(A), FX6L(A),
FX7L(A), FX8L(A)
DIGITAL OUT L/R
RECORDER INPUT L/R
Output port (jack/port)
8 16 16 16
Dante-MY16-AUD
ID #3
OMNI MY MY MY
INP
CL series
I/O Device
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
t patching
port from the GAIN/PATCH screen.
the Centralogic section to select the input channels that
channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
e category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and
to select the input port.
PATCH/NAME screen17
Input patching
CL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network
patching and CL console internal patching.
For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH window. In this
window, you can patch the CL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels can be
input from a Dante audio network to a CL series console. You can choose up to 64 channels
from a maximum of 512 channels (logical value) of Dante audio network signals. Select the I/
O device (up to 64 channels) that you want to control from the CL series console.
Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen) to
channels on the CL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1-64 in the
GAIN/PATCH screen.
NOTE
By default, DANTE 1-64 are assigned to input channels 1-64.
Output patching
Use the OUTPUT PORT screen to patch the CL console's output channels and Dante audio
network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1-64 ports.
NOTE
By default, MIX 1 - 24 are assigned to DANTE 1 - 24, MATRIX 1 - 8 are assigned to DANTE 25
- 32, STEREO L/R are assigned to DANTE 33/34, and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35.
Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1-64 (assigned in the OUTPUT PORT SETUP
screen) to I/O rack outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH screen of the I/O RACK to make these
assignments.
Changing the inpu
NOTE
You can also select an input
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in
you want to control.
2. Press the channel number/
3. Select the type of port in th
use the port select buttons
OVERVIEW screen
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
(A) - PR2R(B)
assigned to the currently-selected channel.
en items.
ut patching
either select the output port that will be the output destination
n select the output channel that will be the output source for
port for each output channel
the Centralogic section to select the output channels.
channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
e category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and
to select the output port.
PATCH/NAME screen18
PATCH/NAME screen
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an
icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen.
2 Icon button
Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this
button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3 Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this
field, a keyboard window allowing you to change the channel name will appear.
4 Category select list
Selects the category of input port. The categories correspond to the following input
ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1-32 ............DANTE1 - DANTE32
• DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64
• OMNI/PB OUT .......OMNI 1 - OMNI 8, PB OUT (L), PB OUT (R)
• SLOT1 ....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)
• EFFECT RACK ......FX1L(A) - FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK ...PR1L
5 Port select buttons
Select the input port that is
6 Tabs
Enable you to switch betwe
7 Close button
Closes the screen.
Changing the outp
To change the patching, you can
of each output channel, or you ca
each output port.
Selecting the output
2 73
1
6
4
5
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in
2. Press the channel number/
3. Select the type of port in th
use the port select buttons
OVERVIEW screen
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
ttons let you select the port to patch. To cancel the
once again.
en items.
channel for each output port
n the PREFERNCE tab on the USER SETUP screen is ON, a
ppear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL
N, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to
ady patched elsewhere.
, press the SETUP button.
tton in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of
UT PORT screen, select the output port you want to
tton of the port you want to operate.
and the channel select buttons to select the send-source
OUTPUT PORT screen19
PATCH/NAME screen
1 PATCH button
Indicates the port that is patched to the output channel. If you press this button when
another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set.
NOTE
Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console.
3 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or
sample name.
4 Channel number display box
Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed.
5 Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this
field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
6 Category select list
Select the type of port.
7 Port select buttons
From the category, these bu
selection, press the button
8 Tabs
Enable you to switch betwe
9 Close button
Closes the screen.
Selecting the output
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION i
confirmation dialog box will a
PATCH CONFIRMATION is O
change a location that is alre
3 54
1
9
6
7
2
8
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the OUTPUT PORT bu
the SETUP screen.
3. In the tabs below the OUTP
control.
4. Press the channel select bu
5. Use the category select list
channel.
SETUP screen
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
nal device into a channel
r or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT,
O channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port
ation of the insertion in/out can be specified individually for
in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
f the CL console and the external device (page 218).
INSERT 1 and INSERT 2 for each channel group, as shown in the
ny output or input ports.
de pment to an OMNI IN/OUT jack or to an I/O card
the Centralogic section to select the channel to which
t source.
UT field.
SERT IN button.
input port.
n. 17-32 CH33-48
CH49-64
(CL5 and
CL3
only)
CH65-72
(CL5
only)
MIX1-24/
ST/
MONO
MATRIX
1-8
16 16 16 8 30(24)* 8
16 16 16 8 30(24)* 8
INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch)20
CH SELECT screen
1 Category select list
Select the category of the channel. The categories correspond to the following channels.
They vary depending on the output port type.
• MIX/MATRIX .......................... MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8
• ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ........... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), MONI L, MONI R,
MONI C, CUE L, CUE R, SMON L, SMON R, SMON C,
SMON LFE, SMON Ls, SMON Rs, MMTX L, MMTX R,
MMTX C, MMTX LFE, MMTX Ls, MMTX Rs
• DIRECT OUT 1-32 ................. CH 1 - CH 32 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 33-64 ............... CH 33 - CH 64 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 65-72 ............... CH 65 - CH 72 Direct Outs
• INSERT OUT 1-32 ................. CH 1 - CH 32 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT 33-64 ............... CH 33 - CH 64 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT 65-72 ............... CH 65 - CH 72 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert Outs
• CASCADE MIX/MATRIX ........ MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8
• CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE ... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), CUE L, CUE R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 Channel select button
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
Inserting an exter
You can insert an effect processo
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MON
used for the insertion and the loc
each channel.
NOTE
• If you install a digital I/O card
synchronize the word clock o
• There is a limit to the sum of
table below. You can select a
* When using Surround mo
1
2
3
STEP
1. Connect your external equi
installed in slots 1 - 3.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in
you want to assign the inpu
3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT O
4. Press the INSERT OUT or IN
5. Select an output port or an
6. Press the INSERT ON butto
CH1-16 CH
INSERT
OUT
16
INSERT IN 16
OVERVIEW screen
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
reen (1ch)
sert settings. Press one of three fields to choose PRE EQ
E FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON
as the insert position.
function as an insert for each block.
ed output port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to
dow, in which you can select an output port.
ted input port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to
dow, in which you can select an input port.
f. ton (input channels only)
position and direct out point setting will be applied to all
utton (output channels only)
point setting will be applied to all output channels.
al connections with fixed sequential numbers.
< < 9
5
86 721
• If you exceed the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN limitation, the indicator will light up on the left.
• If the limit is exceeded, invalid ports will be marked with a strike-out line.
• If the limit is exceeded, the following ports will take priority per channel group (listed in the table
above).
1 INSERT 1 will take priority over INSERT 2.
2 Lower-number channel will take priority.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT sc
 INSERT field
This field enables you to make in
(immediately before the EQ), PR
(immediately after the [ON] key)
NOTE
You can set the I/O ports to
1 INSERT OUT button
Displays the currently-select
open the PORT SELECT win
2 INSERT IN button
Displays the currently-selec
open the PORT SELECT win
3 INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or of
4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT but
Specifies whether the insert
input channels.
5 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT b
Specifies whether the insert
NOTE
Insert 1 and insert 2 are seri
1
2
3
4
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
reen (8ch)
he channel icon, color, and number appear.
f. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above
ted port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen,
output port.
ted port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen,
nput port. You can also view the insert-in level by checking
right of the this button.22
 INSERT IN HA field
This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the
insert-in.
6 +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) (currently-selected for insert 1 and insert 2)
on or off.
7 A.GAIN knob
Indicates the currently-selected head amp analog gain setting for insert 1 and insert 2.
Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs.
NOTE
• If you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console
as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the
INSERT IN HA field.
• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal
selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.
8 HA meter
Displays the level of the currently-selected head amp input signal for insert 1 and insert
2.
9 Close button
Closes the screen.
0 Resource Meter
Displays the settings for each channel for INSERT IN and INSERT OUT.
NOTE
If surround mode is set on the CL series console, the INSERT resources for output channels
[MIX/ST MONO] are reduced from 30 to 24.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT sc
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set. T
2 INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or of
the button.
3 INSERT OUT button
Indicates the currently-selec
in which you can select an
4 INSERT IN button
Indicates the currently-selec
in which you can select an i
the indicator located to the
1
4
3
2
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
g an INPUT channel
can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O
UT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot.
in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
f the CL console and the external device (page 218).
ce to an OMNI OUT jack, OUTPUT jack, or to an I/O card
the Centralogic section to select the input channel that
.
UT field in the OVERVIEW screen.
H button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch)23
PORT SELECT screen
Displayed when you press either the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button in the one-channel
or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the input/output port used for
insertion.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of port. The categories correspond to the following ports. The
displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI...................................... OMNI1 - OMNI8
• SLOT1 .................................... SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 .................................... SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 .................................... SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)
• GEQ RACK ............................ GEQ1L(A) - GEQ16R(B)
(MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only)
GEQ1L(A) - GEQ8R(B) (INPUT channels only)
• EFFECT RACK ...................... FX1L(A) - FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK ................... PR1L(A) - PR8R(B)
2 Port select buttons
Assign the port that will be used as insert-out/insert-in for the currently-selected
channel.
NOTE
If a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or
insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode
will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in
which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be
defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
Directly outputtin
The signal of an INPUT channel
device, from the desired OMNI O
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card
synchronize the word clock o
1
2
3
STEP
1. Connect your external devi
installed in slot 1-3.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in
you want to output directly
3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT O
4. Press the DIRECT OUT PATC
5. Select an output port.
OVERVIEW screen
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
reen (8ch)
or off. The currently-selected Direct Out point is indicated
n ted Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
hich you can select an output port.
f the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using
4
24
INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (1ch)
1 DIRECT OUT field
Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct
output position.
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
3 DIRECT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using
the multifunction knob.
5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input
channels.
6 Close button
Closes the screen.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT sc
1 DIRECT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on
above the button.
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH butto
Displays the currently-selec
PORT SELECT window, in w
3 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level o
the multifunction knob.
4 Close button
Closes the screen.
5
4
1
6
32
1
2
3
Input and output patching
Reference Manual25
PORT SELECT screen
Displayed when you press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the one-channel or the eightchannel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the output port used for direct output.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of output port. The categories correspond to the following output
ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI/REC .............OMNI1-OMNI8, REC IN(L), REC IN(R)
• SLOT1 ....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)
• DANTE1-32 ............DANTE1 - DANTE32
• DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64
2 Output port select buttons
Assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
1
2
3
Input channels
Reference Manual
ess stereo signals. When the CL series console is in the
the EFFECT RACK 1 - 8 is assigned.
input channels.
put signal.
of the input signal.
pecified frequency.
izer)
ands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
that can be used for gating and ducking, or as an expander
r that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
You can specify up to 1000ms.
e effect.
or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R26
Input channels
This chapter explains various operations for input channels.
Signal flow for input channels
The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O
devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1-3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus,
MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows.
MONO channels
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the CL series console is in the
default state, the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned.
STEREO channels
These channels are used to proc
default state, the input signal from
• INPUT PATCH
Assigns input signals to the
• Ø (phase)
Switches the phase of the in
• DIGITAL GAIN
Attenuates/boosts the level
• HPF (High Pass Filter)
Cuts the region below the s
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equal
A parametric EQ with four b
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor
or compressor.
• DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processo
• INPUT DELAY
Corrects input signal delay.
• LEVEL/DCA 1-16
Adjusts the input level of th
• ON (On/off)
Turns the input channel on
IN
P
U
T
P
AT
C
H
MIX
1 2 23... 24
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8...
CUE
L R
IN
P
U
T
P
AT
C
H
Input channels
Reference Manual
nnel name/icon
pecify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel.
ify the channel name and icon.
the Centralogic section to select the input channels.
hannel name field of the channel you want to specify on
tabs on the PATCH/NAME screen, and specify a channel
PATCH/NAME screen27
• Pan
Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. For the
STEREO channel, you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The BALANCE parameter
adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the
STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP window so that the setting of
the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that
are set to stereo.
• LCR (Left/Center/Right)
Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal
that consists of the L/R channels plus the center channel.
• MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1 - 24.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1-24 (MATRIX send levels 1-24)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1 24. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from
the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1 - 8 (MATRIX send levels 1 - 8)
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8.
As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from
the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• INSERT (MONO channels only)
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an
effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose
immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON]
key.
• DIRECT OUT (MONO channels only)
This can be patched to any output port, and the input signal sent directly from that
output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before
the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after
the [ON] key.
• METER
Indicates the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is
detected (page 120).
Specifying the cha
On the CL series unit, you can s
Here we will explain how to spec
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in
2. Press the channel number/c
the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Switch between items in the
name and icon.
OVERVIEW screen
Input channels
Reference Manual
N tab
ns ns e. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later.
racters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample
assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a
s “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a
set the channel color to black (OFF). The channel indicators on
elected will go off.28
PATCH/NAME screen
When selecting the PATCH tab
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-patched port. If you press this button when another tab is active,
a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2 Icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or
sample name.
3 Channel name input box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. When you press the inside of this box, the
SOFT KEYBOARD window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name.
4 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
5 Close button
Closes the screen.
When selecting the ICO
1 Channel color select butto
Select a channel color.
2 Icon select buttons
Select a channel icon.
3 Sample name setup butto
Select a preset sample nam
NOTE
• You can also add or edit cha
name. If you want to quickly
consecutive number, such a
number.
• In CL V1.7 and later, you can
channels for which black is s
2 53
1
4
1
2
3
Input channels
Reference Manual
or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold
rnal device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
, and Ø button are valid only on channels for which the assigned
n the I/O device, the OMNI IN on the CL unit, or a slot that is
d amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES).
1 ch)
mber/Channel name indicator
number, and name.
patched to the input channel.
GAIN/PATCH window (1 ch)
3 4 5 6 7
8
29
When selecting the NAME tab
You can directly enter a channel name on the keyboard screen.
HA (head amp) settings
You can make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for the
input channel.
• To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
Setting the gain
Head amp settings are made in the GAIN/PATCH window.
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may
output impedance of the exte
power.
• The GAIN knob, +48V button
input port is an INPUT jack o
connected to an external hea
GAIN/PATCH window (
1 Channel icon/Channel nu
Indicates the channel icon,
2 HA section
Appears if the head amp is
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels.
2. Press the HA/PHASE field in the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Press the 1ch or 8ch tab in the GAIN/PATCH window.
4. Make settings for the head amp.
OVERVIEW screen
2
1
Input channels
Reference Manual
nd GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the
ain operation.
e analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you
own console without affecting the level of other consoles.
ns between the analog and digital gain for all input channels
tatus in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
8ch)
: Link is on.
: Link is off.
9730
NOTE
• If a slot is patched to the channel, the type of the slot/MY card and the slot meter will be displayed.
• If a rack is patched, the type of rack and type of effect will be displayed.
• +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Adjust the gain by using the
multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an
indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the
function was turned on.
• HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
• GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device
to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the
monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording
via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant
level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device
is changed. If the Gain Compensation function is turned off, the analog gain and digital
gain will return to the level that was obtained when you turned on the function.
Therefore, the signal level on the digital network will remain the same.
• Gain compensation meter
Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation.
3 INPUT PORT button
Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press this button to display the PATCH
window, in which you can select a port to patch.
4 Icon / Channel name button
Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/
NAME window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name.
5 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input from the head
amp.
6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. Adjust the digital gain by using the multifunction knobs.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the
level of the signal input to the input channels.
7 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.
8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
9 AG-DG LINK button
If this button is turned on a
digital gain to the analog g
While you are controlling th
to modify the level on your
0 AG-DG ALL ON/OFF butto
You can turn on/off the link
simultaneously.
You can also view the link s
GAIN/PATCH window (
1
2
3
6
8
4
5
Input channels
Reference Manual
patched to the input channel.
ection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the
he input channel to which the head amp has been patched.
hantom power (+48V) on or off.
b the head amp. Press this knob to control the
multifunction knobs. If the Gain
rned on, an indicator appears, showing the
time the function was turned on.
vel .
button
sation function on or off for that channel.
nd reverse phase settings of signals input from the head
b ue. Press this knob to control the parameter values using the
Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will
f the signal input to the input channels.
signal passes through the digital gain.
L OFF button
on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
nd GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the
ain operation.
e analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you
own console without affecting the level of other consoles.
ns between the analog and digital gain for all input channels 31
1 Channel select button
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the
corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.
2 PATCH button
Press this button to display the PORT SELECT window to patch the input port to the
input channel.
PORT SELECT window
• TAKE FROM PORT button
The HA settings of the port will take priority. Even if you change the patching, the HA
settings of the port will remain unchanged.
• TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
The HA settings of the channel will take priority. The HA settings of the port that had
been previously patched will be copied to the newly-patched port.
If the channel's HA settings are selected, the following HA settings will be copied from
the channel to the port that is patched. If you patch the input channel from an input that
does not have these settings (i.e., that does not have a HA), the default values will be
specified.
NOTE
If you're newly patching a previously-unpatched input channel, the default values will be specified
if the HA INFO field's TAKE FROM CHANNEL button is pressed.
3 HA section
Appears if the head amp is
NOTE
If the slot (for which the conn
MY card will be displayed.
• +48V button
This button will appear for t
Press the button to switch p
• A.GAIN (analog gain) kno
Indicates the analog gain of
parameter values using the
Compensation function is tu
analog gain position at the
• Level meter
Indicates the input signal le
• GC (Gain Compensation)
Switches the Gain Compen
4 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal a
amp.
5 D. GAIN (digital gain) kno
Indicates the digital gain val
multifunction knobs. If the
be used to adjust the level o
6 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after the
7 GC ALL ON button/GC AL
Switch Gain Compensation
8 AG-DG LINK button
If this button is turned on a
digital gain to the analog g
While you are controlling th
to modify the level on your
9 AG-DG ALL ON/OFF butto
You can turn on/off the link
simultaneously.
HA setting Default value
HA gain amount -6dB
HPF on/off Off
Phantom power on/off Off
Gain compensation on/off Off
TAKE FROM PORT button
TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
Input channels
Reference Manual
put port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
ly if an input channel is selected.
tatus for each channel.
for each channel.
d to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not
be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination. 3
d to a rack, the knob 1 will be replaced with the port ID of the rack.
put channel, the knob 1 will be replaced with a dotted line “----”.
L GAIN parameter select button:
tting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel,
alue using the multifunction knob.
put port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
ly if an input channel is selected.
for each channel.
parameter select button:
e PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input
l.32
GAIN/PATCH window
(1-48, 49-72/ST IN (CL5), 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))
This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you
can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the
multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section.
1 Parameter select buttons
Switch parameters to view in the window.
• ANALOG GAIN...................... Analog gain
• DIGITAL GAIN ....................... Digital gain
• PATCH ................................... Patch selection
2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
3 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
 If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button:
1 GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel,
and then control the gain value using the multifunction knob. If the Gain Compensation
function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time
the function was turned on.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the in
This indicator is available on
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the +48V on/off s
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting
NOTE
If the input channel is patche
recognized, the knob 1 will
will not be displayed.
If the input channel is patche
If nothing is patched to the in
 If you press the DIGITA
1 GAIN knob
Indicates the digital gain se
and then control the gain v
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the in
This indicator is available on
3 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting
 If you press the PATCH
1 PATCH button
Press this button to open th
port to patch to the channe
12 12
3
1 3
2
4
1
2
3
1
Input channels
Reference Manual
m an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by
sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
f a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is
to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals
ndividually (page 34).
signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C))
nnel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on
knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an
(L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
E knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input
bus and MONO (C) bus.
nal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or
NITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the
ntinue with the following procedure.33
Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain
Compensation is on
If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I/O
device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount.
Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the
digital domain.
For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain
Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to
+45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated
by -15 dB).
At this time, the gain of each signal input to the CL series console will be adjusted by the digital
gain parameter of the CL series console.
If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/O device, adjusting the
analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console,
because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level.
However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must
first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and
then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain
Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same
amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted.
NOTE
You can perform this operation by assigning the Gain Compensation on/off function to one of the
USER DEFINED keys.
Sending the signal from an input channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus
The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used to send signals to the main speakers. There are
two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR
mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as
follows.
ST/MONO mode
This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus
independently.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be
switched on or off individually.
• The panning of a signal sent fro
the TO ST PAN knob. (Signals
• The left/right volume balance o
controlled by this knob.
If PAN/BALANCE mode is set
sent to the STEREO bus L/R i
LCR mode
This mode sends input channel
simultaneously.
• Signals sent from an input cha
or off collectively.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio)
input channel to the STEREO
• The TO ST PAN knob/BALANC
channel to the STEREO (L/R)
NOTE
If you want to monitor the sig
similar devices, press the MO
monitor source before you co
Input channels
Reference Manual
dow (8ch)
nd pan/balance settings of the signal sent from input
us and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
n select multiple channels simultaneously.
lected mode will light.
ode can be switched between ST/MONO and LCR. For a
can be switched between PAN and BALANCE.
itches for signals that are sent from each channel to the
en the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
clipping at some point in the channel.
LCR mode34
TO STEREO/MONO win
Here you can control the on/off a
channels to the STEREO (L/R) b
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You ca
2 Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-se
3 MODE select button
For a MONO channel, the m
STEREO channel, the mode
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are on/off sw
STEREO bus/MONO bus wh
5 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is
STEP
1. Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the input channel from which you want
to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channel from
which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
3. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in
the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
4. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
5. In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO
channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
6. In the INPUT section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the input channel
you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was
selected for the channel in step 4.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the STEREO/MONO button to turn on/off
the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus / MONO bus.
8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel
to the STEREO bus.
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the
input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively.
8. Use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between the signals sent from that
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
9. Use the TO ST PAN knob to specify the panning of signals sent from the input
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
OVERVIEW screen TO STEREO/MONO window
1
2
3
6
5
4
7
ST/MONO mode
Input channels
Reference Manual
dow
IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN
t from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/
djust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight
n select multiple channels simultaneously.
clipping at some point in the channel.
CE knob
nce.
e knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding
rload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the
e knob will light.
NO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/
m the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the 35
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For MONO channels, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of
signals sent to the STEREO bus. For STEREO channels, this acts as a PAN knob, and also
as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the
STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the
corresponding multifunction knob.
7 Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
8 LCR button
If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, this button is displayed instead of 4. This
button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input
channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to
select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. (page 36).
TO STEREO/MONO win
(CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST
(CL1))
Adjusts the status of a signal sen
MONO bus. Here you can also a
channels.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You ca
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALAN
Adjusts the panning or bala
To adjust the value, press th
multifunction knob.
If the signal reaches the ove
Σ indicator to the right of th
4 ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MO
off status of signals sent fro
If that channel is set to LCR
The LCR indicator indicates
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
8
9
1
2
3
4
Input channels
Reference Manual
et to 100%
et to 100% (ST IN channel)
R
Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
R
ob Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to
the STEREO (L) bus
R
ob Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to
the STEREO (R) bus36
Signal level when LCR mode is selected
If LCR mode is selected, the signal level sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus
will vary according to the settings of the CSR knob and the TO ST PAN knob.
When the CSR knob is set to 0% (MONO channel)
The TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the
MONO (C) bus.
When the CSR knob is set to 0% (STEREO channel)
The TO ST BALANCE knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is
sent to the MONO (C) bus.
When the CSR knob is s
When the CSR knob is s
CL R
TO ST PAN knob
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) busS
ig na l l
ev el CL R
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from the STEREO (L)
channel to the STEREO (L) bus
S
ig na l l
ev el CL R
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from the STEREO (R)
channel to the STEREO (R) bus
S
ig na l l
ev el CL
PAN knob
S
ig na l l
ev el CL
TO ST BALANCE kn
S
ig na l l
ev el CL
TO ST BALANCE kn
S
ig na l l
ev el Input channels
Reference Manual
nal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select
on to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then
key in the Centralogic section.
type whose send level is fixed, or a VARI type whose send
ses are all VARI type. You can switch between FIXED and
odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP
button to open the BUS SETUP window.
D type
tead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob, and you cannot
s or a MATRIX bus
ob is displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob
section. In this case, you can use the corresponding knob in
ction to adjust the send level.37
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/
MATRIX bus
The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on
stage, or to external effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is
independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a master recorder or
to a backstage monitoring system.
You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following three ways.
Using the Selected Channel section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send
levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input
channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.
Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level
of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight
consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the
faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When
using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be
adjusted simultaneously.
Using the Selected Channel section
This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust
the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses.
NOTE
• If you want to monitor the sig
keys in the Centralogic secti
press the appropriate [CUE]
MIX buses can be either a FIXED
level is variable. The MATRIX bu
VARI types for each two adjacent
button and then the BUS SETUP
 If the MIX bus is a FIXE
A gray circle is displayed ins
adjust the send level.
For a VARI type MIX bu
The TO MIX SEND LEVEL kn
in the SELECTED CHANNEL
the SELECTED CHANNEL se
STEP
1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals,
and connect your monitor system, external effects processor, or other device to the
corresponding output port.
2. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals
to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
3. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.
4. Turn on the ON button in the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5. Turn on the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button for the send-destination MIX
bus.
6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust
the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
Input channels
Reference Manual
al being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select
ding MIX channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the
IX channel.
ou can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/
ss the SEND LEVEL knob for the MIX/MATRIX that you want to
ltifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it.
D window
(The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
cluding the input and output channels - to the selected send
e PRE/POST button will light.
. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
cluding the input and output channels - to the selected send
e PRE/POST button will turn off.
r ted send destination.
32 1 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
38
 If the MIX/MATRIX bus is a stereo bus
You can link the main parameters of two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX
buses. If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the
two adjacent TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX
PAN knob. (If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, it will
operate as a BALANCE knob).
NOTE
• For a MONO channel, the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX/MATRIX
buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating
the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal
sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount
sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus.
• For a STEREO channel, if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO/MONO
window, the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the
left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/MATRIX
buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the
amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it
clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX
bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, the left knob will function
as the PAN knob. The right knob function will be the same as in BALANCE mode.
Using the Centralogic section
You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of
signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• If you want to monitor a sign
keys to assign the correspon
[CUE] key for that MIX/MATR
• In the OVERVIEW screen, y
MATRIX buses. To do so, pre
adjust, and then use the mu
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEN
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to PRE.
all send-source channels - in
destination.) At this time, th
2 ALL POST button
Sets the send point to POST
all send-source channels - in
destination.) At this time, th
3 Send destination indicato
Indicates the currently-selec
STEP
1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals,
and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the
corresponding output port.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you
want to control.
3. In the OVERVIEW scree, press the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the
desired send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus, and then press it again.
4. Use the SEND ON/OFF button in the MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND screen to turn the
signal on/off and to adjust the send level.
OVERVIEW screen
13
9
7
6
5
4
8
Input channels
Reference Manual
DS ON FADER mode)
panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels
R button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The most recently
IX buses will be assigned to the Centralogic section. The faders in
d Master section will move to indicate the send level of signals that
l to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to
you can select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.
ATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
lect the MIX buses or MATRIX buses by pressing the [SEL] keys,
ON FADER switch button will be changed automatically.
ected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be
/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor
to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
ch MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals,
system, external effects, or other device to the
.
, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
ct buttons in the Function Access Area to switch between
ATRIX.
lection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the
RIX bus.
el Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level
input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.39
4 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
5 Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon,
number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the
button.
6 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the
button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.
NOTE
• If the PRE/POST button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE
FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS
SETUP window (page 223).
• The PRE/POST button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses.
7 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
8 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send
destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send source is stereo, you can use PAN/BALANCE mode setting
in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select whether PAN/BALANCE
will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. The knob for the mode
selected here will appear.
9 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to
control the level using the multifunction knobs.
If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear.
Using the faders (SEN
You can use the faders on the top
to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• Press the SENDS ON FADE
selected group of MIX/MATR
the Channel Strip section an
are routed from each channe
• Alternatively, you can press
display a window from which
• You can also select a MIX/M
Centralogic section. If you se
the setting of the MIX/MTRX
• If you press the currently-sel
turned on for the related MIX
the signal that is being sent
STEP
1. Assign an output port to ea
and connect your monitor
corresponding output port
2. In the Function Access Area
3. Use the MIX/MTRX ON sele
MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/M
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus se
send-destination MIX/MAT
5. Use the faders in the Chann
of signals routed from the
Function
access area
Input channels
Reference Manual
lay indication
/OFF is indicated for the channel.
he USER SETUP pop-up window, the channel number is
o “NAME ONLY”.
etween channels (Input Delay)
ect delay between input channels by using the Input Delay
want to correct the phase variance caused by microphone
pth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a
between video and audio that are sent from a site for
p panel to select the input channel that will send signals
e Selected Channel section.
d in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
PUT DELAY screen.
and the multifunction knobs to set the delay.40
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly
switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back
again.
SENDS ON FADER mode
1 MIX/MTRX ON FADER switch button
Use this button to switch between MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX for the bus
displayed in the Function Access Area.
2 MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons
Select the buses that will be controlled by the faders.
3 Close button
Closes the SENDS ON FADER mode.
Channel name disp
In SENDS ON FADER mode, ON
On the PREFERENCE page in t
shown if NAME DISPLAY is set t
Correcting delay b
This section explains how to corr
function.
This function is useful when you
locations on the stage, to add de
delay (a time gap) that may exist
broadcast on TV.
3
2
1
STEP
1. Use the [SEL] keys on the to
to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
2. Press one of the knobs in th
3. Press the INPUT DELAY fiel
4. Press the 8 ch tab in the IN
5. Use the on-screen buttons
CHANNEL ON
CHANNEL OFF
Channel number
display
Input channels
Reference Manual
t channel is indicated in blue. Press the button to select the
channels only)
on knob to adjust the delay. You can view the current value
b (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown
scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY
above the knob.
en windows.41
NOTE
If you are viewing the 8 ch INPUT DELAY screen, you can use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight.
INPUT DELAY screen (8ch)
You can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay.
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit
for the delay time.
There are five delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of
samples), ms (milliseconds), and frame (frames). If you select frame as the units, you can
choose from six frame rates: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, and 24. In this case, fr will
appear as the units in the channel name display.
2 Channel select button
The currently-selected inpu
channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input
You can use the multifuncti
immediately above the kno
using the currently-selected
SCALE, nothing will appear
4 Tabs
Enable you to switch betwe
5 Close button
Closes the screen.
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
INPUT DELAY screen
1 5
2
3
4
Input channels
Reference Manual
for stereo input channels
the signals sent to a stereo input channel as mono. You can
ttings.
set as a mono signal.
y set as a mono signal.
STEREO R
STEREO L
ON
ON
PAN/BAL
PAN/BAL
STEREO R
STEREO L
ON
ON
PAN/BAL
PAN/BAL42
INPUT DELAY (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5),
CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit
for the delay time.
2 Channel select button
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the
channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction knob. You can view the
current value immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the
knob (shown using the currently-selected scale).
NOTE
If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of
the knob.
Additional functions
With V3, you can temporarily set
select from the following three se
L-MONO
Only the L channel is temporarily
R-MONO
Only the R channel is temporaril
1
2
3
STEREO IN Lch
STEREO IN Rch
STEREO IN Lch
STEREO IN Rch
Input channels
Reference Manual
ns. The button you select lights up, and the others go off.
elected, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as shown below.
tting switches each time the button is pressed.
setting43
LR-MONO
The signals sent to both channels are temporarily set as mono signals.
Setting procedure
If a stereo input channel is selected, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear as
shown below.
1 LR-MONO SELECT field
Select one of the four butto
If a stereo input channel is s
2 LR-MONO SELECT button
This a toggle button. The se
STEREO IN Lch
STEREO IN Rch
STEREO R
STEREO L
ON
ON
PAN/BAL
PAN/BAL
1
Normal STEREO
L-MONO
R-MONO
LR-MONO
2
Input channels
Reference Manual
IEW screen
e in BUS SETUP, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
t the left/right surround position.
) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
t the front/rear surround position.
) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
us you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button 44
Surround output for input channels
Setting Surround mode
You can enable surround mixes by changing bus settings to Surround mode.
NOTE
When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6
change to MONO x2.
However, when you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and
5/6 remain as MONO x2.
SELECTED CHANNEL V
If you set a bus to Surround mod
appears as shown below.
1 L/R knob
This parameter is used to se
Use the SEND knob (MIX 1
2 F/R knob
This parameter is used to se
Use the SEND knob (MIX 3
3 Assign buttons for each b
If there is a bus from which
off.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the SURROUND SETUP button (page 187).
3. Press the 5.1 SURROUND button.
4. Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output.
5. Press the APPLY button.
6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
SETUP screen SURROUND SETUP screen
1
2
4
5
73
3
6
Input channels
Reference Manual
nd positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH
itch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for
) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
(Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
Adjusting F/R45
4 DIV knob
This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
5 LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
6 Surround position
The color of the ball shown here changes depending on whether the surround position
is a hard pan (panned fully left or right) or any other setting.
Hard pan: Red
Any other setting: Orange
7 Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH
screen.
OVERVIEW screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the OVERVIEW screen appears as shown
below.
1 Surround graph
This graph shows the surrou
screen.
2 L/R F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to sw
adjusting F/R.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5
3 LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE
Use the SEND knob (MIX 6
3
2
1
Adjusting L/R
3
2
1
Input channels
Reference Manual
nter signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
ignal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
ter channel (i.e., Real Center).
) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
(Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
l parameters to the initial values.
e copied in buffer memory.
e copied settings from buffer memory to the current
s been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
(CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-
CL1))
e in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN screen (CH 1-48,
4/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) appears as shown below. This
ss the pan display area in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
.
Adjusting L/R46
SURROUND PAN 1CH screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen appears
as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
1 Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions.
2 Surround position
You can set the surround position by touching and dragging the ball in the graph.
3 Assign buttons for each bus
All of these buttons are turned on by default. If there is a bus from which you do not
want to output an audio signal, turn that button off.
4 L/R knob
This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 1) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
5 F/R knob
This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 3) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
6 DIV knob
This determines how the Ce
When set to 0, the Center s
50, the Center signal is fed
100, it’s fed to only the Cen
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5
7 LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE
Use the SEND knob (MIX 6
8 DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset al
9 COPY button
All parameter settings will b
0 PASTE button
Press this button to paste th
settings. If no valid data ha
SURROUND PAN screen
64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (
If you set a bus to Surround mod
CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-6
screen is displayed when you pre
screen or the OVERVIEW screen
>9
1
3 8
6 754
3
2
1
2
Input channels
Reference Manual
een
e in BUS SETUP, the TO STEREO/MONO 8CH screen for
. MIX 1-6 are for setting downmixes.
output destination.
nmix coefficient. There is a ∑ clip indicator.47
1 Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions.
2 L/R F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for
adjusting F/R.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
TO STEREO/MONO scr
If you set a bus to Surround mod
MIX 1-8 appears as shown below
1 L/R buttons
Use these buttons to set the
2 Coefficient Setting fader
Use this fader to set the dow
Adjusting F/R
1
2
2
1
Input channels
Reference Manual48
The TO STEREO/MONO OUTPUT screen appears as shown below. Parameters cannot be
set for MIX 1 - 6; this screen is only for displaying parameters.
Channel library operations
The “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to store and recall various parameters
(including the head amp settings) for input channels.
To recall a library item, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen. For details on using the library, refer to the “Using libraries” section
in the separate Owner's Manual.
LIBRARY button
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
O (C) channel
the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus
the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input
TEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be
utput channels.
als sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/
es, and send them to the corresponding output ports.
izer)
ands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander.
he channel.
n or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be 49
OUTPUT channels
This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels,
MONO channels).
Signal flow for output channels
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various
buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other
buses. The following types of output channels are provided.
MIX channels
These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to
the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus.
STEREO channel/MON
Each of these channels process
or MONO (C) bus, and send it to
channels are in LCR mode, the S
used together as a set of three o
MATRIX channel
These channels process the sign
MONO channels to MATRIX bus
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equal
A parametric EQ with four b
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor
• LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of t
• ON (On/off)
Turns the output channel o
muted.
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
1 2 7 8
CUE
L R
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
nnel name/icon
the Centralogic section to select the output channels.
ress the channel number/channel name field of the
t to specify a channel name/icon.
ut channels (page 27).
PATCH/NAME screen50
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel,
or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus.
• MATRIX (MATRIX send level)
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R)
channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1 - 8. For the position from which
the signal will be sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the
fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust
the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel
or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left
and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.
• INSERT
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an
effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.
• METER
Indicates the level of the output channel.
You can switch the position at which the level is detected.
• KEY IN (MIX channels 21-24 only)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21 - 24 to Dynamics processors and
use them as key-in signals to control the Dynamics.
• RACK IN PATCH
Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack.
• OUTPUT PATCH
Assigns an output port to an output channel.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source.
Specifying the cha
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in
2. On the OVERVIEW screen, p
channel for which you wan
3. Follow the steps for the inp
OVERVIEW screen
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
CR mode is selected” (page 36) for details on how the signal level
channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the
dow(8ch)
n/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to
O (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
n select multiple channels simultaneously.
lected mode will light.
TO STEREO/MONO window
8
9
LCR mode51
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/
MONO bus
There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and
LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode
are the same as for input channels.
NOTE
Refer to “Signal level when L
sent from an LCR mode MIX
TO ST PAN knob.
TO STEREO/MONO win
You can control the on/off and pa
the STEREO (L/R) bus and MON
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You ca
2 Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-se
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the MIX channel from
which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in
the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
3. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
4. In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO
channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
5. In the Centralogic section, press an OUTPUT bank select key so that the MIX
channels you want to control are assigned to the Centralogic section.
6. Turn on the [ON] keys for those channels, and use the fader in the Centralogic
section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was
selected for the channel in step 3.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the ST/MONO button to turn a signal sent
from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off .
8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel
to the STEREO bus.
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
7. Turn on the LCR button in the TO STEREO/MONO window.
8. Press the CSR knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the level
difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to
the MONO (C) bus.
9. Press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust
the panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and
STEREO (L/R) bus.
OVERVIEW screen
1
2
3
6
5
4
7
ST/MONO mode
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
een
IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3),
t from the corresponding channel to the STEREO/MONO
e pan or balance in groups of the selected eight channels.
n select multiple channels simultaneously.
clipping at some point in the channel.
CE knob
nce.
e knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding
e overload point at any meter detection point in that
icator to the right of the knob will light.
NO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/
m the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the 52
3 MODE select button
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR.
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel
to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob
that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the
type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that
adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To
adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding
multifunction knob.
7 Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
8 LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus
and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input
channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to
select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
TO STEREO/MONO scr
(CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST
ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)
Adjusts the status of a signal sen
bus. Here you can also adjust th
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You ca
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALAN
Adjusts the panning or bala
To adjust the value, press th
multifunction knob.
If the signal level reaches th
channel, the Σ clipping ind
4 ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MO
off status of signals sent fro
If that channel is set to LCR
The LCR indicator indicates
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
1
2
3
4
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
ey in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO/MONO
nal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys
ccess the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the
Centralogic section.
section
ltifunction knobs (in the Centralogic section) to
evels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic
us.
e MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and
to that output port.
the Centralogic section to select the channels that you
ress the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the
ATRIX bus, and then press it again.
on to ON, and use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the 53
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses
You can send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8 in the
following two ways.
Using the Selected Channel section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send
levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent
from a specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the
send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals
sent from up to eight MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
Using the Selected Channel section
Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent
from the desired MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
NOTE
• You can also use the [SEL] k
channels.
• If you want to monitor the sig
in the Centralogic section to a
appropriate [CUE] key in the
Using the Centralogic
This method lets you use the mu
simultaneously adjust the send l
section to the desired MATRIX b
STEP
1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and
connect an external device.
2. Using the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section, assign the desired MIX
channels or the STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section.
3. Use the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section to select the input channel that will
send signals to the MATRIX buses.
4. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.
5. In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, turn on the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF
button for the send-destination MATRIX bus.
6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust
the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
STEP
1. Assign an output port to th
connect an external device
2. Use the Bank Select keys in
want to control.
3. In the OVERVIEW screen, p
desired send-destination M
4. Set the SEND ON/OFF butt
send level.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
cluding the input and output channels - to the selected send
r ted send destination.
uttons
s the send destination.
nnel that you wish to control. The current channel icon,
n the button, and the channel name appears below the
each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the
is set to PRE.
end-source channel on or off.
b of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send
et to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
ral, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
reo, this is fixed to BALANCE.
sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to
ultifunction knobs.54
NOTE
• If you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to
access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE]
key for that MATRIX channel.
• If you again press the currently-selected MATRIX bus select button, cue monitoring will be turned
on for the related MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that
is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus.
• In the OVERVIEW screen, you can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. To do so, press the SEND LEVEL knob for the TO MIX/MATRIX that you want to
adjust, and then use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it.
MATRIX SEND screen
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from
all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send
destination.)
2 ALL POST button
Sets the send point to POST
all send-source channels - in
destination.)
3 Send destination indicato
Indicates the currently-selec
4 Send destination select b
Select MIX/MATRIX buses a
5 Channel select button
Selects the send-source cha
number, and color appear o
button.
6 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of
button is lit, the send point
7 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each s
8 SEND PAN/BALANCE kno
Sets the panning or balance
destination is monaural or s
If the send source is monau
If the send destination is ste
9 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals
control the level using the m
OVERVIEW screen
13 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a
ou can select a MIX/MATRIX bus.
ATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
itch buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX 1-16
FADER switch buttons will also change automatically.
ected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be
/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor
to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
N FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly
mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back 55
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and
STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• Alternatively, press a SEND
popup window, from which y
• You can also select a MIX/M
Centralogic section. If you sw
and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON
• If you press the currently-sel
turned on for the related MIX
the signal that is being sent
• You can assign the SENDS O
switch to SENDS ON FADER
again.
STEP
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send
signals, and that your monitor system etc. is connected to the corresponding output
port.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip
section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from
each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change
to the SEND ON status.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons
that enable you to switch between MIX 1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17-24/MATRIX
ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX
buses.
3. Use the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 1-16 and
MIX 17-24/MATRIX.
Now you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/
MATRIX buses.
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the
send-destination MATRIX bus.
5. Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from the MIX
and STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
6. Repeat steps 4 - 5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
7. When you're finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels, press the X symbol in the
Function Access Area.
The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit
SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode.
Function
Access Area
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
1 - 3 is selected for operations, this shows the slot number
talled in that slot.
e DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for
r of the output port to which the channel is assigned.
annel that you want to assign to the output port. The name
annel is displayed.
utput port. Press this knob to select it, and then use
adjust the settings. The millisecond delay time value is
nd the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY
below the knob.
delay time value is not shown above the knob.
2
56
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)
This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent
to speakers that are located at a distance from each other.
OUTPUT PORT screen
1 Slot number/Card type
If an output channel of slot
and the type of I/O card ins
2 DELAY SCALE button
Press this button to open th
the delay time.
3 Output Port
This is the type and numbe
4 Channel select button
Enables you to select the ch
of the currently-selected ch
5 Delay time knob
Sets the delay time of the o
multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to
indicated above the knob, a
SCALE window is indicated
NOTE
If the scale is set to ms, the
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the
SETUP screen.
3. Specifies the delay time, and turns on the DELAY button.
SETUP screen OUTPUT PORT screen
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual57
6 DELAY button
Switches the output port delay on or off.
7 Ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase
(black) and reverse phase (yellow).
8 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob in the
screen to select it, and then operate multifunction knobs 1 - 8. Rotate the knob to set
the value in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the
value in 0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob.
9 Level meter
Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port.
0 Tabs
Switch the output ports controlled in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized
into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group,
press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row.
Channel library operations
The “OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to
store and recall various parameters for output channels.
To recall a library item, select an output channel and
press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the
library” section in the separate Owner's Manual.
LIBRARY button
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
W screen shows the response of the EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen,
ettings by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
d recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take
of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
ECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
ion to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (page 9).
dow is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
l the EQ.
ters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if
ttings for a specific channel.
mber/Channel name
, number and name of the currently-selected channel.
utton
t the shelving-type filter for the LOW band.
ut channels only)
h the LOW band to a high pass filter.
re a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can
utton on the window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter.
< A B C D
H
I
F
E
G
O
N
L
K
M
J
58
EQ and Dynamics
Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four-band EQ and
dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided
immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the
GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass
filter that is independent of the EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking
device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard
compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor,
which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.
Using EQ
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output
channels.
NOTE
• The EQ field in the OVERVIE
you can edit the parameter s
• EQ settings can be saved an
advantage of a wide variety
• You can also access the SEL
SELECTED CHANNEL sect
• Even when the HPF/EQ win
CHANNEL section to contro
HPF/EQ window (1ch)
This lets you edit all EQ parame
you want to make detailed EQ se
1 Channel icon/Channel nu
This area indicates the icon
2 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF b
Turn on this button to selec
3 HPF ON/OFF button (Outp
Turn on this button to switc
NOTE
Output channels do not featu
turn on the high-pass filter b
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you
want to control.
2. Press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Press the 1ch tab in the HPF/EQ window.
4. Press the EQ ON button, and adjust the EQ parameters.
OVERVIEW screen HPF/EQ window
987
1
3
4
5
6
2
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
ignals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these
both the L and R channels.
bs Y, and GAIN parameters for the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID,
se the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for an output
arameter will not appear.
lected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q
t channels only)
h-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Turn on the
e the HPF FREQUENCY knob to adjust the cutoff frequency.
nput channels only)
cy of the HPF. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to
put channels only)
n per octave between -12 dB/oct and -6 dB/oct.
tus of the external head amp.
quency of the external head amp.59
4 EQ type select button
Switches between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and
TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
5 ATT knob
Indicates the attenuation value before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
6 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
7 EQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter.
8 RTA button
If you turn this button ON, a graph indicating the frequency analysis for the input signal
after EQ processing is overlaid on the bottom of the EQ frequency graph.
9 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the graph that displays RTA.
0 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the EQ Library window.
A DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values.
B COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
C PASTE button
Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data
has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
D COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer
memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use the ? - D buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate
Owner's Manual.
E EQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB.
F HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the HIGH band.
G LPF ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band.
H EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off.
I EQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicates the peak level of s
meters indicate the level of
J EQ parameter setting kno
Indicates the Q, FREQUENC
and HIGH bands. You can u
NOTE
• If the shelving type has been
channel, the LOW band Q p
• If shelving type has been se
parameter will not appear.
K HPF ON/OFF button (inpu
Switches the HPF on or off.
NOTE
Input channels provide a hig
HPF ON/OFF button, and us
L HPF FREQUENCY knob (i
Indicates the cutoff frequen
adjust this.
M HPF type select button (in
Switches the HPF attenuatio
N HA HPF ON indicator
Indicates the HPF on/off sta
O FREQUENCY
Indicates the HPF cutoff fre
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5),
ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)
onding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously.
nd does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful
ultiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ
ls.
want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The
er, and color appear on the button.
tes the approximate response of the EQ and filters.60
HPF/EQ window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of 8 channels
simultaneously. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number
appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2 EQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type
appears below the graph.
3 EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off. The Σ clipping indicator (located to the right above the
button) lights if the input signal is clipping.
4 HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. Press this button to make adjustments using
the multifunction knob.
5 HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
HPF/EQ window (CH 1
CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3),
This window displays the corresp
This window is only for display, a
when you need to quickly check m
settings between distant channe
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you
current channel icon, numb
2 EQ graph
This field graphically indica
1
2
3
5
4
1
2
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
(1ch)
viewed and edited by channel. This is convenient when you
settings for a specific channel.
e DYNAMICS Library window.
l dynamics parameters to the initial values.
tings will be copied in buffer memory.
e settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no
in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
tween the current dynamics settings and the data stored in
ata has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will
tons (1)-(5), refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner's
mber/Channel name
, number, and name of the currently-selected channel.
1 2 3 4 5
C
A
B
0
61
Using dynamics
Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics
processor.
NOTE
• The DYNAMICS 1/2 field on the OVERVIEW screen displays the dynamics on/off status and the
amount of gain reduction.
• Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can
also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings (page 10).
• Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.
DYNAMICS 1/2 window
All dynamics parameters can be
want to make detailed dynamics
1 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open th
2 DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset al
3 COPY button
All dynamics parameter set
4 PASTE button
Press this button to apply th
valid data has been copied
5 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap be
buffer memory. If no valid d
happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use but
Manual.
6 Channel icon/Channel nu
This area indicates the icon
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys to select the channel for which you want to control the
dynamics.
2. Press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field in the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Press the 1 ch tab in the DYNAMICS1/2 window.
4. Press the DYNAMICS ON button, and adjust the dynamics parameters.
OVERVIEW screen DYNAMICS 1/2 window
Dynamics 1
field
Dynamics 2
field
8
6
7
9
D
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
tton
the KEY IN SOURCE window, in which you can select a keye dynamics.
pre-EQ signal of the same channel
post-EQ signal of the same channel
put signals of MIX channels 21-24
1L-8R POST EQ, MIX 1-24 POST EQ,
L/R, MONO POST EQ
post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel *1
ight channels.
channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
area (Displayed only for Gate or Ducking)
s settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass.
........ Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To
disable the filter, press the button that is turned on.
........ Indicates the filter Q. You can adjust the value by using
the multifunction knob.
........ Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can adjust the
value by using the multifunction knob.
the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE
if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature
to a different screen.
annel that you want to view on the screen.62
7 Dynamics type buttons
Enables you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics
types.
• Dynamics 1 for an input channel
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER
• Dynamics 2 for an input channel
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER
• Dynamics 1 for an output channel
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S
8 Dynamics graph
Displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors.
9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs
Indicates the dynamics parameter values. You can adjust the values by using the
multifunction knobs. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currentlyselected dynamics type.
• GATE or DUCKING:
• COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER:
• COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S:
• DE-ESSER:
0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter
These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics
processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters
indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
A KEY IN SOURCE select bu
Press this button to display
in signal that will trigger th
• SELF PRE EQ ......... The
• SELF POST EQ ....... The
• MIX OUT 21-24 ........ Out
• CH 1-72 POST EQ, ST IN
MTRX 1-8 POST EQ, ST
........ The
*1 Choose from a group of e
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
B KEY IN FILTER parameter
Enables you to make variou
• Filter select buttons .....
• Q knob...........................
• FREQUENCY knob .......
C KEY IN CUE button
Enables you to cue-monitor
signal. Cue will be canceled
this button, or if you move
D Tabs
Use these tabs to select a ch
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
meter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears
graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch window for that
e for the dynamics. You can use the multifunction knobs to
n f.63
DYNAMICS1/2 window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel dynamics settings in groups of 8
channels simultaneously. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or
certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number
appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter
Indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain
reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears,
indicating the open/close status of the gate.
If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following:
3 Dynamics graph
Indicates the dynamics para
below the graph. Press the
channel.
4 THRESHOLD knob
Indicates the threshold valu
operate this.
5 DYNAMICS ON/OFF butto
Switches dynamics on or of
Gate status
Red Yellow Green Off (dark)
On/Off status On On On Off
Open/Close
status Close Open Open Amount of gain
reduction 30 dB or more less than 30 dB 0 dB 1
2
4
5
3
Type = Any type other than GATE
Type = GATE
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
mics libraries
o store and recall EQ and dynamics settings. For details on
ries, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate
Y” that lets you store/recall EQ
n “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that
ngs for output channels.
ress the LIBRARY tool button in
ettings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty
are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are
ore and recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics
e this dynamics library. (However, the available types will
Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel's
pe that cannot be used.
ics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS
ettings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only
LIBRARY button64
DYNAMICS 1/2 window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 4964/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)
This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the
corresponding channel.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number,
threshold, and color appear on the button.
2 Dynamics parameter area
This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the
DYNAMICS 1ch window of that channel.
If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the
dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area.
The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after
dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the
dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a
vertical line.
Using the EQ/Dyna
You can use dedicated libraries t
using the EQ and dynamics libra
Owner's Manual.
EQ library
There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRAR
settings for input channels, and a
lets you store and recall EQ setti
To recall settings from a library, p
the /HPF/EQ window.
NOTE
You can recall 199 different s
(40) of the input library items
read-only presets.
Dynamics library
Use the “Dynamics Library” to st
processors on CL series units us
differ between an input channel's
Dynamics 1. You can't recall a ty
To recall an item from the dynam
1/2 window.
NOTE
You can recall 199 different s
presets.
1
2
Channel Job
Reference Manual
A/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window by pressing the DCA/
VERVIEW screen.
nel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the
ned DCA group faders.
ld of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which
umbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle row of this field
hich that channel belongs.65
Channel Job
This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the
level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the
parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move
parameters between channels.
DCA group
CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups that enable you to control the level of multiple
channels simultaneously.
DCA groups enable you to assign input and output channels to sixteen groups, so that the
Centralogic section faders 1 - 8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group.
A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group
while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way
in which drum mics, for example, can be grouped.
Assigning channels to a DCA group
There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group.
• You can select a specific DCA group and then specify the channels to be assigned to the
group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be
assigned.
NOTE
• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.
• With CL V3.0 and later, you can now assign the Stereo/Mono bus master, Mix bus master, and
Matrix bus master channels to a DCA group on channels other than input channels. DCA groups
were formerly used exclusively for input channels. However, with this new feature, you can use
the DCA groups for output master channels, which enables for more flexible simultaneous
controls.
Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA group
NOTE
• You can also access the DC
MUTE GROUP field in the O
• You can assign a single chan
sum of the levels of all assig
• The DCA/MUTE GROUP fie
each channel is assigned. N
indicate the DCA groups to w
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the DCA GROUP button.
3. Use the DCA GROUP select button to select the DCA group to which you want to
assign channels.
4. Use the [SEL] keys in the INPUT section or ST IN section to select the channels that
you want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
Channel Job
Reference Manual
assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
ode.
le fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA
tion, you can access (roll-out) and control the faders
ing DCA group) through the fader bank located to the left
Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the
Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader
ng in the DCA group as PRE and POST.
shown below a DCA group that has this setting.
ng in the DCA group as POST only.
ting in the DCA group individually for each DCA group.
roups on a channel assigned to multiple DCA groups, the signal
ing sends to the corresponding bus) will be muted.66
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window
Here you can specify the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group.
1 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
2 DCA group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to
assign to the DCA group. The channel will be assigned to the DCA group, and the onscreen fader for that channel will turn yellow. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you
want to remove the channel from the group.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3 NAME EDIT button
Edits the group name of the currently-selected DCA group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or
edit the text.
The DCA group name is displayed on the DCA group select button.
The registered group name is displayed on the PATCH/NAME tab in the RECALL SAFE
MODE popup window.
4 DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to assign.
5 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are
6 DCA ROLL-OUT button
Enter the DCA ROLL OUT m
This function enables flexib
fader in the Centralogic sec
(assigned to the correspond
of the Centralogic section.
Centralogic section via DCA
bank on the left.
7 PRE&POST button
Specifies the object of muti
The PRE&POST indicator is
8 POST ONLY button
Specifies the object of muti
NOTE
• You can set the object of mu
• If you mute any of the DCA g
route for that channel (includ
9 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
2
3
4
7
6
5
1
89
Channel Job
Reference Manual
perate the DCA group.
rs .... The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group
can be adjusted while preserving the level differences
of each channel. The input faders will not operate at
this time.
y.... When you press an [ON] key in the Centralogic section
to make the key indicator go dark, the channels
assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same
state as when the faders are lowered to the -∞ dB
position).
....... When you press the Centralogic section [CUE] key to
make it light, the [CUE] keys of the channels assigned
to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be
enabled. For more information about cue, refer to
“Using the Cue function” (page 109).67
Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong
Controlling DCA groups
Use the faders of the Centralogic section to control DCA groups.
NOTE
• You can also press the [DCA], [DCA 1-8], or [DCA 9-16] key in the Channel Strip section to select
the DCA group that you want to control.
• In the DCA member display on the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the multifunction knob in the
Centralogic section to scroll through channels when there are 15 or more channels assigned.
Using DCA groups
Use the Centralogic section to o
• Level adjustment: Fade
• On/Mute switch: [ON] ke
• Cue Monitor: [CUE] key
STEP
1. Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to
operate.
2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
3. Use the DCA group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select
the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple
selections are allowed).
STEP
1. Assign input and output channels to DCA groups.
2. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel,
adjust the relative balance between the input and output channels that belong to
the DCA group you want to use.
3. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the [DCA 1-8] key or the
[DCA 9-16] key.
4. Use the Centralogic section to operate the DCA group.
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
DCA/MUTE
field
Channel Job
Reference Manual
t function
t mode on if one of the following popup windows is open. If DCA
ed on, opening one of the windows will cause DCA Roll-out mode
IGN MODE popup window
opup window
press the CH JOB button.
n to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
tton.
group other than the selected one, the group selection will change.
CA group is rolled out to the faders) and the alignment.
ose the popup window.
ODE popup window68
DCA Roll-out function
You can now access all of the channels assigned to a DCA group simultaneously through the
fader banks.
This function enables flexible fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA fader
in the Centralogic section, you can use the Roll-out function to access (roll-out) and control
the faders (assigned to the corresponding DCA group) through the fader bank located to the
left of the Centralogic section. Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the
Centralogic section via DCA Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader bank
on the left.
DCA ROLL-OUT operation
NOTE
• You cannot turn Roll-out mode on while operating the DCA group (for example, while assigning
channels or editing the group name).
• Even if Roll-out mode is turned on while you are controlling a GEQ via faders, you cannot edit
the DCA group using the faders.
• If the number of channels assigned to a DCA group exceeds the number of faders in the block
(that is a roll-out target),you will be unable to control extra channels.
• All bank select keys in the block (to which the displayed channels belong) will light up.
• If the faders are rolled out to the Centralogic section (block B), the IN/OUT select keys in the
Centralogic section will be disabled.
• Bank select keys in blocks in which no faders are rolled out will operate normally.
Setting the DCA Roll-ou
NOTE
You cannot turn DCA Roll-ou
Roll-out mode is already turn
to quit.
- DCA/MUTE GROUP ASS
- RECALL SAFE MODE p
STEP
1. Use a bank select key to select the DCA group that you want to control, then press the
[SEL] key for that DCA group.
DCA Roll-out mode is engaged, and the faders that have been assigned to the DCA group will be
rolled out.
2. If you press the [SEL] key for another DCA group, faders that have been assigned to that
DCA group will be rolled out.
3. Press the same [SEL] key again to exit DCA Roll-out mode.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area,
2. Press the DCA GROUP butto
window.
3. Press the DCA ROLL-OUT bu
4. Select a DCA group.
If you press a [SEL] key for a DCA
5. Select a block (in which the D
6. Press the CLOSE button to cl
Function
Access Area
ASSIGN M
Channel Job
Reference Manual
unmute function
on a channel is OFF (muted), press the [ON] key for that
e channel. However, in Preview mode, any operation during
ey is disabled.
ned to DCA GROUP 1.
d to MUTE GROUP 1 and DCA GROUP 1.
. The indicator lamp goes off.
N key for CH 1 remains off. DCA 1 is muted.
, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
. The indicator lamp comes on.
ndicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 comes on.
(MUTE).
ey flashes.
, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
. The indicator lamp goes off.
ey flashes.
, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
gain.
e ON key flashes.
MASTER 1 to OFF.
dicator lamp for the ON key comes on.69
DCA ROLL-OUT screen
1 ROLL-OUT BLOCK
Enables you to select a block in which the DCA group is rolled out to the faders.
CL5 : Blocks A, B, C
CL3/CL1 : Blocks A, B
2 ALIGN button
Enables you to choose whether the DCA group is rolled out to the faders from the left
or right.
3 DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to control.
Using the temporary
If one of the DCA group buttons
channel to temporarily unmute th
mute with pressing of the [ON] k
Example 1: CH 1 is OFF. Assig
Example 2: CH 1 is ON. Assigne
2
1
3
Operation Example 1
1. Press the ON key for DCA 1
The indicator lamp for the O
2. Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted
3. Press the ON key for DCA 1
DCA 1 is unmuted, and the i
Operation Example 2
1. Set MUTE MASTER 1 to ON
CH 1 is muted, and the ON k
2. Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted
3. Press the ON key for DCA 1
CH 1 is muted, and the ON k
4. Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted
5. Press the ON key for CH 1 a
CH 1 is muted again, and th
6. Set DCA1 to ON, and MUTE
CH 1 is unmuted, and the in
Channel Job
Reference Manual
nnel to more than one mute group.
ld of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which
umbers that are lit red in the lower line of this field indicate the mute
l belongs.
ny level other than -∞ dB, these numbers will light orange.
ute Safe function (page 72) has been turned on, an “S” indicator
t end of the bottom row.
SIGN MODE window
s that will be assigned to each mute group.
TE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
ROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
8
7
9
70
Mute group
CL series consoles feature eight mute groups.
Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16] to mute or unmute multiple
channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously.
Mute groups 1 - 8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of
channels can exist in the same group.
Assigning channels to mute groups
As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups.
• You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to
the group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be
assigned.
Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group
NOTE
• You may assign a single cha
• The DCA/MUTE GROUP fie
each channel is assigned. N
groups to which that channe
• If the dimmer level is set to a
For a channel for which the M
will light up green at the righ
DCA/MUTE GROUP AS
Here you can select the channel
1 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MU
Toggle between the DCA G
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Use the mute group master buttons in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE
window to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels.
4. Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to operate
(multiple selections are allowed).
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
2
6
5
4
3
1
Channel Job
Reference Manual
ups to which a specific channel will belong
put channels and output channels that you want to
e SELECTED CHANNEL section.
uttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select
the currently-selected channel will be assigned.
wed.)
DCA/MUTE
field71
2 Mute group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to
assign to the mute group. The channel will be assigned to the mute group, and the onscreen fader for that channel will turn red. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you
want to remove the channel from the group.
If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that enabled for mute safe
(that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel
mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or
from a mute group. The on-screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green.
3 NAME EDIT
Edits the group name of the currently-selected mute group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or
edit the text.
The mute group name is displayed on the mute group select button.
4 Mute group select button
Selects the mute group that you want to assign.
5 MUTE GROUP MASTER button
Switches the mute for the corresponding mute group on or off.
6 DIMMER LEVEL knob
Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is
enabled.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
MASTER button is turned on, this button will light orange.
7 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
8 MUTE SAFE button
Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude a specific channel from all mute
groups. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are temporarily excluded
from the mute groups. For more information on mute safe, refer to “Using the Mute
Safe function” (page 72).
9 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Selecting the mute gro
STEP
1. Press the [SEL] key of the in
operate.
2. Press one of the knobs in th
3. Use the mute group select b
the mute group(s) to which
(Multiple selections are allo
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
Channel Job
Reference Manual
nables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make
indow includes several pages, which you can switch between using
of the window.
n/off with USER DEFINED keys
USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Mute
key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected
time, the [ON] key of the muted channels will blink. You can
keys to mute multiple mute groups.
p, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit.
d to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER
for that channel is already turned off to begin with.
a channel
l in the mute group temporarily.
function
a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group
s that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute
nel belongs.
, press the CH JOB button.
tton in the CH JOB menu.
n in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
nnel(s) you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple 72
Using mute groups
To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off
function for a mute group 1 - 8 to a USER DEFINED key.
Assigning mute groups to USER DEFINED keys
NOTE
The USER SETUP window e
system-wide settings. This w
the tabs located at the bottom
Turning mute groups o
To mute a mute group, press the
On/Off function.
The LED of the USER DEFINED
mute group will be muted. At this
turn on multiple USER DEFINED
To defeat muting for a mute grou
NOTE
Even if a channel is assigne
DEFINED key if the [ON] key
Temporarily unmuting
You can unmute a muted channe
Using the Mute Safe
Specific channels that belong to
operations (Mute Safe). Channel
a mute group to which that chan
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4. Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Mute
On/Off function.
5. Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION column, and choose“MUTE GROUP x”
(where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column.
6. When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function will be assigned to the USER
DEFINED key that you selected in step 4.
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
SETUP screen USER SETUP window
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the MUTE GROUP bu
3. Press the MUTE SAFE butto
4. Press a [SEL] key for the cha
selections are allowed).
Channel Job
Reference Manual
r in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off,
peration described in step 5.
bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe; they will always be
ene.
fe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or
ereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of
cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the
ll Safe to channel links by using the global parameter.
function along with the Focus Recall function (page 94). Channels
ed from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be
tion while holding down a [SEL] key, the Recall Safe settings for the
mporarily be enabled for that Recall operation.73
NOTE
The [SEL] key of the channel set for Mute Safe will light, and the on-screen fader for that channel
will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once
again to make it go dark.
Using the temporary unmute function
If one of the mute group master buttons on a channel is ON, press the [ON] key for that
channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in PREVIEW mode, any operation
during mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled.
Using the Recall Safe function
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from
Recall operations. Unlike the Focus Recall function (page 94), which you can apply to
individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes.
NOTE
• Simply selecting a paramete
you must also perform the o
• Channel Link (page 76) and
reproduced in the recalled sc
This means that if Recall Sa
one of two channels set to st
the other channel(s). In such
next time it is operated.
You can globally apply Reca
• You can use the Recall Safe
or parameters that are exclud
recalled.
• If you perform a Recall opera
corresponding channel will te
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the RECALL SAFE button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press the [SEL] key for the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe
operations.
4. Use the Safe Parameter select button in the RECALL SAFE MODE window to select
the target for Recall Safe operations.
5. To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn the SAFE button on. (If you
selected a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.)
6. To enable Recall Safe for global parameters, turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL
RECALL SAFE field.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the
window. Then perform a Recall operation.
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE window
CH JOB
menu
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
Channel Job
Reference Manual
o the following parameters.
remium rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack
er racks, the setting for racks A and B will be linked.
h you want to set the Recall Safe function.
s button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
ton (input channels only)
y the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel
apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input
utton (shown only for output channels)
y Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to
apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output
ton (excluding DCA groups)
rs for the selected channel.
s depending on the channel type.
patches
channel names
t patches
t channel names
vices, and HA-related parameters for external head amps
el link group settings
MUTE group name
fader bank settings
call Safe to GEQ racks 1 - 16, Effect racks 1 - 8, Premium racks 1
dually.
BANK selection status, MASTER FADER assign status74
RECALL SAFE MODE window
1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set
for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL
button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously.
NOTE
If you press the CLEAR ALL button, the Recall Safe function will temporarily be disabled.
However, the parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change.
2 Safe channel display section
Indicates the channels that are currently set to Recall Safe.
3 SET BY SEL button
Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by
the Recall Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the
channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. Recall Safe will turn on. Press the same
[SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE display section
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by the Recall Safe function for
all scenes. Press this section to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE window.
These buttons correspond t
NOTE
If a dual-type GEQ rack or P
A and B individually. For oth
5 Channel select button
Selects the channel for whic
NOTE
Switching channels using thi
6 Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon,
7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT but
Turn on this button to appl
to all other input channels.
Turn this on if you want to
channels.
8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT b
Turn on this button to appl
all other output channels.
Turn this on if you want to
channels.
9 Safe parameter select but
Selects Recall Safe paramete
The button indication varie
1
3
5
9
2 4
6
7 0A 8
All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels.
INPUT PATCH All input
INPUT NAME All input
OUTPUT PATCH All outpu
OUTPUT NAME All outpu
HA All I/O de
CH LINK All chann
MUTE GROUP
NAME
Setting a
Custom fader bank Custom
GEQ RACK
EFFECT RACK
PREMIUM RACK
Apply Re
- 8 indivi
FADER BANK
SELECT
FADER
Channel Job
Reference Manual
se buttons.
, the settings registered for the DCA group are targeted for RECALL SAFE.
imultaneously. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the
re made.
ing parameter Input
channel
MIX
channel
MATRIX
channel
STEREO/
MONO
channel
the MIX bus O
ATRIX bus O
O O O O
ttings O
O
O O O O
ettings O O O O
ettings O
MIX bus O
MATRIX bus O O O
O O O O
ngs O O O O
for STEREO bus
AN, etc.
O O
for MONO bus
O O
ttings O
ttings O
O*2 O O O
ettings O*2 O O O
tings O*2
/Off O
On/Off O O O
O
e O O O O
settings O O O
meter settings O O
(STEREO only)
ered in DCA group O O O O75
• Input channel
NOTE
ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT button.
• MIX channel
• MATRIX channel
• STEREO channel
• MONO channel
If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the
selected channel will light green, as follows.
This figure indicates that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT
parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings.
In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, and
OUTPUT NAME will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light
green. On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following
channels:
*1. The default setting is ALL on.
*2. ST IN channels do not feature the
*3. When these buttons are turned on
Settings for DCA 1-16 are made s
current scene when the settings a
Button name Correspond
WITH MIX SEND Send level to
WITH MATRIX
SEND Send level to M
ALL*1 All parameters
HA HA-related se
HPF HPF settings
EQ EQ settings
DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 s
DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 s
MIX SEND Send level to
MATRIX SEND Send level to
FADER Fader settings
CH ON [ON] key setti
TO ST On/off setting
assignment, P
MONO On/off setting
assignment
INPUT PATCH Input patch se
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain se
INSERT Insert on/off
INSERT PATCH Insert patch s
DIRECT OUT Direct Out set
MIX ON MIX Send On
MATRIX ON MATRIX Send
DELAY Delay settings
NAME Channel nam
OUTPUT PATCH Output patch
BAL BLANCE para
DCA ASSIGN*3 Settings regist
Channel Job
Reference Manual
gs gs ttings of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
MATRIX buses *1
gs licable
put channels
specific parameters of input channels.
ed as part of the scene.
, press the CH JOB button.
n the CH JOB menu.
the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press
stination channel.
PARAMETER field in the CH LINK MODE window to
t will be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
N, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in
he SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for
to be linked (multiple selections are allowed).76
9 Safe parameter select button (DCA)
For each DCA group, selects the parameters for which Recall Safe is enabled. If the ALL
button is on, all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on,
Recall Safe will apply to the DCA master level and on/off status. If NAME is on, Recall
Safe will apply to the DCA group name. Although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON
button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL
button.
0 SAFE button (excluding DCA groups)
When this button is turned on, Recall Safe will be enabled for the selected channel.
NOTE
Even if a parameter is selected with the Safe Parameter Select button, Recall Safe will not be
enabled if this button is off.
A CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Channel Link function
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ
between input and output channels. Two or more channels that are linked are called a “link
group”. There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number and
combinations of channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types
of parameters to be linked for each link group. However, input channels and output channels
cannot coexist on the same link group.
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
For an input channel:
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• HPF settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 settings
• Dynamics 2 settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting
• DELAY setting
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settin
For an output channel:
• EQ settings
• Dynamics settings
• Insert on and insert point settin
• Send levels and PRE/POST se
• On/off status of signals sent to
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting *1
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settin
*1 MATRIX channel not app
Linking the desired in
This section explains how to link
NOTE
Channel link settings are sav
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the CH LINK button i
3. To link channels, hold down
the [SEL] key for the link-de
4. Use the buttons of the LINK
select the parameter(s) tha
5. If you turned on the MIX O
step 4, use the buttons of t
which you want operations
Channel Job
Reference Manual
(input channels)
that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked.
p, the corresponding input channels will be highlighted. If
roups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this
ET window. You can also link input channels in this window.
annel are always linked.
L1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
ng to a link group is selected, the associated link group is
ER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
EL] key of an input channel that does not belong to any link
ows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that
ed.77
NOTE
• You can also access the CH LINK MODE window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing
the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked.
• When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the
[SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel
will be ignored.
CH LINK MODE window
You can view the input channels
1 Input channel display field
When you create a link grou
there are two or more link g
field to open the CH LINK S
NOTE
• Left and right of the ST IN ch
• In the case of the CL3 and C
2 Link indicator
If an input channel belongi
shown. The LINK PARAMET
While you hold down the [S
group, the link indicator sh
PARAMETER field and SEND
had been previously display
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
5
2
3
1
4
Channel Job
Reference Manual
IX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons
, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination
END PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be
tween the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels
s nnels
[SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each input
the link group.
an existing link group
thin the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add
hannel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to
nceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
a link group
the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel
e between channels that belong to the same link group
down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the
lso remove all linked channels from the same link group
lpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each
same relative level differences. For example, this may be the
the HA analog gain and fader. While you are holding down
gain and fader values will not be linked. (However, you
his link during the “fading”phase of a recalled scene.)
1-24
uses 1-878
3 LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can
do this independently for each link group.
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked,
but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of
key-in signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics”
(page 58).
* Units of 8ch refers to Ch 1-8/Ch 9-16/Ch 17-24/Ch 25-32/Ch 33-40/Ch 41-48/Ch 49-56/Ch 57-64/Ch 65-72/
ST IN 1L-ST IN 4R/ST IN 5L-ST IN 8R.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 button, library recall operations will also be linked.
• The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same
relative level difference between the channels.
• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
4 SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the M
in the LINK PARAMETER field
bus(es).
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the S
linked.
5 INPUT/OUTPUT button
Use this button to switch be
screen.
Channel link operation
• Linking three or more cha
Hold down the link-source
channel you want to add to
• Adding a new channel to
Hold down any [SEL] key wi
to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination input c
the previous group will be ca
• Removing a channel from
Hold down any [SEL] key in
that you want to remove.
• Changing the level balanc
While pressing and holding
parameter value. You can a
temporarily. This can be he
other while maintaining the
case for parameters such as
the [SEL] key, the HA analog
cannot temporarily cancel t
HA Head amp settings
HPF HPF settings
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings
EQ EQ settings
DYNAMICS 1, 2 Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
INSERT Insert settings
DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings
MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
MIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
MATRIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MATRIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
FADER Fader operations
DCA DCA group assignment
CH ON Channel on/off
MUTE Mute group assignment
TO STEREO On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO
buses
DELAY Channel delay settings
MIX 1-24 MIX buses
MTRX 1-8 MATRIX b
Channel Job
Reference Manual
to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can
ach link group.
rameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
r more output channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the
and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in
h*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” (page 58).
IX 8/MIX 9 - MIX 16/MIX 17 - MIX 24/MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8.
or DYNAMICS button, library recall operations will also be linked.
ameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
ATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER
field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
END PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be
tween the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels
ttings
ics settings
settings
levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
operations
el on/off
status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses *1
roup assignment
roup assignment
uses 1-879
CH LINK MODE window (output channels)
You can view the output channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be
linked.
1 Output channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding output channels will be highlighted.
If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this
field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link output channels in this window.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3 and CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 Link indicator
If an output channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is
shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
While you hold down the [SEL] key of an output channel that does not belong to any
link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that
had been previously displayed.
3 LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field
do this independently for e
The table below lists the pa
*1 MATRIX channel not applicable
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics for two o
key-in sources are not linked
signals is linked in units of 8c
* Units of 8ch refers to MIX 1 - M
• If you turn on the EQ button
• In the insert settings, the par
4 SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the M
field, use the buttons in this
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the S
linked.
5 INPUT/OUTPUT button
Use this button to switch be
screen.
5
2
3
1
4
EQ EQ se
DYNAMICS Dynam
INSERT Insert
MATRIX SEND Send
MATRIX ON On/off
FADER Fader
CH ON Chann
TO STEREO On/off
DCA DCA g
MUTE Mute g
MTRX 1-8 MATRIX b
Channel Job
Reference Manual
annel display field in the CH LINK MODE window. You can
.
ant to link. The selected input channel will be indicated in
annel will be indicated in orange, and the alphabetical
link group will appear for linked channels.
, 1.
1.
nels.
5 4
nnel When linking channels80
Channel link operations
• Linking three or more channels
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each output
channel you want to add to the link group.
• Adding a new channel to an existing link group
Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add
to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination output channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to
the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
• Removing a channel from a link group
Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel
that you want to remove.
• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the
parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group
temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each
other while maintaining the same relative level differences. While you are holding down
the [SEL] key, the fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily
cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
CH LINK SET window
Displayed when you press the ch
also link channels in this window
1 Channel select button
Select a channel that you w
blue, the selected output ch
character that indicates the
2 LINK buttons
Link the channel selected in
3 UNLINK button
Cancels the link selected in,
4 UNSELECT ALL
De-selects all selected chan
1
2 3
When selecting a cha
Channel Job
Reference Manual
w channel settings.
4 2 381
5 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
NOTE
If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be
shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a
specific channel to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a channel
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute
the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
CH COPY MODE windo
This window enables you to copy
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the COPY button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press a [SEL] key to select the copy-source channel.
4. Press the [SEL] key for the copy-destination channel (multiple selections are
allowed).
5. If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in
the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.
6. Press the COPY button to execute the copy.
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
1
Channel Job
Reference Manual
faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
n. After selecting the copy-source channel and copys this button to execute the copy operation.
e window and return to the previous screen.
rs of a channel
annel can be moved to a different input channel. When you
umbering of the channels between the move-source and
rd or backward by one.
the following combinations of channels.
, press the CH JOB button.
he CH JOB menu.
he move-source channel.
ove-destination channel.
the MOVE button.
5
4
.
82
1 SOURCE CH field
Displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on
the top panel to select a channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press this field.
If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will
appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy.
If these buttons are turned on, the following parameters
will be copied:
• MODULE PARAMETERS button
Selected channel module parameters
• WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button
SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel
2 DESTINATION CHs field
Displays the copy-destination channel. When you specify
the copy source, you can then select a copy-destination
channel (multiple selections are allowed) by pressing its
[SEL] key on the panel, and this field will be highlighted.
If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination
channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
3 COPY button
Executes the copy operatio
destination channel(s), pres
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close th
Moving the paramete
The settings of a specific input ch
execute a Move operation, the n
move-destination will move forwa
You can move settings between
• Between input channels
• Between ST IN channels
Before selection After selection
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the MOVE button in t
3. Press a [SEL] key to select t
4. Press the [SEL] key for the m
5. To execute the move, press
1 2 3 4
1 5 2 3
Move by one
Move
Channel Job
Reference Manual
faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
. After selecting the move-source channel and moveannel settings move from the move-source to the moveall channels between the move-source and movethe move-source by one channel.
e window and return to the previous screen.
eters of a channel
f a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be
, press the CH JOB button.
in the CH JOB menu.
hannel(s) to be initialized to make it light (multiple
to execute the Initialization.83
CH MOVE MODE window
1 SOURCE CH field
Displays the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on
the top panel to select an input channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this
field. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press this field.
2 DESTINATION CH field
Displays the move-destination channel. When you specify the move-source, you can
then select the move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key on the panel.
When the move-destination channel is selected, this field will be highlighted. If you
want to change the move-destination channel, press the [SEL] key for the desired input
channel. If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the
DESTINATION CH field.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
3 MOVE button
Executes a move operation
destination channel, the ch
destination. The settings of
destination will shift toward
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close th
Initializing the param
You can restore the parameters o
performed on any channel(s).
CH JOB
menu
Function
Access Area
1 2
3
4
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the DEFAULT button
3. Press the [SEL] key of the c
selections are allowed).
4. Press the DEFAULT button
Channel Job
Reference Manual
e window and return to the previous screen.
a specific channel signal from the signals sent to the MIX/
function to quickly send monitoring signals to a performer or
is or her audio signal.
shortcut for settings, rather than an operation to switch between
using this function, you can still edit any parameter on the window
essing the MIX/MATRIX bus key in the SELECTED
dow will open.
ditional input channel, press the corresponding [SEL]
TION field, select a bus.
s. the parameters as follows:
als sent from the selected input channels is lowered to -∞dB.
als sent from all other input channels is set to nominal
us is turned on, and the send point is switched to POST.
nels, the send level of the signal sent from both channels is 84
NOTE
After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected).
CH DEFAULT MODE window
Enables you to initialize parameters.
1 TARGET CHs field
Indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a
[SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The
field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to deselect the channel.
NOTE
• If you press this field while a channel is selected, all selected channels will be de-selected.
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 DEFAULT button
After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation.
3 CLOSE button
Press this button to close th
About Mix Minus
The Mix Minus function removes
MATRIX buses. You can use this
announcer simply by removing h
NOTE
This Mix Minus function is a
modes. Therefore, even after
without restrictions.
CH JOB
menu
Function
Access Area
1
3
2
STEP
1. Hold the [SEL] key while pr
CHANNEL section.
2. The MIX MINUS popup win
3. If you wish to remove an ad
key.
4. If necessary, in the DESTINA
You cannot select a FIXED bu
5. Press the OK button to set
• The send level of the sign
• The send level of the sign
(0.0dB).
• Send to the destination b
• For the stereo input chan
set to -∞ dB.
Channel Job
Reference Manual85
NOTE
You can also access the MIX MINUS popup window by pressing the CH JOB button in the
Function Access Area, then pressing the MIX MINUS button.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
rently-selected scene.
you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene.
ou must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the
ene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed.
ing scenes
s a scene in memory and recall it later, you can use the keys
R section on the top panel, or you can use the SCENE LIST
CENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
top panel or the buttons in the touch screen to set the
NC]/[DEC] keys to select the store-destination scene
[STORE] key.
o the scene in the SCENE STORE window as desired.
[STORE] key or the STORE button located in the lower
indow.
STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store
SCENE STORE windowkeys86
Scene memory
On CL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output
port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory)
as a “scene.”
Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000-300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene
used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001-300 are writable scenes.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the
following parameters.
• Input/output port patching
• Bus settings
• Head amp settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
• Rack (GEQ/Effect/Premium Rack) settings
• Pan/balance settings
• Insert/Direct Out settings
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• DCA group settings
• Mute group settings
• Channel link settings
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function
Access Area.
SCENE field
You can press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window, where you can view and
edit more detailed settings for the scene.
1 Scene number
Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene. When you select a new scene
number, the number will blink. This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number
is different than the currently-loaded scene number.
2 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here. Writeprotected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol.
3 Scene title
Indicates the title of the cur
4 E symbol (EDIT symbol)
This symbol appears when
This symbol indicates that y
changes you made.
NOTE
You cannot store data to a sc
Storing and recall
To store the current mix settings a
in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITO
window.
Storing a scene
Using the keys of the S
4
3
2 21
STEP
1. Use the pad controls of the
mix parameters as desired.
2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [I
number.
3. Press the SCENE MEMORY
4. Assign a title or comment t
5. Press the SCENE MEMORY
part of the SCENE STORE w
6. Press the OK button in the
operation.
SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC]
Scene memory
Reference Manual
indow
e numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI
and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the
sing and holding it down.
es as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all
is is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the
MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select scene numbers.
op panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the
Function Access Area.
tion knobs to select the store-destination scene number.
the SCENE LIST window.
o the scene as desired.
ated in the lower part of the SCENE STORE window.
STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store 87
NOTE
• If you press and hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys, the scene number
will increment or decrement continuously.
• If you press the SCENE MEMORY [INC] and [DEC] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field
indication will return to the number of the currently-loaded scene.
• You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear (page 195). In
this case, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the SCENE STORE
window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation. Alternatively, you
can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice to store without seeing the SCENE
STORE window.
SCENE STORE window
1 SCENE TITLE field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters).
2 COMMENT field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as
a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters).
NOTE
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner's Manual.
Using the SCENE LIST w
NOTE
• You can select multiple scen
SELECT button to turn it on,
multifunction knob while pres
• If you selected multiple scen
selected scene numbers. Th
same mix settings.
• You can also use the SCENE
1 2
STEP
1. Use the controllers on the t
mix parameters as desired.
2. Press the SCENE field in the
3. Rotate one of the multifunc
4. Press the STORE button in
5. Assign a title or comment t
6. Press the STORE button loc
7. Press the OK button in the
operation.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
rite the scene.
rotected, it will also not be overwritten by any file loaded
an only apply the protect setting to scenes with consecutive
h scene #001.
ber 000 cannot be disabled.
e (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list.
umber in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will
to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene
the SCENE SELECT knob. You can select consecutive
and rotating the multifunction knob.
multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the
ecalled most recently.
the SCENE STORE window, which will enable you to assign
e it.
. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an
available only immediately after overwrite-storing.
tion of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
ht side of the SCENE LIST window.
mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings
without affecting the signal processing of the current scene.88
SCENE LIST window
Here you can perform various scene-related operations. This window will appear when you
press the SCENE field.
1 Scene list
This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory.
2 NO./TITLE buttons
Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button
repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order.
3 Scene number
Indicates the scene number.
4 Scene title
Indicates the scene title. Press this button to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in
which you can edit the title.
5 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
An “R” symbol is displayed for read-only scenes, and a protect (lock) icon is displayed for
write-protected scenes.
To enable/disable the scene protect setting, press the R symbol or protect symbol of the
selected scene. Pressing the protect (lock) symbol or the R (read-only) symbol
repeatedly will switch between displaying and hiding the corresponding symbol.
• Protect (lock) symbol
You will be unable to overw
• R (READ ONLY) symbol
Not only will the scene be p
from a USB flash drive. You c
scene numbers starting wit
• No symbol
No scene will be protected.
NOTE
The R symbol for scene num
6 Current scene
The currently-selected scen
If you press another scene n
become the current scene.
7 SCENE SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knobs
number immediately below
multiple scenes by pressing
8 MULTI SELECT button
You can select consecutive
multifunction knob.
9 LAST SCENE button
Selects the scene that was r
0 SCENE STORE button
Press this button to display
a name to a scene and stor
A STORE UNDO button
Undoes the Store operation
Overwrite-store operation.
NOTE
• The STORE UNDO button is
• You can also assign the func
(page 197).
B Page switching tabs
Switch the views for the rig
C PREVIEW button
Press this to select PREVIEW
in the display and the panel
7
2
3
5
4
8
B9>A
6
C 1
Scene memory
Reference Manual
d scene.
. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a
tion of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
ages (Program Changes) to recall scenes (page 168).
eys to recall
keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or
o this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a
ing recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED
e of the number that follows the currently-loaded scene.
e of the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene.
umber that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the
ich a scene is stored will be recalled.
mber that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you
o which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be 89
Recalling a scene
Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
Using the SCENE LIST window
SCENE LIST window
1 RECALL SCENE button
Recalls the currently-selecte
2 RECALL UNDO button
Undoes the Recall operation
Recall operation.
NOTE
• You can also assign the func
(page 197).
• You can also use MIDI mess
Using USER DEFINED k
You can use the USER DEFINED
to step through the scenes. To d
USER DEFINED key. The follow
key.
• INC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scen
• DEC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scen
NOTE
If no scene is stored in the n
closest scene number in wh
• DIRECT RECALL
Directly recalls the scene nu
press a USER DEFINED key t
recalled immediately.
STEP
1. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number you want to
recall.
2. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.
3. Press the OK button to execute the recall.
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number to recall.
3. Press the RECALL button in the SCENE LIST window.
4. Press the OK button to execute the recall.
12
Scene memory
Reference Manual
ories
t the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and
ies and editing titles
lows, according to the column heading you press.
mber.
ical order of title.
Function Access Area.
the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
tion knobs on the top panel to select a scene.
7
8
4
5
6
1 190
Editing scene mem
This section explains how to sor
copy and paste them.
Sorting scene memor
SCENE LIST window
1 Sort button
The list will be sorted as fol
• NO.
Sorted in order of scene nu
• TITLE
Sorted in numeric/alphabet
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to
assign a function.
5. In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.”
6. Selects the function you want to assign.
• To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column.
• To assign DIRECT RECALL
Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose“SCENE #xxx” (xxx
is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
8. Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function.
USER SETUP windowSETUP screen
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP
window
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the
2. Press the COMMENT tab at
3. Rotate one of the multifunc
4. Edit the scene.
1 2
3
Scene memory
Reference Manual
e scene to buffer memory.
te the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory.
e selected scene.
he selected scene and copy it to buffer memory.
e scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene
e subsequent scenes will be incremented by one.
ne memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores
a scene
memory, and then paste it to a different scene number.
ables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the
e data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (page 93).
cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene
e buffer memory.
enes as the copy-source.
-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to
ultifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while
. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes.
inserted (page 92).
the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable.
Function Access Area.
tion knobs to select the copy-source scene number, and
n in the SCENE LIST window.
CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the copy.
tion knobs to select the paste-destination scene number,
utton.
CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the paste 91
• COMMENT
Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of comment.
• TIME STAMP
Sorts the list in order of date of creation.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or
descending).
2 Write-protect
Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A
lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection.
3 TITLE field
Press this field to open the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can enter the title
for the scene. You can edit titles in this window.
4 COMMENT field
Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter
comments for the scene. You can edit comments in this window.
5 STATUS field
Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK
(playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link
function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.)
6 TIME STAMP field
Indicates the date and time the scene was stored.
7 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you
make here are immediately applied to the CL console.
8 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right
half of the window between four different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/
PLAYBACK LINK).
Scene memory editing
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or
cleared (erased). You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of
the SCENE LIST window.
1 COPY button
Press this button to copy th
2 PASTE button
Press this button to overwri
3 CLEAR button
Press this button to erase th
4 CUT button
Press this button to delete t
5 INSERT button
Press this button to insert th
number. The numbers of th
6 UNDO button
Cancels the most recent sce
the previous state.
Copying and pasting
You can copy a scene into buffer
NOTE
The Global Paste function en
current scene, then paste th
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy or
will overwrite the scene in th
• You cannot select multiple sc
• You can select multiple paste
turn it on, and then rotate a m
pressing and holding it down
• A copied scene can also be
• If nothing has been copied to
1 2 3 4 5 6
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the
2. Rotate one of the multifunc
then press the COPY butto
3. Press the OK button in the
4. Rotate one of the multifunc
and then press the PASTE b
5. Press the OK button in the
operation.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
buffer memory at a desired scene number location. To insert
er of scene number.
as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the
the buffer memory, the INSERT button is not available.
be unavailable if the Insert operation would cause the number of
.
nes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location
by the number of scenes that were inserted.
Function Access Area.
cene you want to insert.
tion knobs to select the insert-destination scene number,
button in the SCENE LIST window.
CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Insert 92
Clearing a scene
NOTE
• You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn
it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while
pressing and holding it down.
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared.
Cutting a scene
This section explains how to cut a scene.
When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented
accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location. To cut a scene, sort
the scene list in order of scene number.
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or
cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
Inserting a scene
You can insert a scene copied to
a scene, sort the scene list in ord
NOTE
• If you select multiple scenes
selected number of times.
• If nothing has been copied to
• The INSERT button will also
stored scenes to exceed 300
• When you insert a scene, sce
will be updated and increase
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to
clear, and then press the CLEAR button in the SCENE LIST window.
3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Clear
operation.
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the SCENE LIST window of the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to
cut, and then press the CUT button in the SCENE LIST window.
3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Cut operation.
4. If desired, you can paste (page 91) or insert the cut scene (that was copied to the
buffer memory).
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the
2. Copy (page 91) or cut the s
3. Rotate one of the multifunc
and then press the INSERT
4. Press the OK button in the
operation.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
LL button
s all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all
faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
en items.
he upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left
parameters.
hannel parameters
h settings
ame, icon, and channel color
r the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel
y settings
gs n settings for the corresponding input channel
s 93
Using the Global Paste function
“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or
parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed).
This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to
multiple scenes that have already been stored.
NOTE
The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT
parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings.
NOTE
• A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted.
• During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to
abort the operation. In that case, part of the data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo
the operation.
• You cannot select different parameters from different channels.
GLOBAL PASTE window
1 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add
2 CLEAR ALL button/SET A
The CLEAR ALL button clear
channels simultaneously.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
3 Tabs
Enable you to switch betwe
• INPUT tab
Select an input channel in t
area.
You can select the following
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the GLOBAL PASTE button in the SCENE LIST window.
3. Use the tabs in the GLOBAL PASTE window to select the item you want to copy.
4. Press the [SEL] key on the top panel to select the copy-source channel , and then
press the button in the window to select a parameter.
5. Use multifunction knobs 7 and 8 to select the range of paste-destination scenes.
6. Press the PASTE button to execute the paste operation.
GLOBAL PASTE windowSCENE LIST window
ALL All input c
INPUT PATCH Input patc
NAME Channel n
HA Settings fo
DELAY Input dela
HPF HPF settin
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gai
EQ EQ setting
1
3
2
Scene memory
Reference Manual
GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can
each effect used in dual mode.
parameters.
es that are made in CL Editor are not applied immediately. They are applied
N, or NAME. If ALL is selected, all channel parameters will
lected, the master level and DCA channel on/off status will
ed, the DCA group name will be copied. You can select the
idually for each DCA group 1-16.
turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button,
hed off if you turn on the ALL button.
call function
ts you specify the parameters that will be updated when you
convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input
ne.
eries console also features a “Recall Safe” function that enables you
and parameters from recall operations. However, while the Focus
dividually for each scene, the Recall Safe settings are applied to all
hannel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches
channel patches, insert in/out patches
ames, icons, and colors for all input channels
ames, icons, and colors for all output channels
in, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation settings
nk settings
UTE group name
der bank settings94
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
• OUTPUT tab
Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left
area.
You can select the following parameters.
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
• RACK tab
Enables you to choose from
select an individual rack for
• PATCH/OTHERs tab
You can select the following
*1. While in PREVIEW mode, chang
after PREVIEW mode is exited.
• DCA tab
You can select ALL, LEVEL/O
be copied. If LEVEL/ON is se
be copied. If NAME is select
copy-source channels indiv
For DCA, although you can
they will then both be switc
Using the Focus Re
“Focus Recall” is a function that le
recall a scene. For example, it is
channel settings of a certain sce
NOTE
In contrast to Focus, the CL s
to exclude specific channels
Recall function is specified in
scenes.
DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
MIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus
MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
FADER Fader level
CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys
INSERT*1 Insert on/off status and insert point
INSERT PATCH*1 Insert in/out patch settings
DIRECT OUT Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings
MIX ON Send on/off to a MIX bus
MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
TO STEREO Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings
MONO TO MONO on/off
DCA ASSIGN*2 Settings registered in DCA group
ALL All output channel parameters
OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings
NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color
EQ EQ settings
DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
INSERT*1 Insert on/off status and insert point
INSERT PATCH*1 Insert in/out patch settings
FADER Fader level
CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys
TO STEREO/BAL Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings (MIX 1-24
only)
MONO TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1-24 only)
MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
WITH SEND FROM
SOURCE CHs SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel
DCA ASSIGN*2 Settings registered in DCA group
INPUT PATCH All input c
OUTPUT PATCH All output
INPUT NAME Channel n
OUTPUT NAME Channel n
HA Analog ga
CH LINK Channel li
MUTE GROUP
NAME
Setting a M
CUSTOM FADER
BANK*1
Custom fa
Scene memory
Reference Manual
recalled.
ction
l for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as
dow.
a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. To add
on this button, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys
o add.
channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
9
1
4
7
0
cted by Recall on these
affected by Recall on
led on these channels.95
NOTE
• The FOCUS field enables you to make settings for the Focus function. The buttons in this field
correspond to the scene list shown on the left side of the SCENE LIST window.
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a “FOCUS” indication in the STATUS
field of the SCENE LIST window.
• You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or
parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be
recalled.
• For FOCUS RECALL, the NAME parameter is included in the DCA indicator.
FOCUS RECALL window
Sets the parameters that will be
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all the settings.
2 Focus channel display se
Indicates the target channe
that in the RECALL SAFE win
3 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add
channels as the target, turn
for the channels you want t
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3. In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
4. Follow the procedure starting with step 3 in the “Using the Recall Safe function”
(page 73) to make settings.
5. If you want to cancel the specified restrictions so that all parameters will be subject
to recall, turn on the ALL button.
6. Recall a scene for which you have made Focus Recall settings.
SCENE field SCENE LIST window
3
8
6
5
2
All parameters are affe
Some parameters are
Recall has been cance
Scene memory
Reference Manual
ction
changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups
d duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade
for each scene.
gs are made are shown by a “FADE” indication in the STATUS field
an be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link.
holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving
while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups
ir target positions.
Function Access Area.
the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA
ffect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed).
to adjust the fade time.
e the FADE TIME window.
e SCENE LIST window to enable the Fade function.
Fade function is turned on.
e immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values
course of the specified fade time.
SCENE LIST window
(FADE TIME field)96
4 FOCUS PARAMETER display section
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any
scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE
window (page 74).
5 Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Focus Recall function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6 Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Focus Recall parameter selection for one input channel
to all other input channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Focus Recall to the same parameters for all
input channels.
8 Recall parameter select button
Selects Focus Recall parameters for the selected channel.
Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall
operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE window
(page 74).
NOTE
• If the DCA ASSIGN button is turned on, the parameters assigned to the DCA groups (1-16) for
that channel are targeted for FOCUS RECALL. Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously.
• DCA ASSIGN button settings are linked according to the channel link for the scene.
9 FOCUS button
Switches the Focus Recall function on or off.
0 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Using the Fade fun
“Fade” is a function that smoothly
to their new values over a specifie
function are made independently
NOTE
• Scenes for which Fade settin
of the SCENE LIST window.
• The Fade function settings c
• You can stop a fade effect by
fader.
• If you recall the same scene
will move immediately to the
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the
2. Press the FADE TIME tab at
3. In the SCENE LIST window,
4. Press the [SEL] keys for the
groups to which the Fade e
5. Use the multifunction knob
6. Press the OK button to clos
7. Press the FADE button in th
8. Recall a scene for which the
The faders will begin to mov
of the recalled scene over the
SCENE field
Scene memory
Reference Manual
ich Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. To display
n in the FADE TIME field in the SCENE LIST window.
s to which Fade is applied are highlighted. To select the
which Fade is applied, press the [SEL] keys for the channels
me [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs.
.0 sec.
l channels and DCA groups selected in the channel display
e Fade effect to all faders of that scene.
he Fade function for all faders of that scene.
faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2
3 4197
SCENE LIST window (FADE TIME field)
1 SET button
Press this button to open the FADE TIME window, in which you can select a channel for
which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time
over which the fader will reach its new value).
2 FADE button
Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene.
3 FADE TIME display
This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you
make here are immediately applied to the CL console.
FADE TIME window
You can select the channels to wh
this window, press the SET butto
1 Channel display field
The channels or DCA group
channels or DCA groups to
or DCA groups. Press the sa
2 FADE TIME knob
Sets the fade time. You can
The range is 0.0 sec to 60
NOTE
The fade time is used for al
field.
3 SET ALL button
Press this button to apply th
4 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to cancel t
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
2
1
3
4
Scene memory
Reference Manual
PI OUT field)
ct buttons
gnal will be output from each GPI OUT.
y will switch between the following functions.
hing will be output.
igger will be output when the scene is recalled.
lly will be output when the scene is recalled.
ill be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you
applied to the CL console.
2
1
98
Outputting a control signal to an external device
in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
A control signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL
series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows.
NOTE
For more information on GPI OUT settings, refer to “Using GPI OUT” (page 239).
SCENE LIST window (G
1 Output control signal sele
These specify the control si
Pressing a button repeatedl
• ---- (OFF).................. Not
• TRIGGER................. A tr
• TALLY ...................... A ta
2 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that w
make here are immediately
STEP
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2. Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3. For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT
port.
4. Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals.
SCENE LIST window
(GPI OUT field)
Scene memory
Reference Manual
led and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in
ring a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is
fset time setting.
LAYBACK LINK field)
ion's on/off status for each scene.
e SONG SELECT window, in which you can select a song and
ation from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the
ll appear on the button.
from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified
e in the SONG SELECT window.
ill be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you
applied to the CL console.
4
3
2
1
99
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene
recall
You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a
specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be
played automatically in a specific scene.
NOTE
• Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the
root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio
file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\.
• You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode.
• A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings.
• Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file
name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified
file may become unrecognizable in rare cases.
NOTE
• After a scene has been recal
the Function Access Area.
• If another song is playing du
recalled, regardless of the of
SCENE LIST window (P
1 PLAY button
Sets the Playback Link funct
2 Song select button
Press this button to open th
set the offset time (time dur
title of the selected song wi
3 Offset time display
Indicates the time duration
audio file. Set the offset tim
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that w
make here are immediately
STEP
1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
3. Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
4. Press the song select button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file.
5. Press a list in the SONG SELECT window or use the multifunction knobs to select a
file that you want to link to a scene.
6. Use the corresponding multifunction knob to set the offset (the time duration until
the start of audio file playback).
7. Press the OK button.
8. Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file.
9. Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.
SCENE LIST window
(PLAYBACK LINK field)
Scene memory
Reference Manual
on knob 8 to set the time interval from scene recall until the
The offset time can be adjusted in the range of 0.0-99.0 in
to scroll the list.
de it the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting
nt scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings
ppear on the panel of the CL series console, but the signal
ill remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the
scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current
to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be
e content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make
en store it.
ll parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in
PUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters.
RECALL are enabled in PREVIEW mode.
r, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
ultifunction knobs, or [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs in the
operate the SCENE SELECT knob in the SCENE LIST
ne number that you want to recall.
[RECALL] key. Or, press the RECALL SCENE button in the
cute the Recall operation, press the OK button.
ntrols to edit the settings.
nges you made in step 4, select the scene number in
e scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. Or,
ton in the SCENE LIST window.
wing or editing the settings of the scene, press the
PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.100
SONG SELECT window
You can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time. This
window will appear when you press the song select button.
1 Change directory button
Press this button to move to the next higher folder level.
NOTE
You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
2 PATH indicator
This area indicates the current directory path. It will show only the \YPE\SONGSlevel.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons
Switch between the song title list and the file name list.
4 SONG TITLE list button
5 ARTIST list button
Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title
and artist name respectively.
6 List
Displays the name of the folder or audio file, artist name, and audio file time duration.
You can select an audio file by pressing the folder name or audio file name.
7 OFFSET knob
You can use the multifuncti
start of audio file playback.
0.5 sec steps.
8 Scroll knob
Use the multifunction knob
Using Preview mo
Preview mode lets you view or ed
the signal processing of the curre
of the newly recalled scene will a
processing of the current scene w
settings and save them as a new
scene will remain as it was prior
convenient to use this to check th
minor changes to a scene and th
NOTE
• PREVIEW mode applies to a
the INPUT PATCH and OUT
• RECALL SAFE and FOCUS
7
1
8
2 3
4
5
6
STEP
1. Press the [PREVIEW] key. O
2. Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys, m
SCENE MEMORY section to
window, and select the sce
3. Press the SCENE MEMORY
SCENE LIST window. To exe
4. If desired, use the panel co
5. If you want to store the cha
which you want to store th
press the SCENE STORE but
6. When you have finished vie
PREVIEW key. Or, press the
Scene memory
Reference Manual
ageMix will be changed to the titles used when using the store
sole operated in PREVIEW mode.101
Functions in Preview mode
The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations.
• CL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Rx
• GPI IN
Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external
devices.
• CL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Tx
• GPI OUT
The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.
Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene.
If cascade-connected, both master and slave units will operate independently. Link will not
occur while in Preview mode.
The following functions will not operate in Preview mode.
• Synchronization with CL Editor
• Switching users
• Changing the User Level
• Load/Save functions
• Cue changes
• USER DEFINED KEY operations
• USER DEFINED KNOB operations
• Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display
• Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings
• Changing or viewing the recorder
• Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings
• FADE TIME
• EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording
• MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects
• Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt-2A
and U76)
In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations.
• While pasting scene or EQ settings
• While executing Global Paste
• While synchronizing with CL Editor
• While saving/loading a file
NOTE
The scene titles shown in St
operation on a CL series con
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
vel of the monitor signal or cue signal.
signal by a fixed amount.102
Monitor and Cue functions
The Monitor function lets you monitor various outputs through your nearfield monitors or
headphones. Below the front pad of the CL series console is a PHONES out jack which
always outputs the monitor source signal that you've selected for monitoring. By assigning the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same
signal through external speakers.
You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
• STEREO channel output signal
• MONO channel output signal
• STEREO + MONO channel output signal
• OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 channel input signal (for monitoring each two channel pair)
• RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal
• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output
signals, RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 input
signals
The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel/DCA group by temporarily
monitoring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top
panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output
from the selected output port.
NOTE
The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this
reason, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the
Monitor function. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES output jack.
The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the monitor source.
• METER
Detects and indicates the le
• DIMMER
Attenuates the monitor/cue
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
function
ct the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the
onitor speakers.
lection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also
ED keys. (page 197)
m to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on
through headphones, connect your headphones to the
e front panel.
, press the MONITOR button.
button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen.
ns in MONITOR screen to select the monitor source.
OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to specify
put destination for monitor signals L, R, and C (multiple
n to enable monitoring.
, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE
n of the top panel.
Delay, and Monaural as desired.103
• MONITOR LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK
is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
• MONITOR FADER
Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with
MONITOR LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at
the PHONES Out jack.
• ON (On/off)
Switches the Monitor function on or off.
• DELAY (Monitor delay)
Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output.
• PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Adjusts the dedicated output level of the PHONES Out jack.
• PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function)
If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals
sent to the PHONES Out jack.
• CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function)
If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue
signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output
from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned
on.
Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers.
Using the Monitor
This section explains how to sele
PHONES Out jack or external m
NOTE
Monitor on/off operations, se
be assigned to USER DEFIN
STEP
1. Connect your monitor syste
the rear panel. To monitor
PHONES Out jack below th
2. In the Function Access Area
3. Press the MONITOR display
4. Use the source select butto
5. Press one of the MONITOR
the port that will be the out
selections are allowed).
6. Turn the OUTPUT button o
7. To adjust the monitor level
MEMORY/MONITOR sectio
8. Make settings for Dimmer,
MONITOR screen
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
nob
vel. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the
Centralogic section to adjust the level.
f faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader.
s follows.
........ No assignment
........ Master A only
........ Master A, Master B, Custom fader bank
........ Master B only
........ Master B, Custom fader bank
........ A single fader in the Custom fader bank
........ Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank
f Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open
r off.
ton
FADER LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the
h monitor signals to mono.104
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and
turn monitoring on/off.
1 MONITOR display button
When you press this button, the MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make
detailed monitor settings.
2 SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the
MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates
monitor signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer
is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
4 MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL k
Adjusts the monitor fader le
multifunction knobs in the
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type o
Indicator assignments are a
• ---- ..................................
• MASTER A ....................
• MASTER A+ ..................
• MASTER B ....................
• MASTER B+ ..................
• CUSTOM........................
• CUSTOMs......................
5 Meter field
Indicates the output level o
the MONITOR window.
6 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches Monitor Out on o
7 PHONES LEVEL LINK but
If this is on, the MONITOR
PHONES Out jack.
8 MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switc
1
6
7
8
2 3 4 5
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
ttings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates
h monitor signals will be attenuated when the Dimmer
ion on or off.
h the monitor level will be attenuated when talkback is on.
ff status.
ton
al level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level.
t the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack by using
knob 0 or the fader A to which this knob function has
button is ON, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader,
EL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through
on t the monitor signal by the cue signal. If this button is on
cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the
function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue
t, switch this button off.
h the monitor output signal to mono.
or output on/off. When this button is turned on, the monitor
to output destination E.
ill always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether
r off.105
MONITOR window
You can make detailed settings for monitoring. This window appears when you press the
MONITOR display button or meter field in the MONITOR screen.
SOURCE SELECT field
This field enables you to select the source signal for the MONITOR bus.
1 Source selection buttons
Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
DIMMER field
This field enables you to make se
monitor signals.
2 DIMMER knob
Adjusts the amount by whic
function is on.
3 DIMMER ON/OFF button
Switches the Dimmer funct
4 TALKBACK DIMMER knob
Adjusts the amount by whic
5 TALKBACK ON indicator
Indicates the talkback on/o
6 PHONES LEVEL LINK but
Enables you to link the sign
Turn on this button to adjus
the MONITOR FADER LEVEL
been assigned.
NOTE
If the PHONES LEVEL LINK
as well as the PHONES LEV
headphones.
7 CUE INTERRUPTION butt
Press this button to interrup
and the cue is enabled, the
factory default settings, this
signal to the monitor outpu
8 MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switc
9 MONITOR OUTPUT button
This button turns the monit
source selected in 1 is sent
NOTE
The PHONES output jack w
the OUTPUT button is on o
STEREO L/R STEREO L/R channel signals
MONO (C) MONO channel signal
LCR STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals
OMNI 1-2 - 7-8 OMNI IN jacks 1 - 8 signals (per two channels)
PB OUT Recorder's PLAYBACK OUT signals
DEFINE The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field
9
D
E
F
1
2 4 7
3 B
6 8
5 A 0 C
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
tton
e PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output
r out L/R/C channels.
only for MONITOR OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers.
utput port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or
ource will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be
T L/R.
in the SOURCE SELECT field, you can use the ASSIGN field
sources. The following table shows the monitor sources that
N field.
f eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight
elections will be possible. Turn off the buttons of unneeded sources.
t channels 1-64 to audio network
OUT jacks 1-8
AL OUT jack on the CL unit
t channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3
put signals of MIX channels 1-24
RIX buses 1 - 8 output signals
REO L/R channel output signals
NO channel output signal
NI IN jacks 1 - 8 input signals (per two
nnels)
order's PLAYBACK OUT signals106
MONITOR FADER field
0 MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Indicates the monitor level. Press this knob to adjust the monitor level using the
multifunction knob. Or, press the Centralogic section bank select [STEREO] key, and
then use the monitor fader to adjust the level.
A FADER ASSIGN indicator
Indicates the fader(s) to which the monitor level is assigned. Indicator assignments are
as follows:
MONITOR DELAY field
This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is
delayed.
B AUTO BYPASS button
Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on.
C MONITOR DELAY knob
Indicates the currently-specified delay time. The millisecond value is indicated above the
knob, and the delay time value in currently-selected units and the currently-selected
scale type are indicated below the knob. However, if the scale is set to ms, the delay time
value is not shown above the knob.
Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.
Meter field
Indicates the monitor output level.
D Meters
This field indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels.
E MONITOR OUT PATCH bu
Press this button to open th
port to patch to the monito
NOTE
• You can specify output ports
• If you have not specified an o
LCR button as the monitor s
distributed to MONITOR OU
F ASSIGN field
If you have selected DEFINE
to specify multiple monitor
you can select in the ASSIG
NOTE
You can select a maximum o
monitor sources, no further s
MASTER A MASTER A fader only
MASTER A+ MASTER A, as well as MASTER B fader and Custom fader bank
MASTER B MASTER B fader only
MASTER B+ MASTER B, as well as Custom fader bank
CUSTOM One of the Custom fader bank faders
CUSTOMs Multiple Custom fader bank faders DANTE 1-64 Outpu
OMNI1-8 OMNI
DIGI OUT L/R DIGIT
SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Outpu
MIX 1-24 Out
MTRX 1-8 MAT
STEREO STE
MONO (C) MO
OMNI 1-2 - OMNI 7-8 OM
cha
PB OUT Rec
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
window (Surround mode)
or surround monitoring. If Surround mode is set for the bus
ow appears when you press the MONITOR display button
creen.
as the surround source that will be output to the MONITOR
P button
MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen. Set the sources and
TERNAL SURROUND) and EXT ST - 1-4 (EXTERNAL STEREO).
round signals in the current mix
round signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP (3 channels)
reo signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP
7
6
5
3 4107
MONITOR screen (Monitor field in Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the Monitor field in the MONITOR screen
appears as shown below.
1 SURROUND MONITOR display button
When you press this button, the SURROUND MONITOR window will appear, in which
you can make detailed surround monitor settings.
2 SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the surround monitor source. If 2CH MONITOR has been selected in this field,
use the SURROUND MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3 Speaker Mute field
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
4 DOWNMIX field
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
• STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
• MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
5 Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is
the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
SURROUND MONITOR
You can make detailed settings f
settings in BUS SETUP, this wind
or meter field in the MONITOR s
1 SOURCE SELECT field
Select one of the following
bus.
2 MONITOR SOURCE SETU
Use this button to open the
names for EXT 5.1 - 1-3 (EX
1
2 3 54
MIX1-6 Sur
EXT5.1-1-3 Sur
2CH MONITOR Ste
1
2
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
UP screen
ETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open
e PATCH/NAME screen (with the NAME tab selected). Enter
board screen.
e PATCH/NAME screen (with the PATCH tab selected). Select
1
108
3 DOWNMIX field
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
•STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
•MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
4 DOWNMIX SETUP button
Use this button to open the DOWNMIX SETUP screen. Set the parameters for
downmixes.
5 Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is
the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
6 Speaker Mute field
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
7 SOLO button
Turns on the solo function for the monitor speakers. When turned on, all speaker
buttons in the speaker mute field are turned on. At this time, if you press one of the
speaker buttons, only that button remains on; the other buttons go off. If you press a
different speaker button, the other buttons go off.
NOTE
If you switch to Surround mode, the patch for monitor output can be set in the OUTPUT PORT
screen rather than this screen. (Refer to page 56.)
MONITOR SOURCE SET
Press the MONITOR SOURCE S
this screen.
1 NAME field
Press this button to open th
the source name in the Key
2 PATCH field
Press this button to open th
the port to patch.
21
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
ction
sole can be categorized into the following four groups.
nnels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group,
input channel to turn Cue on.
nnels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the
c section to enable Cue for this group.
ps make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, assign
tralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic
annels make up this group. To switch Cue on or off for this
in the Master section, or assign MIX channels or MATRIX
section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
UE] key
Centralogic section
A groups)
e Master section109
DOWNMIX SETUP screen
Press the DOWNMIX SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this
screen. The layout of the channels is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP
screen.
1 Output channel field
Selects the output channel. You can use the L and R buttons to switch each between on/
off.
2 Downmix parameter field
Sets the downmix parameters for each channel and the master channel monitors.
3 APPLY TO MIX1-6 TO STEREO button
Press this button to apply the downmix parameters for the set monitors to the downmix
parameters for the main channel (MIX1-6 to STEREO).
Using the Cue fun
About Cue groups
Cue signals on the CL series con
1 INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input cha
press the [CUE] key for any
NOTE
If input channels or ST IN cha
[CUE] keys in the Centralogi
2 DCA CUE group
The cue signals of DCA grou
the DCA groups to the Cen
section to turn Cue on.
3 OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output ch
group, press the [CUE] key
channels to the Centralogic
3
2
1 Input channel [C
[CUE] key in the
(When using DC
[CUE] key in th
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
nction
the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue
same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this
t be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the
e PHONES Out jack below the front pad will always output cue
nitor on/off setting. See “Using the Monitor function” (page 103) for
ction.
, press the MONITOR button.
n or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field in the MONITOR
in the CUE screen to specify what will happen when
the same CUE group are turned on.
f the INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE field to specify
tput level for each CUE group.
ATCH buttons (L/R) in the meter field to specify a port
r cue signals L and R (multiple selections are allowed).
hannel or DCA group to be monitored to turn it on.
by using the [MONITOR LEVEL] knob located in the
R section of the top panel.
rently-on [CUE] key once again. To clear all cue
CUE button in the Meter field.110
NOTE
If STEREO/MONO channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE]
keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group.
4 Other CUE group
These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the
touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE
button in the EFFECT window or the PREMIUM window, or
if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1
window. This group will automatically be disabled when
you exit the corresponding window.
NOTE
You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group
to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs
will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated.
However, if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the
previously-selected group will be restored when the current Cue signal is defeated.
The following illustration shows the
priority order of the [CUE] keys. After
you have switched groups from lower
to upper levels, if you then defeat cue
for the upper group, the previous
[CUE] key status of the group
immediately below will be restored.
For example, if you switch groups in
the order of OUTPUT CUE group 
DCA CUE group  INPUT CUE group
 Other CUE group, you can then
successively defeat the [CUE] keys
(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to
successively restore the [CUE] key
status of the previously-selected group.
Operating the Cue fu
This section explains how to use
signals.
NOTE
The cue signal is sent to the
reason, the cue signal will no
Monitor function. However, th
signals regardless of the Mo
details about the Monitor fun
[CUE] key in the Centralogic section
(When operating the MIX channel or
MATRIX channel)
On-screen CUE button
Other CUE group
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the CUE display butto
screen.
3. Use the CUE MODE button
multiple [CUE] keys within
4. Use the buttons and knobs o
the output position and ou
5. Press one of the CUE OUT P
as the output destination fo
6. Press the [CUE] key of the c
7. Adjust the Cue signal level
SCENE MEMORY/MONITO
8. To defeat cue, press the cur
selections, press the CLEAR
MONITOR screen
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
creen lets you check the current Cue settings, and turn Cue
, the CUE window will appear, in which you can make
n select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued),
e channel selected most recently will be cued).
section
put cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open
or off.
ultaneously. If MIX CUE mode has been selected, all of the
ared.
4
5
3
111
NOTE
• The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES Out jacks regardless of whether the
CUE OUTPUT button is on or off. However, the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output
if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES Out jack,
regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting.
• When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER window, you can
press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel
(page 39).
• If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP
window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on [CUE]  [SEL] LINK (page 196).
• You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key (page 197).
• If PHONES LEVEL LINK (page 104) in the MONITOR screen is ON, the cue signal level when
monitoring through headphones can be adjusted using both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the
PHONES LEVEL knob.
• To adjust the level to the output destination port for the cue signal, adjust the gain of the output
port that is patched to it.
• If you turn on the [CUE] key, the background of the cue meter in the Function Access Area will
turn blue, indicating the cue output level. The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation
indicating the currently-on cue group or cue button. The abbreviations displayed for the cue
meters have the following meaning.
MONITOR screen
The CUE field of the MONITOR s
on/off.
1 CUE display button
When you press this button
detailed cue settings.
2 CUE MODE buttons
Select the cue mode. You ca
or LAST CUE mode (only th
3 INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE
Indicates the settings for in
the CUE window.
4 CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue output on
5 CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections sim
selected channels will be cle
IN INPUT CUE group
DCA DCA CUE group
OUT OUTPUT CUE group
EFFECT CUE button in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK windows
(Other CUE groups)
KEY IN KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS1 window
(Other CUE groups)
CUE meter
1
2
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
e settings related to DCA cue.
CA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST
).
of cue signals from a DCA group. You can adjust the level
b. levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.
tor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when
A group was set to 0 dB (unity gain).
e settings related to output channel cue.
utput channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL
when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the
levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.
f cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow,
multaneously.
n the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared.
ut level of the cue L/R channels.
or off.
f the cut out. You can adjust the values by using the 112
CUE window
You can make detailed settings for the cue. This window will appear when you press the
INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field.
1 CUE MODE buttons
Select one of the following two cue modes:
• MIX CUE
All selected channels will be mixed and monitored.
• LAST CUE
Only most recently selected channel will be monitored.
NOTE
All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in
the CUE MODE section.
 INPUT CUE field
This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue.
2 Cue point select button
Sets the cue point to PFL (immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), or
POST PAN (immediately after PAN).
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to
the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode.
3 PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the
multifunction knob.
You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.
DCA CUE field
This section enables you to mak
4 Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the D
PAN (immediately after PAN
5 DCA TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor level
using the multifunction kno
You can adjust the monitor
6 UNITY button
Turn on this button to moni
the master level for each DC
OUTPUT CUE field
This section enables you to mak
7 Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the o
(immediately after fader).
8 PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels
multifunction knob.
You can adjust the monitor
Meter field
9 ACTIVE CUE indicator
Lights to indicate the type o
output: orange).
0 CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections si
NOTE
If you press the CUE meter i
A Meter section
This field indicates the outp
B CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue output on
C CUE LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level o
multifunction knobs.
F
E
BA74
D >965 8
1 2
3
C
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
field in Surround mode)
e in BUS SETUP, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen
channels to be used in the 5.1 channel mix. Outputs,
T cannot be cued.
mode)
e in BUS SETUP, the CUE screen (where you can make
shown below.
hannels. Outputs, PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be 113
D CUE OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output
port to patch to the cue out L/R channels.
FADER CUE RELEASE field
Move the fader of the channel that is cued to set the FADER CUE RELEASE function for
releasing the cue.
E ON button
Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.
F THRESHOLD knob
Sets the fader value for releasing the cue. If the fader value exceeds the value set with
this knob, the cue is released.
MONITOR screen (CUE
If you set a bus to Surround mod
appears as shown below.
1 5.1. SOLO Button
Used to cue only the input
PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFEC
CUE screen (Surround
If you set a bus to Surround mod
detailed cue settings) appears as
1 5.1. SOLO Button
5.1 SOLO is only for input c
cued.
DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1-64 to audio network
OMNI1-8 OMNI OUT jacks 1-8
DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit
SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Output channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3
1
1
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus.
or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold
rnal device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case,
operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only
own the key) (page 197).
use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the
, press the MONITOR button.
y button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
anel TALKBACK jack, and turn the TALKBACK GAIN knob
ty of the mic.
N field in the TALKBACK window to specify the bus(es)
l will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
e TALKBACK ON button to turn it on.114
Talkback and Oscillator
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the
desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer
to the performers and staff. If necessary, you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack
on the I/O device or the OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback.
CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the
desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical
response of the room or hall.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals.
Using Talkback
The Talkback function sends the
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may
output impedance of the exte
power.
• You can also assign talkback
you can select either a Latch
while you continue holding d
• When talkback is on, you can
talkback signal (page 105).
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the TALKBACK displa
3. Connect a mic to the front p
to adjust the input sensitivi
4. Press a button in the ASSIG
to which the talkback signa
5. To enable talkback, press th
MONITOR screen
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
e the currently-selected output destination of the talkback
or talkback. This window appears when you press the
MONITOR screen.
ettings for the TALKBACK jack on the front panel.
tom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
l of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack.
ld signal from a mic (connected to a normal input jack) to
put jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary
t port here and set the input level.
ch button
e PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input
6 8 97
A
115
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback
settings, and turn talkback on or off.
1 TALKBACK display buttons
When you press this button, the TALKBACK screen will appear, in which you can make
detailed talkback settings.
2 TALKBACK IN field
• +48V indicator ........................ Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power
supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
• Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain at the
TALKBACK jack.
3 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
........................ Press the button to open the PORT SELECT window, in
which you can patch a desired input port to talkback.
The selected port name will appear on the button.
• INPUT GAIN knob ................. Sets the input gain of the selected port.
• Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain.
4 TALKBACK ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicat
signal.
5 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
TALKBACK window
You can make detailed settings f
TALKBACK display button in the
TALKBACK IN field
This field enables you to make s
1 +48V button
Switches on or off the phan
2 TALKBACK level meter
This indicates the input leve
 INPUT TO TALKBACK fie
This field enables you to route a
talkback. If you want to use an in
input for talkback, select an inpu
3 INPUT TO TALKBACK pat
Press this button to open th
port.
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
3 45
0
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
CILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings,
on the OSCILLATOR screen will appear, in which you can make
54116
4 +48V button
This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input
port.
NOTE
This button will not appear if no input port is selected.
5 ANALOG GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain value for the selected input port. Press this knob to control the
level using the multifunction knobs.
6 Level meter
Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port.
7 GC button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will
appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched.
8 Level meter
Indicates the level after gain compensation. This will appear if the input jack of an I/O
device is patched.
9 TALKBACK ON/OFF button
This switches talkback on/off. While talkback is on, the signal from the INPUT jack
selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the send-destination bus.
ASSIGN field
0 Channel select buttons
These buttons enable you to select a channel on which the talkback signal is sent.
A CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
Using the Oscillator function
You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the OS
and turn the oscillator on or off.
1 OSCILLATOR display butt
When you press this button,
detailed oscillator settings.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2. Press the OSCILLATOR display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
3. Press a button in the OSCILLATOR MODE field in the OSCILLATOR window to select
the type of signal you want to output.
4. Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters.
5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which
the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
6. Press the OUTPUT button to enable the oscillator.
MONITOR screen
1
3
2
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
ns our operating modes when the oscillator is turned on:
lator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this
selected mode.
tes the output level of the sine wave. You can adjust the
by using the multifunction knob.
tes the frequency of the sine wave. You can adjust the value
ing the multifunction knob.
..... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the ODD/L
side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction
knob.
..... Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the ODD/L
side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction
knob.
..... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the EVEN/
R side. You can adjust the value by using the
multifunction knob.
..... Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the EVEN/R
side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction
knob.
1kHz and EVEN(R) is set to 400Hz. At this time, there are
ve will be output continuously.
aves of different frequencies will be output
.
will be output continuously.
will be output intermittently.117
2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field
Indicates the frequency and level of the currently-selected oscillator. A meter in this field
indicates the output level of the oscillator. Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator
level using the multifunction knob.
3 OSCILLATOR MODE field
Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly
will switch modes.
4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input
channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off.
OSCILLATOR window
You can make detailed settings for the oscillator. This window appears when you press the
OSCILLATOR display button in the MONITOR screen.
1 OSCILLATOR MODE butto
Select one of the following f
2 Parameter field
Enables you to set the oscil
field vary depending on the
Mode = SINE WAVE
• LEVEL knob ..........Indica
value
• FREQ knob ...........Indica
by us
Mode = SINE WAVE 2CH
• LEVEL knob (ODD/L) ...
• FREQ knob (ODD/L).....
• LEVEL knob (EVEN/R) .
• FREQ knob (EVEN/R)...
By default, ODD(L) is set to
two meters (L and R).
21
5
4
3
SINE WAVE A sine wa
SINE WAVE 2CH Two sine w
separately
PINK NOISE Pink noise
BURST NOISE Pink noise
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
nnel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of
ct the type of channels displayed, and then press the
nnel(s) (multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED”
b that contains a selection.
AVE 2CH, the signal is output to either odd (ODD(L) side)
he selected channel. For example, the signal set to ODD(L)
ignal set to EVEN(R) is output in MIX2.
LL button to defeat all selections.
channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
ut level.
tton
n or off. If you turn this button on, the oscillator signal will be
bus you selected in the ASSIGN section. When you press
tor will turn off.118
Mode = PINK NOISE
• LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the pink noise. You can adjust the
value by using the multifunction knob.
• HPF knob ..............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink
noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off.
• LPF knob...............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink
noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off.
Mode = BURST NOISE
• LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and LPF knob
....................Same as in PINK NOISE mode.
• WIDTH ...................Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. You can
adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• INTERVAL..............Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. You can
adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
3 ASSIGN section
Enables you to select a cha
the three tabs below to sele
button(s) for the desired cha
indicator is lit green for a ta
If the mode is set to SINE W
or even (EVEN(R) side) of t
is output in MIX1, and the s
You can press the CLEAR A
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
4 Meter section
Indicates the oscillator outp
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT bu
Turns the oscillator output o
sent to the input channel or
the button again, the oscilla
INTERVAL
WIDTH
Level
Time
Pink noise output
Turn BURST NOISE button on.
Meters
Reference Manual
d faders for all input channels.
channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
n d faders for all output channels.119
Meters
This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all
channels, and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge.
Operations in the METER screen
By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on
the screen, and switch the level meter's metering points (the points in the signal route at which
the level is detected). To access the METER screen, press the METER field of the Function
Access Area.
INPUT/OUTPUT/RTA tab
Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen, OUTPUT METER screen, and
RTA screen.
INPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters an
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
OUTPUT METER scree
This screen shows the meters an
Meters
Reference Manual
d metering point at which the level will be detected. The
r can be specified independently for input channels and
diately before GAIN
PENSATION
diately before DIGITAL GAIN
diately after DIGITAL GAIN
diately before the fader
ediately before INPUT DELAY)
diately after the [ON] key
diately before the EQ
diately before the fader
diately after the [ON] key
the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional
ak level indication on each meter. Turn off this
ication. PEAK HOLD button on/off operations
d output channels as well as the MBCL meter
off, the peak level indication that had been
K HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key (page 197).120
Fader level and meter display
This area displays the meter and fader for each channel.
1 Channel number
Indicates the channel number.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 OVER indicator
Lights if the signal is clipping at the input section of the channel.
4 Meters
Indicates the input or output level of the channel.
5 Faders
The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that
appears immediately below the fader. If the channel’s [ON] key is OFF, the fader turns
gray.
NOTE
Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic
section.
Centralogic fader display
This area displays the level of faders that are currently set in the Centralogic section.
METERING POINT fiel
Select one of the following as the
metering point for the level mete
output channels.
For INPUT METER
• PRE GC .................Imme
COM
• PRE D.GAIN ..........Imme
• POST D. GAIN .......Imme
• PRE FADER...........Imme
(Imm
• POST ON ...............Imme
For OUTPUT METER
• PRE EQ .................Imme
• PRE FADER...........Imme
• POST ON ............... imme
NOTE
On the CL3 or CL1 console,
meter bridge (MBCL).
PEAK HOLD button
Turn on this button to hold the pe
button to clear the peak hold ind
will affect both input channels an
bridge. When you turn this button
held will be cleared.
NOTE
You can also assign the PEA
1
4
5
2
3
When the [ON] key for channel 7 is ON, and
the [ON] key for channel 8 is OFF
Meters
Reference Manual
een. The results of a frequency analysis for the selected
ve band (61 band).
h lysis is shown in the 1/6 octave band.
the output channel whose frequency response you want to
own the same as the OVER indicator.
the point you touch on the graph are displayed.
5
7
6
4
121
SHOW SEND LEVEL button
If you switch to SENDS ON FADER mode when this button is on, the color and
position of the faders in the INPUT METER screen show the type of send
destination bus, the send level to that bus, and ON/OFF status.
For INPUT METER
Fader color
The channel color is the same as the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus (SEND MASTER).
The position of the fader is the level of the signal sent to the bus.
The fader turns gray if you switch the SEND button to OFF or switch the channel OFF.
For OUTPUT METER
Only the fader for the signal sent from the MIX bus to the MATRIX bus changes color.
RTA METER screen
This is the real time analyzer scr
source are shown in the 1/6 octa
1 Frequency Response grap
A graph of a frequency ana
2 Source selection buttons
Use these buttons to specify
see.
3 OVER display
Data that exceeds 0dB is sh
4 Cross-hair cursor display
The frequency and level at
2
3
1
Meters
Reference Manual
d mode)
e in BUS SETUP, the METER screen appears as shown
ut for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the
t button
in the Function Access Area.
ND MONITOR. For 2CH MONITOR, the layout remains 5.1,
nd R.
2
122
5 CUE OVERRIDE button
If this button is switched on, the cue signal set in the CUE screen is sent to the real time
analyzer, and an analysis is displayed.
• If CUE MODE is set to MIX CUE, the frequency analysis is performed on a signal that is
a mix of all channels selected in the CUE screen.
• If CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO, the signal is treated as LAST CUE. In other words, the
frequency analysis is performed on the POST ON signal of the input channel.
6 BALLISTICS field
• BALLISTICS button
Setting this switch to ON allows you to add rate of decay to the graph.
• FAST/SLOW switch button
Use this button to set the rate of decay (FAST/SLOW).
7 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the graph that displays frequency response.
METER screen (Surroun
If you set a bus to Surround mod
below.
1 MONITOR
Meters for MIX1-6. The layo
SURROUND SETUP screen.
2 SURROUND METER selec
Selects the meters displayed
• MIX1-6
Source for MIX1-6.
• MONITOR
Source selected in SURROU
but with meters only for L a
1
Meters
Reference Manual123
Function Access Area screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen in the Function Access
Area appears as shown below.
The display specifications are as follows.
• The meter for the SURROUND signal is shown on the left side, and the meter for the
STEREO signal is shown on the right side. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the
same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
When cue is operating
• EFFECT CUE is shown on the right side, as usual.
• The 5.1 SOLO CUE display is updated on the left side. However, if CUE MODE is set to
5.1 SOLO, no cue other than 5.1 SOLO CUE is possible.
• Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual.
Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3
or CL1 console
If an optional meter bridge (MBCL) is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console, you will always be
able to view the output levels of MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO, and CUE channels, in the
same way as in the meter section of CL5.
The MBCL meters indicate the MIX channel and MATRIX channel output levels in 12-segment
steps (OVER, -3dB, -6dB, -9dB, -12dB, -15dB, -18dB, -24dB, -30dB, -40dB, -50dB, -60dB).
You can select the metering point (the point at which the level is detected) from the following
choices. For information on how to change the metering point, refer to “Operations in the
METER screen” (page 119).
• PRE EQ..................Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ...............immediately after the [ON] key
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
s for GEQ, PEQ, effects and Premium Rack, the CL console also
n I/O device (such as an R series) or external head amps (Yamaha
r details, refer to “I/O devices and external head amps” (page 154).
an use the [SEL] key to switch channels in the EFFECT popup
, and PREMIUM RACK popup window.
ey in the EFFECT popup window while operating the effect
indow of the effect that is inserted in that channel. The same applies
nd the PREMIUM RACK popup window. You can also switch from
to the GEQ popup window or PREMIUM RACK popup window. The
rding to the target channel.
the Function Access Area
ronized CL Editor
s on a channel that has been selected, a notification dialog box will 124
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and
PREMIUM RACK
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effects, and Premium
Rack.
About the virtual rack
CL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as
“GEQ” ), parametric EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “PEQ” ), and effects/processors to
modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely
adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any
fifteen of thirty-one bands. The 8Band PEQ allows you to freely adjust 8 bands (frequency
regions), and also features an HPF, an LPF, and 3 notch filters.
You can also use 54 different effect types. The CL series consoles feature Premium Rack,
which employs VCM technology. This technology models analog circuitry on a component
level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers seven types of
processors.
In order to use a GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, PEQ, effect,
or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the
desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal
processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can
mount a GEQ or PEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1-16 and EFFECT, an effect rack
instance in each of the eight racks 1-8, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight
racks 1-8.
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However, if the
“31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.)
The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
NOTE
• In addition to the virtual rack
provides racks for mounting a
AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.). Fo
• With CL V1.7 and later, you c
window, GEQ popup window
Pressing a top panel [SEL] k
parameter will switch to the w
to the GEQ popup window a
the EFFECT popup window
following items change acco
• Selected channel display in
• Operated channel in synch
If there are no insert setting
be displayed.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ 1-8, GEQ
ffect rack), or PREMIUM (Premium Rack).
e RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the type
unt.
ff for the rack. If this button is turned on for a rack, the
that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more
refer to “Using the Recall Safe function” (page 73).
ach rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that
patching must be made on the input-source or output5 23 4 56
1
125
Virtual rack operations
This section explains how to mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the
input and output of the rack as an example.
NOTE
• In steps 6 and 8, you can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear
(page 196).
• The type of GEQ, PEQ, or effect mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the inputsource and output-destination settings are saved as part of the scene.
VIRTUAL RACK screen
1 Rack tabs
Selects the type of rack you
9-16 (GEQ rack), EFFECT (e
2 Rack mount button
Press this button to open th
of the rack you want to mo
3 SAFE button
Switches Recall Safe on or o
contents and parameters of
information on Recall Safe,
The Recall Safe settings of e
rack. Recall Safe settings for
destination channel.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16, or
EFFECT tab.
3. To mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that
rack.
4. Use the buttons in the MODULE SELECT field in the RACK MOUNTER window to
select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button.
5. Press the INPUT PATCH button.
6. In the CH SELECT window, select the input source and then press the OK button.
7. Press the OUTPUT PATCH button.
8. In the CH SELECT window, select the output destination and then press the OK
button.
Function
Access Area
VIRTUAL RACK window
23 4 6
1
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
uttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or
B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will
e CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of
ck output.
ls that can be selected are shown below.
........ CH1-32 *1
........ CH33-64 *1
........ CH65-72 *1
........ CH1-32 *1
........ CH33-64 *1
........ CH65-72 *1
X .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
........ STEREO L/R, MONO
........ CH1-32 *1
........ CH33-64 *1
........ CH65-72 *1
X .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
........ STEREO L/R, MONO
ACK.
channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be
e assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.126
4 INPUT PATCH button
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or
8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will
appear.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of
the signal patched to the rack input.
The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.
• OUT CH ....................................MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8 *1
• ST/MONO .................................STEREO L/R, MONO *1
• INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 .................CH1-32 *1
• INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 ...............CH33-64 *1
• INSERT 1 OUT 65-72 ...............CH65-72 *1
• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX....MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO........STEREO L/R, MONO
• INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 .................CH1-32 *1
• INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 ...............CH33-64 *1
• INSERT 2 OUT 65-72 ...............CH65-72 *1
• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX....MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO........STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• In the case of the GEQ or PEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically
assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched
on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ or PEQ, the other patch point
will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
• For effects, if you select “DYNAMICS&EQ” for EFFECT TYPE, the operation is the same as for
GEQ above.
• For PREMIUM RACK, the operation is the same as for GEQ above.
• For more information on insert-in/out, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel”
(page 20).
5 OUTPUT PATCH button
If the type is EFFECT, two b
8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/
appear.
Press this button to open th
the signal patched to the ra
The categories and channe
• CH1-32 ...........................
• CH33-64.........................
• CH65-72.........................
• INSERT 1 IN 1-32 ..........
• INSERT 1 IN 33-64 ........
• INSERT 1 IN 65-72 ........
• INSERT 1 IN MIX/MATRI
• INSERT 1 IN ST/MONO.
• INSERT 2 IN 1-32 ..........
• INSERT 2 IN 33-64 ........
• INSERT 2 IN 65-72 ........
• INSERT 2 IN MIX/MATRI
• INSERT 2 IN ST/MONO.
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 R
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1,
• If you use CL5 settings data
shown crossed-out if they ar
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
ted (GEQ rack 1-8):
ed (GEQ rack 1-4):
MIXER EDIT window, in which you can modify the automixer 127
6 Rack container
Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you
selected in the RACK MOUNTER window.
• If nothing is mounted:
Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the GEQ
or effect that will be mounted in the rack.
• If 31BandGEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level.
Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ
settings.
• If Flex15GEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and
output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in
which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B.
• If 8BandPEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the EQ frequency response, the PEQ on/off status, and the input and
output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the PEQ EDIT window, in
which you can modify the PEQ settings for A and B.
• If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only):
This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status,
and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT window, in which
you can modify the effect settings.
• If 16ch Automixer is moun
• If 8ch Automixer is mount
Press this area to open the AUTO
settings.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
defeated when you change the item mounted in a rack.
in racks 1 to 8, and the 8ch Automixer is used in racks 1 to 4.
ade in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
de in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
a GEQ, PEQ, or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the
ll edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ, PEQ, or effect will be
t closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by
Q, or effect once again.
ions
ou to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch it to the
(GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a STEREO/
unt it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it to the insertATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of
the Centralogic section's faders and [ON] keys.
are provided.
. Each band is 1/3
ange is ±15 dB, and
an be adjusted.
rack, one channel of
that rack.
. Each band is 1/3
ain range is ±15 dB.
adjust the gain for
the thirty-one bands
ave used up fifteen
t be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a
lat setting.)
is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and
rack, and will allow two channels of input and output.
INPUT
31BandGEQ
OUTPUT
Rack
INPUT
Flex15GEQ (B)
Flex15GEQ (A)
OUTPUT
Rack128
7 Link indicator
Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, A
and B of the Flex15GEQ, or A and B of the 8BandPEQ are linked to each other.
RACK MOUNTER window
Mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack. This window will appear if you press the rack mount
button in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
1 Rack number
Indicates the number for the selected rack.
2 Virtual rack
This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons.
3 MODULE SELECT field
Select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following
function.
• BLANK button....................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the
rack; the rack will be empty.
• 31BandGEQ button .............. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack.
• Flex15GEQ button ................ Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
• 8BandPEQ button................. Mounts an 8BandPEQ in the rack.
• EFFECT button (only for EFFECT rack)
........................ Mounts an effect in the rack.
• 16ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)
........................ Mounts a 16ch Automixer in the rack.
• 8ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)
........................ Mounts an 8ch Automixer in the rack.
NOTE
• Input/output patching will be
• The 16ch Automixer is used
4 CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you m
5 OK button
Applies the changes you ma
NOTE
Be aware that if you remove
RACKMOUNTER window, a
discarded. If you have not ye
mounting the same GEQ, PE
Graphic EQ operat
The CL series console enables y
insert-out/in of an input channel
MONO channel. You can also mo
out/in of an input channel, MIX/M
each band can be adjusted using
The following two types of GEQ
31BandGEQ
This is a monaural 31-band GEQ
octave wide, the adjustable gain r
the gain of all thirty-one bands c
If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a
input and output can be used for
Flex15GEQ
This is a monaural 15-band GEQ
octave wide, and the adjustable g
The Flex15GEQ enables you to
any fifteen of the same bands as
of the 31bandGEQ. (Once you h
bands of adjustment, you will no
previously-adjusted band to the f
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ
“B” respectively) mounted in that
7
43 5
21
43 5
21
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
e CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input
rating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
e CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output
operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button
RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent GEQ units.
, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
se of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same
d “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and
r B)
e copied to “y,” and then linked.
e copied to “x,” and then linked.
l be initialized, and then linked.
the window.
own only if linking is possible. When you link
ar in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
rently-selected GEQ to 0 dB.
ted GEQ on or off.129
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
NOTE
• If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units
in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later
step.
• You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field.
• For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “Using the 31BandGEQ” (page 130)
or “Using the Flex15GEQ” (page 131).
GEQ EDIT window
NOTE
The windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the
Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.
1 Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1-8 or among GEQ 9-16. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is
mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
2 INPUT button
Press this button to open th
source of the rack. The ope
GEQ field.
3 OUTPUT button
Press this button to open th
destination of the rack. The
in the GEQ field.
4 RACK LINK button
Press this button to open the
In the case of a 31bandGEQ
racks will be linked. In the ca
rack will be linked.
• GEQ x y button ( “x” an
alphabetical character A o
The parameters of “x” will b
• GEQ y x button
The parameters of “y” will b
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both wil
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is sh
GEQ units, a symbol will appe
5 FLAT button
Returns all bands of the cur
6 GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently-selec
STEP
1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 125) to mount a GEQ in a rack
and set its input source and output destination.
2. In the GEQ field, press the rack container in which you mounted the GEQ.
3. If you're using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two GEQ
units.
4. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on.
2 3 4 5 6
1
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted
arison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key
press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the
anceled and will return to ± 0dB.
different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Centralogic
ed. However if you once again display the same rack, the faders will
oup of bands you had previously been controlling.
IT window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically
andGEQ)
esponse of the current 31Band GEQ.
st and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual
erical boxes below.
e group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic
s of the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following
bands 20.0 Hz--100 Hz
bands 63.0 Hz--315 Hz
bands 200 Hz--1.00 kHz
bands 630 Hz--3.15 kHz
bands 2.00 kHz--10.0 kHz
bands 4.00 kHz--20.0 kHz
4
130
For GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ, Flex15GEQ)
1 RTA button
Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
2 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.
Using the 31BandGEQ
You will use the Centralogic section's faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ.
NOTE
• When a fader of the Centralogic section is in the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key
will go dark. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower
the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been
modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately
return to the flat state.
• With CL version 2.0 or later,
gain value. In this way, comp
for this band is off and if you
adjusted gain value will be c
• If you switch the display to a
section will forcibly be defeat
automatically move to the gr
• When you close the GEQ ED
turn off.
GEQ EDIT window (31B
1 EQ graph
Indicates the approximate r
2 Faders
Indicate the amount of boo
values are shown in the num
3 FADER ASSIGN field
In this field you can select th
section's faders. The button
groups of bands.
STEP
1. In the GEQ field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the
31BandGEQ.
2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on.
3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you
will control.
4. Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band.
5. When you've finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
2
1
20-100 The eight
63-315 The eight
200-1k The eight
630-3.15k The eight
2k-10k The eight
4k-20k The eight
1
2
3
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted
arison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key
press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the
anceled and will return to ± 0dB.
different screen, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section
ever if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands
trolling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
ndow, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
x 15GEQ)
that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS
real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that
rent GEQ.
GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and 131
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will
turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will
be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the
bands.
NOTE
The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the
button in the FADER ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state.
4 Tool buttons
Copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or
initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool
buttons” in the separate Owner's Manual.
NOTE
• Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
• GEQ settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the dedicated library.
Using the Flex15GEQ
You will use the Centralogic section's faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B)
in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
NOTE
If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack.
However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.
NOTE
• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that
the corresponding band is being modified.
• To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key in
the Centralogic section to make it go dark.
• With CL version 2.0 or later,
gain value. In this way, comp
for this band is off and if you
adjusted gain value will be c
• If you switch the display to a
will forcibly be defeated. How
you had previously been con
• When you close the GEQ wi
GEQ EDIT window (Fle
This window is the same as
parameter box indicates the
can be controlled in the cur
For a rack in which a Flex15
xB (x is the rack number).
STEP
1. Press the rack container in which you mounted Flex15GEQ.
2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on.
3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you
will control.
4. Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band.
5. When you've finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
es for the PEQ and filter.
e CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input
rating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
e CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output
operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button
e PEQ Library window.
the default parameter setting.
54 3 76 8
B
0
9
A
C
132
Parametric EQ operations
In addition to the standard 4-band EQ, CL series consoles also feature an 8-band parametric
EQ (PEQ) that can be rack mounted. You can mount this PEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch
it to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a
STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it
to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel.
The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section's faders and [ON] keys.
The following type of PEQ is provided.
8BandPEQ
This is a monaural 8-band PEQ. There are also an independent HPF, LPF, and 3 notch filters.
Two 8BandPEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) can be mounted in a rack, and
therefore you can use two channels of input and output for each rack.
 Inserting a PEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a PEQ into the selected channel for use.
NOTE
• You can view the input and output levels of the PEQ in the rack in the GEQ or EFFECT field.
• For details on PEQ operations, refer section “PEQ EDIT window” (page 132).
PEQ EDIT window
1 PEQ graph
Displays the parameter valu
2 INPUT button
Press this button to open th
source of the rack. The ope
GEQ field.
3 OUTPUT button
Press this button to open th
destination of the rack. The
in the GEQ field.
4 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open th
5 DEFAULT button
Press this button to restore
STEP
1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 125) to mount a PEQ in a rack
and set its input source and output destination.
2. In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you
mounted the PEQ.
3. If you're using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two PEQ units.
4. Press the PEQ ON/OFF button to turn the PEQ on.
E
12
D
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
gnals before and after the PEQ.
Q 9-16, or EFFECT 1-8. For a rack in which an 8BandPEQ is
plit as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner's
lay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
e peak of the graph that displays RTA.
Q)
3
2
1
133
6 COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
7 PASTE button
Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current EQ. If
no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
8 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer
memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
9 RACK LINK button
Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent PEQ
units.
In the case of an 8BandPEQ, PEQ (A) and PEQ (B) within the same rack will be linked.
• GEQ x y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and
alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
• GEQ y x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the window.
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link RACK units, a symbol
will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
0 PEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected PEQ on/off.
A PEQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all PEQ bands to 0 dB.
All ON buttons for HPF, LPF, and notch filters are turned off.
All other parameter values are maintained and are not reset.
B PEQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicate the peak level of si
C Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1-8, GE
mounted, the tabs will be s
NOTE
For details on how to use the
Manual.
D RTA button
Turn this button on to over
E HOLD button
Press this button to hold th
PEQ EDIT window (8PE
13
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
the HPF/LPF frequency.
he HPF, LPF, and each of the three notch filters.
filter.
ob notch filter.134
1 BYPASS button
You can bypass each band.
2 HPF/LPF NOTCH button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating HPF/LPF/notch filters.
3 EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the BAND1 - BAND8 bands. You
can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
PEQ EDIT window (HPF/LPF NOTCH)
1 Attenuation select button
There are four types of HPF and LPF. This button switches the attenuation per octave
between -24 dB/oct, -18dB/oct, -12 dB/oct, and -6dB/oct.
2 8PEQ button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating the 8-band PEQ.
3 HPF/LPF frequency knob
This knob is used to adjust
4 ON button
There is an ON button for t
5 Notch Filter Q knob
Adjusts the Q of the notch
6 Notch Filter frequency kn
Adjusts the frequency of the
56565 4 4 4 6
2
3
4
3
1 1
4
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
in channels post-fader
nt Automixer in a virtual rack, and insert Automixer input and
T IN channels) post-fader (POST ON). For details on
following section “Using Automixer.”
channel and man (yellow), auto (green), and mute (red)
1-8 and channels 9-16.
-16 region, the display channel for the channel control field
ls 1-8 are shown.)
l rack operations” (page 125) to mount Automixer in
rce and output destination.
nal device into a channel” (page 20) to insert Automixer
ld).
Master field
Channel control field135
About AUTOMIXER
Automixer is included as a standard feature on the CL series. Automixer searches for enabled
mics and automatically optimizes gain distribution, for uses such as speeches without scripts.
This allows uniform system gain to be maintained among multiple mics, freeing the engineer
from making constant fader adjustments.
Automixer operating principle
With the Dugan speech system used in Automixer, you can automatically adjust the automix
gain for up to 16 mics used for speeches.
The Dugan speech system functions differently from a limiter or auto level controller. When
multiple people are speaking, the engineer can adjust the each level using the faders as
normal. Even if nobody is speaking, the system searches for mic audio and automatically
distributes gain. Therefore, faders can be left in their raised positions.
Inserting Automixer
This section explains how to mou
output into channels (excluding S
Automixer operations, refer to the
Using Automixer
Channel display
The auto mix gain meter for each
settings are shown for channels
If you select the channel 1-8 or 9
will switch to 1-8 or 9-16.
(For 8ch Automixer, only channe
When 1 person speaks on multiple mics When 2 people speak on multiple mics
When 1 person is speaking, the gain on the mic
being used is immediately increased and the gain
on all other mics is reduced. The same operation
occurs even if another person is speaking.
If 2 people are speaking at the same time, gain is
automatically distributed so that the total gain is
consistent across both mics, and the gain on the
remaining mic is reduced.
Gain (dB) in
Automix
Mic input audio
(dB)
Gain (dB) in
Automix
Mic input audio
(dB)
STEP
1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtua
rack 1 and set its input sou
2. Refer to “Inserting an exter
in post-fader (POST ON fie
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
itivity between input channels. When there is no input, adjust
l auto mix gain meters are at about the same level. For
ise near one mic (such as noise from a computer ventilation
u can suppress the noise by reducing the weight setting for
ht settings, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the
io of input level for specific channels for all input mixes in the
le explains the weight control mechanism.
he weight setting in one channel
e auto mix gain meter for that channel increases, while the
are reduced.
t setting values receive a higher automix gain than other
weight setting in one channel
e auto mix gain meter for that channel decreases, while the
are increased.
le mics at the same time, it is difficult to distinguish between
ed to three groups (a/b/c).
enient for the following uses.
sign the mics in each room to their own groups, and use a
ch.
panned to left, right and center to groups a, b, and c, to
ield.
E button in the master field, the channel will switch to man
ing to the settings for that channel's override button.
ide button is on, the mode for that channel will switch to man
IDE button is turned on.
ide is off, the mode for that channel will switch to mute when
utton is turned on.
IDE button is turned off, the channel will return to its previous
venient when the moderator of a panel discussion wants to
w to change the settings.
utton on the moderator's channel.
utton on all other channels.
button in the master field as needed.136
Channel control field
Each channel is always in man, auto, or mute mode. The indicator for the enabled channel
mode will light. To select a mode, either press the button for that mode or press the PRESET
button in the master field.
1 Level indicator
Lights green when the audio is at an optimum level for Automix.
NOTE
• If the level indicator flashes, increase the input gain.
• If the level indicator lights up red, reduce the input gain.
2 Meter indicator
There are three display modes. Pressing the meters button in the master field will switch
modes.
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
3 weight
Adjusts the correlative sens
the weight setting so that al
example, if you can hear no
fan or an air conditioner), yo
that channel.
To change the channel weig
weight slider.
Automixer calculates the rat
group. The following examp
 When increasing t
• The value displayed in th
values for other channels
• Channels with high weigh
channels.
 When reducing the
• The value displayed in th
values for other channels
• When speaking into multip
different mics.
4 group
Each channel can be assign
This group function is conv
• Using multiple rooms: As
different Automixer for ea
• Stereo pan: Assign mics
maintain a stable stereo f
5 override
If you turn on the OVERRID
mode or mute mode accord
• When the channel's overr
when the master OVERR
• When the channel's overr
the master OVERRIDE b
• When the master OVERR
mode.
The override function is con
control the system.
Follow the instructions belo
1. Turn on the override b
2. Turn off the override b
3. Turn on the OVERRIDE
gain Displays the gain for Automixer. Green
input Displays the input level. Yellow
output Displays the output level. Blue
8
5
3
7
6
4
2
1
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
al effects
ies console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1-8, and
utput or input channel's input, or inserted into a channel. For
u can choose one of 54 types of effect.
als from MIX channels 17-24 are input to racks 1-8, and from
N 1-8 (L/R).
ounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7.
and return, assign the output of a MIX channel to the input
ut of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the
used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input
rn channel.
input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a
IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel.
ategories; “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process
ependently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the
them.
e L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R
end on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is
IN
P
U
T
P
AT
C
H
ECT
ECT
ECT
ECT
k 2
k 7
k 8
Input of the input
channel
k 1
ECT
Insert-in of a
desired channel*137
6 Channel number
Displays the channel number and channel name of the channel to be inserted.
7 man/auto/mute
Toggles between man/auto/mute.
man: Passes the audio through without changing the gain. This mode is used for
singing with a mic.
auto: Turns on Automixer. This mode is used for conversations.
mute: Mutes channels.
8 preset
Selects the channel mode (man/auto/mute) when the PRESET button in the master field
is pressed. The preset button lights when a preset is programmed for a channel.
Master field
1 OVERRIDE/PRESET/MUTE
Makes settings for each group (a/b/c) selected in the channel control field. Shows only
the selected group.
• OVERRIDE
When you press this button, channels where the channel override button is on will
fade in to 0 dB (unity gain). All channels with the override button turned off will be
muted.
• PRESET
When you press this button, each channel will switch to the mode indicated by the
mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
• MUTE
When you press this button, all channels will fade out immediately (0.5 seconds).
2 meters
Switches the meter indicator in the channel control field. Toggles between gain, input,
and output each time you press the button.
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
3 reset
Initializes the Automixer settings.
Editing the intern
The internal effects of the CL ser
patched to an output channel's o
each effect mounted in a rack, yo
With the default settings, the sign
the racks are then output to ST I
NOTE
Some effect types can be m
To use an internal effect via send
of the effect, and assign the outp
corresponding output channel is
channel is used as an effect retu
Alternatively, you can assign the
desired channel (except for a ST
The internal effects fall into two c
the L/R channel input signals ind
two channels before processing
If signals are assigned to both th
channels are processed will dep
selected, as follows.
1
32 O
U
T
P
U
T
P
AT
C
H
EFF
EFF
EFF
EFF
Rac
Rac
Rac
Output of the
output
channel
Rac
EFF
Insert-out of a
desired channel*
* Excluding a ST IN channel
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs
he effect in stereo, assign the R input of the ST IN channel selected
e rack.
e output destination for the effect.
ing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect
nd level of a input channel
the OVERVIEW screen, press and select the TO MIX SEND
as the input source for the rack, and use the multifunction
he signal sent from each channel to that MIX bus.
the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field, use the [MIX 1-16] key or the [MIX 17CTED CHANNEL section to select the MIX bus at the input source
nd level, make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you
ation for the rack to the corresponding MIX bus is set to 0. If you
put of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect,
gain, the MIX SEND window (8ch) for the send-destination MIX bus
tains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the
you select the send point (PRE or POST) (page 38 ).138
STEREO type effects
MIX type effects
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/
stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However,
please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK.
Using an internal effect via send and return
This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an
effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration.
NOTE
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow
you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it can be convenient to assign the senddestination MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, refer to page 51.)
NOTE
• If you're using a stereo source
of the rack.
• If you're using the output of t
in step 3 to the R output of th
• You can select more than on
• For more information on sett
parameters” (page 139).
Adjusting the effect se
In the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in
LEVEL knob for the MIX bus set
knob to adjust the send level of t
NOTE
• If a MATRIX bus is shown in
24/MATRIX] key in the SELE
for the rack.
• When adjusting the effect se
selected as the output destin
raise this send level, the out
possibly causing oscillation.
• If you press the knob once a
will appear. This window con
corresponding bus, and lets
STEP
1. Follow steps 1-3 described in “Virtual rack operations” (page 125), to mount an
effect in a rack.
2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select a MIX
channel as the input source for the rack (page 125).
3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the L
input of a ST IN channel as the output destination for the rack (page 125).
4. Adjust the send level from each channel in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the
OVERVIEW screen.
5. Adjust the master level of the effect send of the MIX channel you selected as the
input source for the rack.
6. Adjust the effect return level of the ST IN channel you selected as the output
destination for the rack.
INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN
INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN
INPUT L L RETURN
INPUT R
EFFECT
R RETURN
L RETURN
EFFECT
R RETURN
INPUT L
or R
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel
nput and output of the effect in the same way as step 3.
ow to operate the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window, refer to “Inserting
nnel” (page 20).
e effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right
.
r level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach
ut or output stage of the effect.
ffect parameters
nge the effect type and edit the parameters. For a rack in
llowing information is shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number
ls (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
als before and after the effect.
which the effect you want to edit is mounted.
ress the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window, and
EFFECT TYPE window.
arameter field in the EFFECT EDIT window to select it,
knob to edit the effect parameters.
cial parameter field as necessary.
2
139
Adjusting the master level of the effect send
To adjust the MIX channel you specified as the input source for the rack, first call it up to the
Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating the fader.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload
point.
NOTE
The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right
of the EFFECT EDIT window.
Adjusting the effect return level
To adjust the effect return level, first call up the ST IN channel you specified as the output
destination for the rack to the Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating
the fader.
Inserting an internal effect into a channel
This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of
the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). For
details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters.”
NOTE
• If you are inserting an effect
insert-out/insert-in to the R i
• For more information about h
an external device into a cha
• The levels before and after th
of the EFFECT EDIT window
• Adjust the effect send maste
the overload point at the inp
Editing the internal e
This section explains how to cha
which an effect is mounted, the fo
1 Effect title/type
Displays the effect title, the
of input and output channe
2 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the sign
STEP
1. Follow steps 1-3 described in “Virtual rack operations” (page 125), to mount an
effect in a rack.
2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insertout for one of the channels as the input source for the rack (page 125).
3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the
insert in of the same channel as the output destination for the rack (page 125).
4. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
for the channel into which you inserted the effect.
5. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.
6. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for
the channel into which you inserted the effect.
7. Display the EFFECT EDIT window again, and select the effect type and edit the effect
parameters.
8. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack's output destination in step
3, adjust the level as appropriate.
STEP
1. Press the rack container in
2. To change the effect type, p
select the effect type in the
3. Press a knob in the effect p
and turn the multifunction
4. Edit the settings in the spe
1
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
ct type by recalling a library setting.
“FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you
you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8.
the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only
d. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch
CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be
output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the
CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily
s that are specific to some effect types.
e or modulation-type effect is selected.
he BPM parameter of that
he tempo of the MIDI timing
MIDI port.140
EFFECT EDIT window
Allows you to adjust the effect parameters.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
1 INPUT L/R buttons
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.
2 OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.
3 Effect type field
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number
of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE window, in which you can select the effect type.
NOTE
• You can also change the effe
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and
copy these two effect types,
4 EFFECT CUE button
Cue-monitors the output of
while this screen is displaye
to a different screen.
NOTE
If the Cue mode is set to MIX
monitored. However, only the
EFFECT CUE button. (The [
defeated.)
5 Special parameter field
Indicates special parameter
TEMPO
This field appears if a tempo-typ
• MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, t
effect will be set to match t
clock being input from the
7
6
0
1
A
8
3 24 5
9
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
ers for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a
e able to use the multifunction knobs to control the
w of knobs.
stments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it
the original sound and effect sound included in the output
press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using
ction knob. If you are using the effect via send and return,
nd only).
d effect settings to the effect of another rack, or initialize the
to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in
al.
and recalled at any time using the effect library.
en EFFECT 1–8.
function
you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation
triking a key at the desired interval. The Tap Tempo function
odulation-type effects in which the BPM parameter is
me or modulation speed. To use the Tap function, you must
FINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key.
s of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
o function to a USER DEFINED key
, press the SETUP button.
n in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
YS tab in the USER SETUP window.
S page, press the button for the USER DEFINED key to
he Tap Tempo function.
FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
e USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, and press the OK 141
PLAY/REC
This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
• PLAY button/REC button
Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using
the freeze effect. For detailed operations, refer to “Using
the Freeze effect” (page 144).
SOLO
This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is
selected as the effect type.
• HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple
selections are allowed).
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band.
Gain reduction meter
This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is
selected as the effect type.
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the
compressor.
Type
This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect
type.
• Type
Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects.
DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits,
creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion.
CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits,
creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital.
• FLAT button
This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB.
6 BYPASS button
Temporarily bypasses the effect.
7 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
8 Effect parameter field
This area indicates paramet
knob in this field, you will b
corresponding horizontal ro
You can also make fine adju
down.
9 MIX BAL. knob
Adjusts the balance between
signal from the effect. If you
the corresponding multifun
set this to 100% (effect sou
0 Tool buttons
Copy the currently-displaye
settings. For details on how
the separate Owner's Manu
NOTE
Effect settings can be stored
A Rack select tabs
Enable you to switch betwe
Using the Tap Tempo
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets
speed of a modulation effect by s
can be used for delay-type and m
included, and specify the delay ti
assign Tap Tempo to a USER DE
NOTE
For details on the parameter
Assigning the Tap Temp
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the USER SETUP butto
3. Press the USER DEFINED KE
4. On the USER DEFINED KEY
which you want to assign t
5. Select “TAP TEMPO” in the
PARAMETER 1 column in th
button.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
nction
at which you press the USER DEFINED key will be calculated,
ed to the BPM parameter.
e the range of 20-300 BPM, it will be ignored.
button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will
po of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
, press the RACK button.
VIRTUAL RACK window.
which the effect you want to control is mounted.
the EFFECT EDIT window.
, select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter.
in the effect parameter field.
atedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you
nction, to set the BPM parameter.
c e input to the parameter.
of a, b, and c)
Third tap Fourth tap142
NOTE
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack).
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=1-8) in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, you can use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack).
• For more information on USER DEFINED keys, refer to “USER DEFINED keys” (page 197).
Using the Tap Tempo fu
The average interval (BPM)
and that value will be appli
NOTE
• If the average value is outsid
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK
change in relation to the tem
USER SETUP windowSETUP screen
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP windowUSER DEFINED KEYS page
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the EFFECT tab in the
3. Press the rack container in
4. Press the effect type field in
5. In the EFFECT TYPE window
6. Set the SYNC parameter ON
7. At the desired tempo, repe
assigned the Tap Tempo fu
a b
The average interval will b
(the average
First tap Second tap
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
0/TEMPO) sec
(NOTE x 4) Hz
N, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from
rter note
x (60/TEMPO)
120)
ange from 250 ms to 500 ms.
N, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO
0/new TEMPO)
121)
hange from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
EMPO parameter
following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
owever, this applies only if SYNC is ON and if the MIDI CLK
is input to the MIDI IN jack.)
from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from
e may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled
ere is an example.
20  Change TEMPO to 60  TEMPO=60 
60
EMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly.
.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when
. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between
es not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect
no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
alculated based on the following values.
= 1/16
= 3/8
= 1/12
= 1/2 = 3/4
= 3/32 = 1/8
= 1/1 = 2/1
= 1/6143
NOTE
• If the EFFECT EDIT popup window used to set TAP TEMPO is open, this popup window is not
displayed.
• With CL V3.0 and later, the delay value (msec) is also shown in the popup window.
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types
of effect: delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time
will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the
modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: ..............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .........These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ..........DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation
signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will
change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is
relevant only for modulation-type effects.
How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value*a from the TEMPO and
NOTE.
Turn SYNC ON
Change NOTE DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
Change TEMPO DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (6
FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) /
Example 1: When SYNC=O
8th note to qua
DELAY= new NOTE x 4
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will ch
Example 2: When SYNC=O
from 120 to 121
DELAY= NOTE x 4 x (6
= (1/8) x 4 x (60/
= 0.2479 (sec)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will c
Special characteristics of the T
The TEMPO parameter has the
• Value shared with all effects (H
button is ON when MIDI clock
• You cannot store it to or recall it
a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO valu
as when that effect was stored. H
Store the effect: TEMPO=1
Recall the effect: TEMPO=
Normally when you change the T
However if the DELAY (or FREQ
recalled than when it was stored
store and recall, the CL series do
is recalled, even if the TEMPO is
* The NOTE parameter is c
Tap Tempo pop-up window
= 1/48
= 3/16
= 1/24
= 1/4
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
when FREEZE is selected)
lected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will
field.
the effect type, you can also recall settings that use the “FREEZE”
rary.
Rack
the internal effects, the CL series provides “Premium Rack”
carefully selected vintage analog processors as well as
e Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models
level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog
es of processors.
Outline
alog 5-band EQ.
alog compressor/limiter.
vintage compressor/limiter.
vacuum tube (optical type) compressor.
vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ.
EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to
ost amount in relation to the input level.
ompressor/limiter with discrete circuitry.
1 3 2144
Using the Freeze effect
This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality
of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen
to record (sample) and play back a sound.
NOTE
Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
NOTE
• The bar in the EFFECT EDIT window reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time
has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
• You can adjust the parameters in the EFFECT EDIT window to make detailed settings for
recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play
back. For details on the parameters, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
• The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off
the power to the CL unit.
EFFECT EDIT window (
If the “FREEZE” effect type is se
appear in the special parameter
1 PLAY button
2 REC button
3 Progress bar
NOTE
As an alternative to switching
effect type from the effect lib
Using the Premium
In addition to the graphic EQ and
processors that faithfully emulate
newly developed processors. Th
analog circuitry on a component
sounds.
The Premium Rack offers six typ
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3. Press the effect container in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
4. Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window to open the EFFECT TYPE
window, and select “FREEZE.”
5. To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY
button.
6. To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button.
Name
Portico 5033 Models RND's an
Portico 5043 Models RND's an
U76 Models a typical
Opt-2A Models a classic
EQ-1A Models a classic
Dynamic EQ Newly-developed
control the cut/bo
Buss Comp 369 Models a 1970s c
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
or into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel
R input and output of the processor in the same way as steps 5 and
ameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack
e processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the
output stage of the processor.
ch processor:
rocessor is used on two mono channels.
rocessor is used on one stereo channel.
button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by
es. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a
sor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more
ces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an 145
Using the Premium Rack
The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack
(page 137).
NOTE
• If you are inserting a process
insert-out and insert-in to the
6.
• For details on editing the par
parameters.”
• Adjust the digital gain and th
overload point at the input or
Mounting a processor
There are two ways to mount ea
• DUAL .....................The p
• STEREO ................The p
The DUAL button and STEREO
the Premium Rack processor.
The U76 occupies two rack spac
two-space Premium Rack proces
processors below those rack spa
even-numbered rack.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. Press the PREMIUM tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3. To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack in
the PREMIUM RACK field.
4. Select the processor to mount and the mounting method in the MODULE SELECT
field in the PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window, and press the OK button.
5. Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the
input source.
6. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the
insert-in of the same channel as the output destination.
7. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channel into which
you inserted the effect.
8. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.
9. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for
the channel into which you inserted the processor.
10. Adjust the processor parameters.
11. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack's output destination in step
6, adjust the level as appropriate.
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER
window
VIRTUAL RACK window
(PREMIUM RACK field)
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve
s a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of
one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve.
odeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output
y Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model
sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique
ting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting
e boosted without hurting your ears.
ff. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through
ers and the amp circuit.
e effect.
ency knobs
ch band.
knobs
or cut for each band.
each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range
e gain for the band.
7
3
5
6
146
Editing the Premium Rack parameters
Each Premium Rack window includes the following items:
1 ASSIST button
Press this button to indicate the numbers of the multifunction knobs that control each
parameter.
2 LIBRARY button
Press this button to display the Library window for each Premium Rack.
3 DEFAULT button
Restores the default parameter setting.
4 Multifunction knob access field
Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction
knobs.
To switch the parameter to control, press the knob in the window.
NOTE
• If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently
available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them.
• You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and
holding it down.
Portico 5033
Portico 5033 is a processor that
Designs (RND). 5033EQ feature
the “1073,” which was praised as
Yamaha's VCM technology has m
transformer that was designed b
produces musically high-quality
effects. For example, if the Lo set
is raised, the desired range will b
1 ALL BYPASS button
Switches EQ bypass on or o
the input/output transform
2 TRIM knob
Adjusts the input gain of th
3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequ
Adjust the frequency for ea
4 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain
Adjust the amount of boost
5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs
Adjust the Q (steepness) of
in which you can control th
1 2 3
1
2
8
4
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
st contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you
mpression while maintaining a consistent tonal color.
tage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to
n while adding a tonal character that is characteristic of such
in reduction.
ich compression starts to be applied.
io. If you rotate the knob fully clockwise, the unit will operate
tack time.
lease time.
a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of
ot provide the threshold parameter that is found on
ad, the intensity of compression is determined by the
and the output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO
heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It
aracter with a rich addition of overtones.
65147
6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button
Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively.
7 LF/HF IN button
Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously.
8 Graph
Indicates the graphical EQ response.
Portico 5043
Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND's analog compressor. The
actual 5043 compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the
5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range
of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio
sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can
switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type
(which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-Back) circuit which was typically used in
vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as
appropriate for your applications.
1 IN button
Turns the compressor's bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button
indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass
through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2 INPUT meter
Indicates the input signal level.
One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.
3 FB button
Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (FeedBack) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected.
The FF circuit is used in mo
want to apply consistent co
The FB circuit is used in vin
apply a smooth compressio
devices.
4 GAIN REDUCTION meter
Indicates the amount of ga
5 THRESHOLD knob
Adjusts the threshold at wh
6 RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression rat
as a limiter.
7 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s at
8 RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s re
9 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain.
U76
U76 is a processor that emulates
situations. This processor does n
conventional compressors. Inste
balance between the input gain
parameter allows you to create a
produces an aggressive tonal ch
1 32 4
5 6 7 8 9
21
3 4
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
tes a popular vintage model of tube optical compressors. To
omponents such as a CdS cell and an EL panel to apply
iful high-range overtones generated by warm-sounding
g an elegant and sophisticated sound.
ount of the signal.
io.
s the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
e level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT
cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to
meter.
3 4148
1 INPUT knob
Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied.
2 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest
attack time.
3 RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest
release time.
4 RATIO switch buttons
Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio.
A button with a higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL
button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression
with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive
sound.
5 METER switch buttons
Switch the meter display.
• GR.................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
• +4/+8 .............Each meter uses -18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and
indicates “0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or
+8 dB.
• OFF ...............Turns off the meter display.
6 OUTPUT knob
Adjusts the output level.
If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT knob, the
level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust
the volume level.
Opt-2A
Opt-2A is a processor that emula
control the level, it uses optical c
smooth compression, with beaut
vacuum tube distortion, deliverin
1 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output level.
2 PEAK REDUCTION knob
Adjusts the compression am
3 RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression rat
4 METER SELECT knob
Switches the meter display.
GAIN REDUCTION indicate
With -18 dB as the referenc
+4 settings respectively will
be shown as “0VU” on the
21
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
pplied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH
tion applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN
ion attenuated by the ATTEN knob.
d equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of
lter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This
me way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a
g the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific
al becomes too high or too low. For example you could use
ser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only
consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a
ir the original tonal character. Two full-band Dynamic EQs
cess a wide range of audio sources.
B
C
149
EQ-1A
EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique
style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency
ranges (high and low). Its frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ,
producing a unique character that is distinctive of this model. The input/output circuits and
vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced.
1 IN switch
Turns the processor on or off.
When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the
input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2 LOW FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the low range filter.
3 (LOW) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
4 (LOW) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
5 BAND WIDTH knob
Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter.
As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the
peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost.
6 HIGH FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost.
7 (HIGH) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost a
FREQUENCY knob.
8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenua
SEL knob.
9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob
Switches the frequency reg
Dynamic EQ
Dynamic EQ is a newly-develope
equalizer. The sidechain has a fi
allows you to apply EQ in the sa
specific frequency region, causin
frequency region of the input sign
this on a vocal sound as a de-es
when sibilance or high-frequency
natural sound that does not impa
are provided, enabling you to pro
1 BAND ON/OFF button
Turns each band on or off.
2 61
3 4 5 7 8 9
82 A
4
3
1
9
0
6
5
7
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
al level in relation to the threshold level.
nse.
lays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and
EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ
HAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter
Dynamic EQ graph
Reference EQ graph
Sidechain filter graph150
2 SIDECHAIN CUE button
Turn this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time,
the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button
Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus
(such as a STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent.
At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
4 FILTER TYPE buttons
Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and
sidechain filter will link as follows:
5 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter.
6 Q knob
Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter.
As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or
sidechain filter is applied will become wider.
7 THRESHOLD knob
Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking effect.
8 RATIO knob
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut.
Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect.
9 ATTACK/RELEASE buttons
Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression
or boost.
Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and
slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending
on the frequency ranges.
0 MODE buttons
Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the
threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW).
A EQ GAIN meter
Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain.
B THRESHOLD meter
Indicates the sidechain sign
C Graph area
Displays the equalizer respo
In most cases, this area disp
intensity, and the dynamic
responses.
If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDEC
response.
FILTER TYPE
(Low Shelf) (Bell) (Hi Shelf)
Main EQ Low Shelf Bell Hi Shelf
Sidechain filter LPF BPF HPF
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
in. However, the output gain is linked to change in the
nt changes in pass-through volume (the volume when
off). For example, if INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain
is -5dB.
tion about how to use INPUT ADJUST.
signal sent to effects is too low to reach the threshold,
y changing the input level sent to the input circuitry (audio
amplifier).
ever, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
he release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change
automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes
s and 5 sec.
dBFSdBFS
COMP THRESHOLD LIMIT THRESHOLD
Buss Comp 369
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER SECTION
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT
OUTPUT GAINCOMPRESSOR LIMITER
O
U
T
O
U
T
IN IN
ubstantial changes in threshold, the changing display
However, the internal conditions of the COMPRESSOR/
N do not actually change.
Linked in reverse151
Buss Comp 369
Buss Comp 369 emulates a standard bus compressor that has been used in recording studios
and broadcasting stations since the 1980s. It produces a smooth and natural compression
that does not interfere with the expression in the source signal, in contrast with the aggressive
compression of the U76. Buss Comp 369 includes both a compressor and a limiter. You can
use both functions individually or in combination, according to your needs. Further, the rich
overtones generated by the audio transformers on the input/output circuits and the discrete
Class A amplifier add depth and unity to the sound quality.
STEREO mounting
DUAL mounting
1 INPUT ADJUST
Used to adjust the input ga
opposite direction, to preve
COMP IN and LIMIT IN are
is +5dB and the output gain
See below for more informa
• If the level of the input
increase the input gain.
• Adjust the sound quality b
transformer and Class A
INPUT ADJUST structure
2 LINK (STEREO mounting)
Stereo link on/off
3 COMP IN
Compressor on/off
4 COMP THRESHOLD
Compressor threshold. How
5 COMP RECOVERY
Compressor release time. T
automatically. a1: Changes
automatically between 50 m
31
8 > A B C
42 5 6 7
1
9 > A B C
43 5 6 7
INPUT
CIRCUIT
INPUT GAIN
INPUT ADJUST
Since there are s
values are linked.
LIMITER SECTIO
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
ting)
the VU meter. You can select from input level or output level.
ms, SLOW: 4ms
, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
lease times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change
automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes
s and 5 sec.152
6 COMP GAIN
Compressor make-up gain. Applied before the limiter.
7 COMP RATIO
Compressor ratio
8 METER SELECT (STEREO mounting)
Selects the signal source for the meter. You can select from IN (input level), GR (gain
reduction), and OUT (output level). When the source is switched, the design of the
meter also switches as follows: VU/GR/VU.
When“METER” is IN
When“METER” is GR
When“METER” is OUT
9 VU SELECT (DUAL moun
Selects the signal source for
0 LIMIT IN
Limiter on/off
A LIMIT ATTACK
Limiter attack time. FAST: 2
B LIMIT THRESHOLD
Limiter threshold. However
C LIMIT RECOVERY
Limiter release time. The re
automatically. a1: Changes
automatically between 50 m
8
8
8
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
ibrary to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The library
rough #100). Item #000 is a preset. All library items other
written.
m Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top
ing type.153
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and
Premium Rack libraries
GEQ/PEQ library
Use the “GEQ library” or “PEQ library” to store and recall GEQ and PEQ settings. All GEQ
and PEQ units used in the CL series console can use this GEQ library or PEQ library.
Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ in the GEQ library, you are free to recall
items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen
bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ.
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is a read-only preset, and the
remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
GEQ EDIT window.
Similarly, to recall an item from the PEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top
of the PEQ EDIT window.
NOTE
• Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store
and recall two Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ units independently as A and B.
• To access the GEQ EDIT window or the PEQ EDIT window, press the rack container in the GEQ
field.
Effect library
Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the
effect library. Library items 1-27 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect types 1-27
respectively. The remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
EFFECT EDIT window.
Premium Rack library
You can use the Premium Rack l
contains 101 items (from #000 th
than #000 can be freely read and
To recall an item from the Premiu
of the window for the correspond
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
NTE PATCH page)
nd model name of the I/O devices.
TPUT PATCH window, where you can specify patching from
o the I/O devices. If a previously set-up device does not
audio network, a yellow “VIRTUAL” indicator is shown at
. If devices on the network belong to different DEVICE TYPEs
d “CONFLICT” indicator will appear to the left, below the
hare the same ID, a yellow “DUPLICATE” indicator will
the device.
e DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
ton
e DANTE INPUT PATCH window, in which you can select the
ut from the I/O device to the console.
tton
he PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT window, where
nels that will be output from the console's output ports to
2
3
4
154
I/O devices and external head amps
This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to
the CL series console. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices
that will be mounted. For details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network”
(page 231).
Using an I/O device
CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such
as an R series product) connected to the Dante connector.
I/O device patching
Here's how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante
audio network.
I/O DEVICE screen (DA
1 I/O device list
This shows the ID number a
Press here to access the OU
the console's output ports t
currently exist on the Dante
the lower left of that device
but share the same ID, a re
device. If multiple devices s
appear to the right, below
2 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open th
for the audio network.
3 DANTE INPUT PATCH but
Press this button to open th
64 channels that will be inp
4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP bu
Press this button to access t
you can choose the 64 chan
I/O devices.
STEP
1. Connecting CL series consoles and I/O devices
2. In the Function Access Area, press the I/O DEVICE button.
3. Press the DANTE PATCH tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
4. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH
page).
5. Press the AUTO SETUP button.
If you want to edit individual patches, press the port select button.
6. Press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page).
7. Press the port select button in the OUTPUT PATCH window.
8. In the PORT SELECT screen, select the output port.
1
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
other than an I/O device supported by the CL series, the upper line
t four letters of the Device Label, a dash “-” , and the channel number
nted, the display for the upper row of buttons will be “CL#X” (where
unted CL unit).
bel has been specified, a value equal to the channel number will be
Channel Label using Audinate “Dante Controller” software. For the
e Yamaha pro audio website.
com/
rt select button in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window or
you change a patch, select the I/O port.
device containing the input port that you want to assign.
closes the window.
2
3
155
DANTE INPUT PATCH window
Displayed when you press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen
(DANTE PATCH page). Specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the
console.
1 LIBRARY button
Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library.
You can store ten sets of settings in the library.
2 AUTO SETUP button
The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the
console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are
registered in the I/O device list.
When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to
confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching.
Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen.
3 Port select buttons
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window.
“Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number
(decimal)” are shown in the upper row on the button.
The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel
Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button.
If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate“---” and the lower row will
indicate nothing.
NOTE
• If you've connected a device
of the button will show the firs
(decimal).
• If a CL series console is mou
X is the ID number of the mo
• If no Dante Audio Channel La
displayed in the lower row.
• You can set the Dante Audio
latest information, refer to th
http://www.yamahaproaudio.
PORT SELECT window
Displayed when you press the po
OUTPUT PATCH window. When
1 Category select list
Enables you to select the I/O
2 Port select buttons
Select the input port.
3 CLOSE button
Completes the settings and
1 2
3
1
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
page)
o view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold
f the corresponding I/O device will blink.
t VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
4, “I/O device list”.
model name, and version of the I/O device.
s turned ON in the REMOTE HA SELECT screen, “w/RECALL”
STER switch for the mounted device is turned ON,“+48V
e DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
tion messages are displayed. Refer to the list (page 250) for
messages.
4
3
156
OUTPUT PATCH window
Displayed when you press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). Set
the output patch.
1 Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
Remotely controlling an R series unit
This section explains how to remotely control an R series unit that's connected to the Dante
connector.
I/O DEVICE screen (I/O
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons t
down this button, all LEDs o
For more information abou
button, refer to (1) on P.15
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number,
If the WITH RECALL button i
is displayed. If the +48V MA
MASTER” is displayed.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open th
for the audio network.
4 SYSTEM/SYNC indicators
Error, warning, and informa
detailed information about
STEP
1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the I/O tab to display the I/O
DEVICE screen (I/O page).
2. Press the rack in which the I/O device that has head amp functionality is mounted.
3. Open the I/O DEVICE HA screen to remotely control the head amp of the I/O device.
4. To remotely control a head amp from an input channel, press a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel you want to adjust. The GAIN/PATCH
window will appear.
6. Control the head amp of the I/O device in the GAIN/PATCH window.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the window.
8. Press the rack in which the I/O device on the OUTPUT side is mounted.
9. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 154).
1
1 2
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
u can press the buttons to change settings.
Rate Converter) on and off.
ator
n ether to use (indicator on) or not use (indicator off) the word
WCLK IN FOR SRC jack on the rear panel of the RMio64-D
.
kHz indicator
Hz indicator
dicate whether the MADI input signal is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
f there is no valid MADI input signal.
icator
icator
icator
s/4Fs button
x), or 4Fs (4x), based on the MADI input frequency. For
signal is 192 kHz (4x 48 kHz), confirm that the MADI INPUT
n and then select “4Fs”.
unit automatically detects the frame frequency (48 kHz/96 kHz) of
5
9
8
157
HA display
This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA
window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings.
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not
light for external CL series consoles.)
5 Analog GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be
edited.
6 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port.
7 OVER indicator
Warns you when the input signal is clipping.
8 HPF indicator
Indicates the high-pass filter on or off status for each port.
 INPUT display
This shows the input settings of I/O devices not assigned to REMOTE HA ASSIGN.
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not
light for external CL series consoles.)
OUTPUT display
This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH
window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device.
If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not
light for external CL series consoles.)
RMio64-D display
Displays the RMio64-D panel. Yo
1 MADI SRC ON indicator
MADI SRC ON button
Switches the SRC (Sampling
2 MADI SRC WCLK IN indic
MADI SRC WCLK IN butto
Use this button to select wh
clock input from the MADI
as a standard clock for SRC
3 MADI INPUT RATE Fs 44.1
MADI INPUT RATE Fs 48k
Automatically detect and in
Both indicators remain off i
4 MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs ind
MADI INPUT RATE 2Fs ind
MADI INPUT RATE 4Fs ind
MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs/2F
Select either 1Fs (1x), 2Fs (2
example, if the MADI input
RATE Fs 48kHz indicator is o
NOTE
When “2Fs” is selected, the
the MADI input signal.
6
8
5
7
421 3
6 7
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
ck in which the I/O device on the head amp side is mounted.
control the head amp of the I/O device from the CL series
nobs and buttons or the multifunction knobs.
f the I/O device's master phantom power. (Switching this on
/O device itself.)
er on/off for each channel.
d amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob
ltifunction knobs. The level meter located at the immediate
the input level for the corresponding port.
Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal
utton
or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O
frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it,
using the corresponding multifunction knob.
s that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA window.
L OFF button
on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
e output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation
7
8
1
158
5 MADI STATUS INPUT status
MADI STATUS OUTPUT status
Display information regarding the MADI input and output signals (frame frequency/
number of channels).
6 WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator
WORD CLOCK MADI indicator
WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator
WORD CLOCK WCLK IN/MADI/DANTE buttons
Used to select the word clock source.
7 WORD CLOCK Fs indicator
Indicates the word clock frequency at which the unit is operating. Flashes when not
synchronized.
8 EXTERNAL CONTROL indicator
This indicator comes on when there is a valid parameter that can be operated only
externally by remote control.
Refer to “Remote Control” in the RMio64-D Owner's Manual for details about
parameters that can be operated by remote control.
9 OUTPUT PATCH button
Press this button to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output
port settings for RMio64-D.
I/O DEVICE HA window
Displayed when you press the ra
In this window, you can remotely
console by using the on-screen k
1 +48V MASTER
Indicates the on/off status o
or off is performed on the I
2 +48V button
These switch phantom pow
3 GAIN knob
Indicates the gain of the hea
to select it, and use the mu
right of the knob indicates
4 GC button
Switches on or off the Gain
level on the audio network.
5 FREQUENCY knob/HPF b
These controllers switch on
device, and adjust its cutoff
you will be able to adjust it
6 Displayed port switch tab
These tabs switch the port
7 GC ALL ON button/GC AL
Switch Gain Compensation
8 GC indicator
Indicates the fixed gain valu
function is turned on.
WCLK IN
Uses the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK IN connector on
the rear panel of RMio64-D. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock
input.
MADI Uses the word clock of the MADI input signal. The indicators flash when there is no
valid word clock input.
DANTE Uses the word clock of the Dante network.
2
3
4
5
6
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
P page)
o view the corresponding I/O device.
t VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
4, “I/O device list”.
model name, and version of the I/O device.
e DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
3
159
Remotely controlling from the input channels
To remotely control the I/O device's head amp from an input channel of the CL series console,
operate the GAIN/PATCH window for the channel for which you want to control.
Remotely controlling an amp
This section explains how to remotely control an AMP unit that's connected to the Dante
connector.
I/O DEVICE screen (AM
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons t
For more information abou
button, refer to (1) on P.15
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number,
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open th
for the audio network.
STEP
1. Press the AMP tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2. Press the I/O device displayed on the I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page).
3. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 154).
1 2
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
e DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings
head amp
S64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head
able to remotely control from the CL console some
amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom
and HPF.
gs, refer to the Owner's Manual for the I/O card.
ries console to an AD8HR
rom the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64
CL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit
the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA
8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection
he AD8HR from the CL series console.
the AD8HR) to the CL series console, connect the DIGITAL
D8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a
gnals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the
ES64 card.
y chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units
ct the AD8HR's HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second
tor. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to six
ut AD8HR's audio signals into the CL series console, install
nit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel
of the third and subsequent AD8HRs to each AES/EBU
AES/EBU cable.160
Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit
This section explains how to remotely control a WIRELESS unit that's connected to the Dante
connector.
I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page)
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
button, refer to (1) on P.154, “I/O device list.”
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open th
for the audio network.
Using an external
If an I/O card (such as an MY16-E
amp in the CL's slot, you will be
parameters of the external head
power (+48V) on/off status, gain,
For details on the I/O card settin
Connecting the CL se
To remotely control the AD8HR f
EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the
to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect
REMOTE 1 connector on the AD
enables you to remotely control t
To transmit audio signals (input to
OUT A (or B) connector on the A
D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable. Si
CL series console via the MY16Alternatively, you can use a “dais
simultaneously. To do this, conne
AD8HR's HA REMOTE 1 connec
AD8HR units. In this case, to inp
two MY16-EX cards on the CL u
signals. Then, connect each two
connector using a D-sub 25-pin
STEP
1. Press the WIRELESS tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2. Press the I/O device displayed in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page).
3. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 154).
1 2
3
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
ries console to an SB168-ES
S from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64
CL, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the
les you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series
y chain or ring connection and install two MY16-EX
he CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168-ES units
eceived and transmitted only at Slot 1 of the CL series console.
MY16-
EX
Audio signal
Remote signal161
Connecting the CL se
To remotely control the SB168-E
EtherSound card in Slot 1 of the
SB168-ES. This connection enab
console.
Alternatively, you can use a dais
expansion cards in the slots on t
simultaneously.
NOTE
Remote control data will be r
Daisy chain network
CL5
AD8HR 1
NAI48-ES
AD8HR 2
AD8HR 3
MY16-EXMY16-EX MY16- ES64
DIGITAL OUT
A connector
DIGITAL OUT
A connector
DIGITAL
OUT A
connector
HA REMOTE connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
HA REMOTE 2 connector
Up to six units
Audio signal
Remote signal
HA REMOTE 2 connector
HA REMOTE 2 connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector SB168-ES
SB168-ES
SB168-ES
MY16-
ES64
MY16-
EX
CL5
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
an external head amp
l HA” ) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES can be
series console. For details on how to connect a CL series
p, refer to “Using an external head amp” (page 160) and the
anual.
ole to an external HA.
, press the RACK button.
in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK screen.
RT SELECT button for the corresponding rack in the
ERNAL HA page).
ns in the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window to select
e audio output of the external HA is connected.
close the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window.
n (EXTERNAL HA page), press the rack in which the
ntrol is mounted.
nal head amp in the EXTERNAL HA window.162
Ring connection
NOTE
Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/
MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network.
Remotely controlling
An external head amp ( “externa
remotely controlled from the CL
console with an external head am
external head amp's operating m
SB168-ES
SB168-ES
SB168-ES
CL5
MY16-
ES64
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
Audio signal
Remote signal
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
STEP
1. Connect the CL series cons
2. In the Function Access Area
3. Press the EXTERNAL HA tab
4. Press the EXTERNAL HA PO
VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXT
5. Use the PORT SELECT butto
the input ports to which th
6. Press the CLOSE button to
7. In the VIRTUAL RACK scree
external HA you want to co
8. Remotely control the exter
VIRTUAL RACK screen
(EXTERNAL HA page)
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
ay between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view that's
ed device.
ns l HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select
otely control the external HA.
LECT window
rnal head amp. Display this window by pressing the
button in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
hich the external HA is connected.163
VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page)
1 EXTERNAL HA field
This displays the state of the connected external HA.
2 ID/Model name/+48V master
This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is
automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to 6. This field also
enables you to view the on/off status of the master phantom power.
3 Virtual racks
These are up to six racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be
mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN
setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the
EXTERNAL HA window for that rack.
4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button
Press this button to display the HA PORT SELECT window, in which you can set the input
port for the external head amp mounted in the rack.
NOTE
If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console, you must specify an
appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected
correctly when you patch input ports to input channels.
5 VIEW switch buttons
Switch the virtual rack displ
appropriate for the connect
6 COMM PORT switch butto
Specify whether the externa
“SLOT1” if you want to rem
EXTERNAL HA PORT SE
Select the input port for the exte
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT
1 PORT SELECT buttons
Specify the input ports to w
2 3 4
1
5 6
1
I/O devices and external head amps
Reference Manual
n external HA from the input channels on a CL
al HA in the same way as the head amp on an I/O device or
the GAIN/PATCH window, refer to “HA (head amp) settings”
the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
r the head amp that you want to control.
f the channel whose external HA you want to adjust.
the GAIN/PATCH window, and select the input port
.
nal head amp in the GAIN/PATCH window.
ATCH window164
EXTERNAL HA window
Remotely control the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the virtual rack in
the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
1 +48V MASTER
If an external HA is connected, the master phantom power on/off status is shown here.
(The on/off setting is made on the external HA unit itself.)
2 +48V button
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
These indicate the gain of the external HA. If you press and select the GAIN knob, you
can make adjustments to gain using multifunction knobs 1-8. The level meter located
at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
4 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and
adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able
to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.
5 Rack select tabs
These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window.
NOTE
• If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used.
These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window even if an AD8HR is not
connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected.
• Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to
set the EtherSound parameters. Use AVS-ESMonitor for these functions.
Remotely controlling a
series console
You will be able to use the extern
on the CL console. For details on
(page 29).
2
3
5
1
4
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in
that includes the channel fo
2. Press the HA/PHASE field o
3. Press the PATCH button in
assigned to the external HA
4. Remotely control the exter
OVERVIEW
screen
GAIN/P
MIDI
Reference Manual
sion and reception of MIDI messages, you can select either the rear
rs or an I/O card installed in slot 1. All of the functionality described
le on the port you select.
s essages the CL series console will transmit and receive, the
he MIDI channel.
ge operations, refer to the following section “Using program changes
tems” (page 168).
Change messages, refer to “Using control changes to control
, press the SETUP button.
in the center of the SETUP screen.
the MIDI/GPI screen.
for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the MIDI
for port selection, select the port type and port number
MIDI messages, and press the OK button.
tton in the MIDI SETUP page.
for channel selection, select the channel that will
essages, and press the OK button.
rn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI
MIDI/GPI screen
(MIDI SETUP page)165
MIDI
This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series
console to control the CL console's parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from
the CL console as you operate the unit.
The following illustration shows an example of connecting the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to
transmit and receive MIDI messages.
MIDI functionality on the CL series console
The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations.
Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the CL series console, a
Program Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an
external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program
Change message is received from an external device.
Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the CL series console,
the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device.
Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an
external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or
other external device, and play them back later.
Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception
When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user
settings) are executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be
transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter
Changes are received from an external device.
Using this capability, CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer
or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and
executed by another CL console.
NOTE
As the port used for transmis
panel MIDI IN/OUT connecto
in this section will be availab
Basic MIDI setting
You can select the type of MIDI m
MIDI port that will be used, and t
NOTE
• For details on Program Chan
to recall scenes and library i
• For details on using Control
parameters” (page 170).
CL5
MIDI OUTMIDI IN MIDI OUTMIDI IN
External device
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the MIDI/GPI button
3. Press the MIDI SETUP tab in
4. Press the port select button
SETUP page.
5. In the MIDI SETUP window
that will transmit or receive
6. Press the channel select bu
7. In the MIDI SETUP window
transmit or receive MIDI m
8. In the MIDI SETUP page, tu
message.
SETUP screen
MIDI
Reference Manual
E field
ogram Change transmit/receive mode.
utton is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and
d on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).
utton is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on
MIDI channels (Multi mode).
utton is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be
d in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/reception and
ode transmission are disabled.
utton is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and
d in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group
ram Change messages to be used.)
Control Change message transmission and reception on or
s control change transmission on/off.
s control change reception on/off.
s on or off echo output of Control Change messages. (If this
is on, Control Change messages received from an external
will be retransmitted without modification.)
E field
ect the Control Change transmission/reception mode.
utton is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/
d as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode).
utton is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/
d as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel
mode).
ld ssion/reception of SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or
ages used to control the parameter of the CL console.)
s parameter change transmission on/off.
s parameter change reception on/off.
s on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages. (If
ction is on, Parameter Change messages received from an
l device will be retransmitted without modification.)
put of other MIDI messages. (If this function is on, other
m an external device will be retransmitted without 166
MIDI/GPI screen (MIDI SETUP page)
You can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose
the port that will be used.
1 PORT/CH field
Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive
MIDI messages.
• Tx PORT/Tx CH..................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can
respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit
MIDI messages.
• Rx PORT/Rx CH .................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can
respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive
MIDI messages.
NOTE
When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used
as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
2 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or
off.
• Tx ........................................... Switches program change transmission on/off.
• Rx........................................... Switches program change reception on/off.
• ECHO..................................... Switches on or off echo output of Program Change
messages. (If this function is on, Program Change
messages received from an external device will be
retransmitted without modification.)
3 PROGRAM CHANGE MOD
Enables you to select the Pr
• SINGLE.............. If this b
receive
• MULTI ................ If this b
multiple
• OMNI.................. If this b
receive
Single m
• BANK................. If this b
receive
of Prog
4 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI
off.
• Tx ....................... Switche
• Rx ...................... Switche
• ECHO................. Switche
function
device
5 CONTROL CHANGE MOD
This field enables you to sel
• NRPN button ..... If this b
receive
• TABLE button ... If this b
receive
(TABLE
6 PARAMETER CHANGE fie
Enables you to turn transmi
off. (These are special mess
• Tx ....................... Switche
• Rx ...................... Switche
• ECHO................. Switche
this fun
externa
7 OTHER COMMAND field
Switches on or off echo out
MIDI messages received fro
modification.)
1
2
4
6
7
3
5
MIDI
Reference Manual
or channel selection)
to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission
ars when you press the channel select button in the PORT/
H16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI
loses the window.
2
167
MIDI SETUP window (for port selection)
Here you can select the port that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. This
window appears when you press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx)
in the PORT/CH field.
1 TERMINAL field
Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
You can choose from the following items.
2 PORT NO. field
If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1-8 in this field. (The
number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.) The
currently-available card is valid only for port 1.
3 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
MIDI SETUP window (f
This parameter row enables you
and reception. This window appe
CH field.
1 CH field
Enables you to select CH1-C
messages.
2 OK button
Confirms the settings and c
NONE No port will be used.
MIDI MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel
SLOT1
A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on
the rear panel
1 2
3
1
MIDI
Reference Manual
transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked
E section of the MIDI SETUP page.
, the corresponding Program Change messages will be
when events on the list are executed.
, the corresponding events will be executed when Program
ssages are received.
n is on, Program Change messages received from an
vice will be retransmitted without change.
E field
ogram Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked
E MODE section of the MIDI SETUP page.
LTI button is on):
I channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/
the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.) When a Program
nt assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program
cuted.
c event on a CL series console, the Program Change of the
mber will be transmitted on the MIDI channel shown in the
to more than one program number on multiple MIDI
numbers, only the lowest-numbered program number on
ransmitted.)
5
6
2
168
Using program changes to recall scenes and library
items
The CL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to
each Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the CL console, a
Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external
device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change
message is received from an external device.
NOTE
Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than
for individual scenes.
MIDI/GPI screen (PROGRAM CHANGE page)
In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted
and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned
to each program number.
1 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Switches Program Change
with the PROGRAM CHANG
• Tx ..................If this is on
transmitted
• Rx .................If this is on
Change me
• ECHO............If this butto
external de
2 PROGRAM CHANGE MOD
Enables you to select the Pr
with the PROGRAM CHANG
• Multi mode (when the MU
Program changes of all MID
receive channel specified in
Change is received, the eve
number in the list will be exe
When you execute a specifi
corresponding program nu
list. (If an event is assigned
channels/multiple program
each MIDI channel will be t
STEP
1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (page 165), select the ports and MIDI channels
that will be used to transmit/receive program changes.
3. Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4. In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, switch Program Change transmission/reception on
or off, select transmission/reception mode, and set echo output.
5. To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event
in the list and select an event type and the recall target.
MIDI/GPI screen
(PROGRAM CHANGE page)
1
4
3
MIDI
Reference Manual
ENT
tes the type/number/title of the event assigned to each
nel (bank number) or program number. Press an individual
display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE
w, in which you can select the event that you want to assign.
list upward or downward using the multifunction knob.
l events from the list.
all event assignments on the list to their default state.
GE window
d to each program number. Display this window by pressing
GE page in the MIDI/GPI screen.
2 3
4
169
• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on):
Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the
MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received. When a program change on the Rx
channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding
channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of
the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the
list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel,
the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.)
• When the OMNI button is on in SINGLE mode:
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI
channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of
the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the
operation for Program Change transmission.
• When the BANK button is on in SINGLE mode
The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select
(Control Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and
received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single
MIDI channel.
When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on
the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the
list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the CL series console, Bank Select and Program
Change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will
be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the
list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received,
the last-selected bank number will be used.
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case,
Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
3 List
Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI
Program Change number. The list shows the following items.
• CH/BANK...............If “CH” is shown, this column indicates the MIDI channel (1-16) on
which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program
Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the
BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,” and the numerical
value in this column will correspond to the bank number (1-128).
• NO. .........................Indicates the program number 1-128.
• PROGRAM CHANGE EV
.........................Indica
chan
event
windo
4 Scroll knob
Press this knob to scroll the
5 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to erase al
6 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore
MIDI PROGRAM CHAN
You can specify the event assigne
the list in the PROGRAM CHAN
1
MIDI
Reference Manual
ers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for
ole to an external device.
settings” (page 165), select the ports and MIDI channels
it/receive control changes.
E tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
smission/reception on or off, select transmission/
ho output.
ment for each control number, press the desired event
nt type and the recall target.170
1 TYPE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
2 DESTINATION field
Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall. If EFFECT or PREMIUM RACK is
selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is selected, this will
indicate - - -, and is not used.
3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY TITLE field
Enables you to choose the library that you want to recall.
If SCENE or EFFECT is selected in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY TITLE is shown. If PREMIUM
RACK is selected, the LIBRARY NUMBER is shown.
4 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
Using control changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob
operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the CL series console. This capability can be
used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and
play back this data later.
You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
Using Control Changes
This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1-31, 33-95, 102-119). You can
freely assign an event to each control number.
Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte)
and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted
Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of
that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be
changed.
NOTE
For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the data list at the end of this
manual.
NOTE
Assignments to control numb
individual scenes.
NO ASSIGN No assignment
SCENE Scene memory recall operations
EFFECT Effect library recall operations
PREMIUM RACK Recall operations for the corresponding Premium Rack library
STEP
1. Connect the CL series cons
2. As described in “Basic MIDI
that will be used to transm
3. Press the CONTROL CHANG
4. Switch Control Change tran
reception mode, and set ec
5. To change the event assign
in the list and select an eve
MIDI/GPI screen
(CONTROL CHANGE page)
MIDI
Reference Manual
ol Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/
page (page 166).
b operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to
ndicates the control number. You can use control numbers 13-95, and 102-119.
ENT
tes and enables you to select the type of event assigned to
control number. When you press an event, the MIDI
TROL CHANGE window will appear, allowing you to change
ontrol number assignment.
event assignments on the list.
all event assignments on the list to their default state.
ist. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this.171
MIDI/GPI screen (CONTROL CHANGE page)
You can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event
(fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.
1 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify
whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL
CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx button ............................... Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx button............................... Switches control change reception on/off.
• ECHO button ......................... Selects whether incoming control changes will be
echoed out from the MIDI transmit port.
2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This
setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a
single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the
list will be ignored.
• TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a
single MIDI channel as Control Change messages, according to the assignments in the
list.
NOTE
The channel on which Contr
CH field on the MIDI SETUP
3 List
Shows the event (fader/kno
each control number.
• NO..........................This i
31, 3
• CONTROL CHANGE EV
.........................Indica
each
CON
the c
4 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all
5 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore
6 Scroll knob
Scrolls the contents of the l
1
6
4
5
2
3
MIDI
Reference Manual
hanges to control parameters
an use a type of system exclusive messages called
specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off
ings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or
nges that can be transmitted and received, refer to the data
“device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device.
d receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used
evice number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does
r of the receiving CL console, the message will be ignored.
ge and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time.
f data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other
ole to an external device.
settings” (page 165), select the ports and MIDI channels
e used to transmit/receive parameter changes.
utton of the PARAMETER CHANGE field in the MIDI
ameter change transmission/reception.172
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE window
Display this window by pressing any event in the CONTROL CHANGE page. In this window,
you can specify the event assigned to each control number.
1 MODE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
2 PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event.
3 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
NOTE
• The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will
indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this
window are ignored.
• For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the data list at the end
of this manual.
Using Parameter C
On the CL series console, you c
“Parameter Changes” to control
operations, system and user sett
NRPN messages.
For details on the Parameter Cha
list at the end of this manual.
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a
The transmit (Tx) channel an
as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the d
not match the device numbe
• Do not turn Parameter Chan
Otherwise, a large amount o
problems.
1 2
3
STEP
1. Connect the CL series cons
2. As described in “Basic MIDI
(device number) that will b
3. Use the Tx button and Rx b
SETUP page to turn on par
Recorder
Reference Manual
s to the input/output of the
the desired channels to the input and output of the USB
any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT
d you can patch the recorder output to any desired input
lways records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in
nal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to
nels to the recorder output.
t a channel to which another port is already patched, a dialog box
tch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
, press the RECORDER button.
CORDER screen.
L or R button.
e port select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select
to patch to the USB memory recorder input.
signing the channel, press the CLOSE button.
er input in the same way.
T L or R button.
e channel select buttons in the CH SELECT window to
want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
signing the channel, press the CLOSE button.
er output in the same way.173
Recorder
This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder.
About the USB memory recorder
The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record
internal audio signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash
drive.
As the file format for recording, the CL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer3). For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG4 AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported.
By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be
recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on the USB flash
drive can be played back via an assigned input channel.
Signal flow for the USB memory recorder
* CL3: INPUT1-64, CL1: INPUT1-48
NOTE
• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.
Assigning channel
recorder
Follow the steps below to patch
memory recorder. You can patch
channel to the recorder input, an
channel.
NOTE
• The USB memory recorder a
monaural, with the same sig
the same channel.
• You can patch multiple chan
• In steps 4 and 8, if you selec
will ask you to confirm the pa
• In the case of the CL3/CL1,
MIX1-24
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
INPUT1-72*
DIRECT OUT
RECORDER
INPUT
PLAYBACK
OUT INPUT1-72*
ST IN 1L1R-8L8R
L
R
L
R
USB
memory
recorder
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the USB tab in the RE
3. Press the RECORDER INPUT
4. Use the category list and th
the channel that you want
5. When you have finished as
6. Assign a channel to the oth
7. Press the PLAYBACK OUTPU
8. Use the category list and th
select the channel that you
9. When you have finished as
10. Assign a channel to the oth
RECORDER screen
Recorder
Reference Manual
button
r the signal output from the recorder.
n and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously.
als output to the recorder.
the RECORDER INPUT L or R button or the PLAYBACK
pe of channel.
l be patched to the USB memory recorder's inputs and
can be patched at input or output are different.
hed to the recorder's inputs
........ MIX channels 1-24
........ MATRIX channels 1-8
........ STEREO channel L/R
........ STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel
........ STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO(C) channel
........ MONO channel
........ Direct output of an INPUT channel 1-72
hed to the recorder's outputs
........ INPUT channels 1-72
........ ST IN channels 1-8L/R
channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 2
1
174
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder,
and perform recording and playback operations.
1 RECORDER INPUT L/R buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals
patched to the recorder's L/R input channels.
2 RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder.
3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button
When this button is turned on, you can monitor the signal input to the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously.
4 Meters
Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder.
5 PLAYBACK OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals
patched to the recorder's L/R output channels for playback.
6 PLAYBACK OUTPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal output to the recorder.
7 PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE
Press this button to monito
NOTE
You cannot turn on this butto
8 Meters
Indicate the level of the sign
CH SELECT window
Display this window by pressing
OUTPUT L or R button.
1 Category List
Enables you to select the ty
2 Channel select button
Select the channels that wil
outputs. The channels that
Channels that can be patc
• MIX 1-24.........................
• MTRX 1-8 .......................
• ST L/R............................
• ST L+C...........................
• ST R+C ..........................
• MONO ............................
• CH1-72 ...........................
Channels that can be patc
• CH1-72 ...........................
• STIN 1L/1R-STIN 8L/8R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5
1
Recorder
Reference Manual
n selecting the USB tab)
recording and playback of a song.
ted song's track number, title and artist name. The following
g playback or recording.
ack time of the current song during playback, and the
ing recording.
yback time of the current song during playback, and the
ring recording.
bit rate of the current song (the file being played back).
34A 5 6
ng back. The unit is currently recording.175
Recording audio to a USB flash drive
You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB
flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display.
NOTE
• The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity in the USB flash drive.
• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).
• The level meter on the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder.
If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the
recorder. Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports
from the corresponding output channel.
• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE
folder in the USB flash drive. However, you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS
folder.
• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later.
RECORDER screen (whe
TRANSPORT field
This field enables you to control
1 Current song
Indicates the currently-selec
indicators will appear durin
2 Elapsed time display
Indicates the elapsed playb
elapsed recording time dur
3 Remaining time display
Indicates the remaining pla
available recording time du
4 Current song format
Indicates the file format and
STEP
1. Refer to “Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder” (page 173) to
assign channels to the input/output of the recorder.
2. Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector.
3. To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are
patched to the input of the recorder.
4. Press the REC RATE button in the lower right of the RECORDER screen, then select
the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded.
5. Press the REC () button located at the bottom of the screen.
6. To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button in the lower part of the
screen.
7. To stop recording, press the STOP () button.
8. To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.
8-1. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the recording.
8-2. To stop playback, press the STOP () button.
1
2
0987
The unit is currently playi
Recorder
Reference Manual
USB flash drive
rive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder
ted automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
erations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the
at level.
Song
(audio file)
ongs folder
der176
5 REC RATE button
Switches the recording rate.
You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio
quality, but will increase the size of the data.
NOTE
The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be
selected as the sampling rate for the audio file.
6 Display Switch Button
Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUTPUT
fields at the bottom of the song list.
7 REW button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song and stops playback. If
the playback point is already at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of
the preceding song that has been selected for playback.
If the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this
button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which
the button was released.
8 STOP button
The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode.
9 PLAY button
Changes the recorder mode as follows.
Stop modePlayback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current
song.
Playback modePlayback-pause mode
Playback pause modePlayback mode, then starts playback from the paused point.
Recording standby modeRecording mode
Recording modeRecording-pause mode
Recording-pause modeRecording mode, then starts recording from the paused point.
0 FF button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY
check symbol.
The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE( ) button will light.
A REC button
Places the recorder in recording standby mode.
NOTE
You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key (page 197).
Directory structure of a
When you connect a USB flash d
within that YPE folder will be crea
The files created by recording op
currently-selected folder below th
S
YPE fol
Root directory
Recorder
Reference Manual
perations related to the songs and directories that are saved
will appear in a blue frame.
te whether the currently-selected file is playing or paused.
the title list.
9
1
A
0
C
B
177
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files
that were recorded on the CL series console, you can also play files that were copied from
your computer to the USB flash drive.
The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz
and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps.
NOTE
• If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder,
or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of
unsupported formats will not be recognized.
• The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters.
If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly.
• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories
can be managed.
NOTE
• Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling
rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically
convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly.
• If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback.
RECORDER screen
Title list
This list enables you to perform o
on the USB flash drive.
1 Selected song
The currently selected song
2 Status indicator
Displays a symbol to indica
: Playing, : Paused
3 Track number
Indicates the file number in
STEP
1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
3. You can use the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen and the folder icon
in the No. field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file.
4. Use the multifunction knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired file.
5. Press a button in the PLAY MODE field to select the playback mode.
6. If you turned on the REPEAT button in step 5, press the PLAY checkmark for the song
you want to play.
7. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the song.
8. To stop playback, press the STOP (?) button.
6 7 8
3 5 4
2
Recorder
Reference Manual
yback of the current song is complete, the recorder will play
t is marked with a PLAY check symbol (unless there are no
arked with a PLAY check symbol).
rder will stop after playback of the current song is complete
ent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol). One
ethods is selected according to the on/off settings of the
EAT button.
st audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist
tains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be
can be edited only for MP3 format audio files.
Mode
The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop
playback.
The currently-selected song will play once and then stop.
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order,
starting with the currently-selected song, and then they are
played again from the first song in the title list. The currentlyselected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order,
starting with the currently-selected song. After the final song in
the title list is played, playback stops.
ontaining audio files to the USB connector.
, press the RECORDER button.
e change directory icon in the RECORDER screen to view
folder that includes the desired file.
the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT
the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button.
, and press the OK button.
TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button,
N buttons on screen to change the order of the title list.
press the SAVE LIST button to save the changes.178
4 Sub-directory
Indicates each song's track number, the name of upper level directory, and whether a
sub-directory exists (in the case that the directory has been selected).
• Upper level ............Press this to move up to the directory that is one level higher than
the current one.
• Sub-directory ................Press this to move to that sub-directory.
NOTE
• If you switch folders, that folder will be selected as the recording destination.
• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and
folders located below the SONGS folder.
5 PLAY check symbol
Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively.
6 SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knob to select a song.
7 NOW PLAYING button
Press this button to always select the currently-playing song on the list.
8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
Change the order of the selected song in the list.
9 Display switch buttons
Switch the list between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display.
0 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist.
A RELOAD button
Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current
playlist you are editing back to the previous state.
PLAY MODE field
Sets the playback method of the currently selected song.
B SINGLE button
If this button is on, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete.
If this button is off, the recorder will play the next song on the list after playback of the
current song is complete.
C REPEAT button
If this button is on, after pla
the first song on the list tha
subsequent songs that are m
If this button is off, the reco
(unless there are no subsequ
of the following playback m
SINGLE button and the REP
Editing the title li
You can change the order of the
names.
NOTE
• If the title or artist name con
converted into ? for display.
• The title and the artist name
SINGLE
button
REPEAT
button
On On
On Off
Off On
Off Off
STEP
1. Connect a USB flash drive c
2. In the Function Access Area
3. Press the No. button and th
a list of the contents of the
4. If you want to edit a title in
button. If you want to edit
5. Edit the title or artist name
6. If necessary, use the SONG
and MOVE UP/MOVE DOW
7. When editing is complete,
Recorder
Reference Manual
ng back using a computer DAW
such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes
u must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) driver software.
, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and
CL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be
gs of live performances or use live recordings that were
ound check.
equired when adding DAW software to an audio network.
software
ices
equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit
software
itch
r software
re use Dante Virtual Soundcard. A sheet with the DVS token needed
cluded in the CL unit package.
the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at 179
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button
Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list.
2 ARTIST EDIT button
Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list.
NOTE
A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the
title and for the artist name. If the title cannot be shown completely, scroll horizontally.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title.
4 ARTIST SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name.
5 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist on the USB flash
drive.
6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button
Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/
FILE NAME field.
Recording or playi
If you plan to add DAW software,
a CL console and I/O devices, yo
DVS works as an audio interface
an audio network (that includes a
able to make multi-track recordin
made a day earlier for a virtual s
This section explains the steps r
Required devices and
• CL series console and I/O dev
• A computer (Windows or Mac)
Ethernet (GbE) network; DAW
• A GbE-compatible network sw
• CAT5e cable
• Dante Virtual Soundcard drive
• Dante Controller control softwa
NOTE
• You must have a license ID to
to acquire the license ID is in
• The latest information about
the following website:
http://proaudio.yamaha.co.jp
3 4
2
5
6
1
Recorder
Reference Manual
ual Soundcard
DVS) and
that you
e turning
etwork port
patible
in an IP
igh setting to
ltiple
t the number
rding and
tual Soundcard User's Guide for more information on ASIO settings
tings
tor card on the computer, install the Dante Accelerator Driver
For information about how to install the driver, refer to the
he driver.
t the Dante jack on the Dante Accelerator card to the Dante
computer's network port to the same network.
in an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
electing a computer for remote control from a CL series console,
ante Accelerator” in “When setup method selection button =
page 184).
V3.7 and earlier
V3.7180
Word clock settings
In a Dante network, the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the
network. If the master device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device
will automatically take over as the clock master.
To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then the WORD
CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window.
Setting up Dante Virt
Install Dante Virtual Soundcard (
Dante Controller in the computer
want to use for audio recording.
Make the following settings befor
DVS on.
• Connect the GbE-compatible n
of the computer to a GbE-com
network switch.
• Configure the computer to obta
address automatically
(this is the default setting).
• Set the audio format.
(Example: 48kHz, 24 bit)
• Set the Dante latency. (Use a h
ensure stability when using mu
channels.)
• In the Advanced settings, selec
of channels to be used for reco
playback (the default is 8 x 8).
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Vir
(Windows).
Dante Accelerator set
After mounting a Dante Accelera
and make the following settings.
Installation Guide included with t
• Use a network cable to connec
network, and then connect the
• Configure the computer to obta
NOTE
For more information about s
refer to “Specifying DVS or D
SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS” (
Recorder
Reference Manual
are
your DAW software. You must make driver settings in your
ng window, select “Dante Virtual Sound Card-ASIO” (“Dante”
as the sound card (or audio driver) used for input/output.
internal patching for the driver and the DAW software. For
W software manual.
le Extension” software for linking Nuendo Live to a console,
d create a new project, tracks corresponding to the number
be created automatically, and the channel names and colors
utomatically be assigned as each track name.
playback
gs in your DAW software, you can record and play back
input ports for the tracks of the DAW software to the ports
e I/O devices.
st route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the
Controller to patch the signals so that the signals will be
DANTE 1-64 on the CL console. It may be convenient for you
ANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for
devices, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW
able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante
able to patch a specific channel (such as a vocal) to the I/
ual sound check.181
Setting up Dante Controller
Connect the network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the
computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
You must make the following settings for Dante Controller.
• For multi-track recording, patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS or the Dante
Accelerator card.
• For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the
computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the CL console.
(page 155).
The following example shows Dante Controller settings for when channels 1-16 of an I/O
device are patched to DVS.
In this case, you'll need to switch the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console
depending on whether you're performing multitrack recording or multitrack playback. If you've
saved these different sets of settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY (page 155),
you'll be able to switch between them conveniently.
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings
of the Dante Controller.
Setting up DAW softw
You must make driver settings in
DAW software. In the device setti
for Mac) or “Yamaha AIC128-D”
Some DAW software may require
more information, refer to the DA
Setting up Nuendo Live
If you install the “Yamaha Conso
and then start up Nuendo Live an
of channels specified in DVS will
from the CL series console will a
Audio recording and
After you have made driver settin
audio.
For multi-track recording, set the
that receive audio signals from th
For a virtual sound check, you mu
CL console. To do so, use Dante
output from the DAW software to
later if you store two sets of the D
routing audio signals from the I/O
software. In this way, you will be
Controller. In addition, you will be
O device to monitor during a virt
Recorder
Reference Manual
n selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
d ls of Nuendo Live.
ted by the peak hold function.
recorded in the current Nuendo Live project.
by pressing the on-screen list or by using the multifunction
keyboard window allowing you to edit the marker
n console will use for communication when working with
ton
TE INPUT PATCH window (page 155).
lay
r the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can
t to switch the time display format.
1
6
3
2
4
5
HEDCB182
Using the CL console with Nuendo Live
The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg's Nuendo Live
DAW software.
The “Yamaha Console Extension” software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live
can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series
console to easily perform multi-track recording operations.
Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console.
Preparing the project
Refer to “Recording or playing back using a computer DAW” (page 179) to make the following
settings.
• Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard
• Setting up Dante Controller
• Setting up Nuendo Live
Recording into a project
RECORDER screen (whe
1 Nuendo meter display fiel
This shows the channel leve
2 PEAK CLEAR button
Clears the peak levels indica
3 Marker list field
Lists the marker information
The markers can be selected
knobs.
When you press this field, a
information will appear.
4 Nuendo Live SETUP butto
Specify the device that the
Nuendo Live. (page 183).
5 DANTE INPUT PATCH but
Press this to access the DAN
6 Location information disp
This displays information fo
press the button at the righ
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
2. Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the RECORDER screen.
3. Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording.
4. When you finish recording, press the record lock button and then press the STOP
button.
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
A0987
I
F
G
Recorder
Reference Manual
nte Accelerator
SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For
device on the Dante audio network” (page 231).
r Dante Accelerator in the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window.
ame DVS or Dante Accelerator from multiple CL series consoles.
indow
that the console will use for communication when working
press the NUENDO Live SETUP button.
screen, press the setting method select button.
] knob to make settings.
king settings, press the OK button to close the window.183
Transport field
Here you can operate the transport of Nuendo Live.
7 GO TO PROJECT START button
Returns the location to the start of the project.
8 GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button
Returns the location to the previous marker.
9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button
Advances the location to the next marker.
0 GO TO PROJECT END button
Advances the location to the end of the project.
A CYCLE button
Turns repeat on/off for the project.
B STOP button
Stops playback/recording of the project.
C PLAY button
Starts playback of the project.
D RECORD button
Starts/stops recording of the project.
E EASY RECORDING button
Immediately starts recording on all tracks.
When you press this, the location will move to the last-recorded position, all tracks will
be set to record mode, recording will begin, the record panel will be displayed, and the
panel will be locked. The recording will be started retrospectively.
(Default setting: 10 seconds)
F ADD MARKER button
Adds a marker to the project at the current location.
G RECALL LINK button
Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is
turned on, the button will be lit.
H Record lock button
Turns recording status lock on/off. This prevents recording from being accidentally
stopped during recording.
NOTE
Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys (page 197).
I DVS information display
Shows the device label of the selected DVS.
Specifying DVS or Da
Before you proceed, use DANTE
details, refer to “Mounting an I/O
NOTE
• You can specify either DVS o
• However, do not select the s
NUENDO LIVE SETUP w
In this window, specify the device
with Nuendo Live.
STEP
1. In the Nuendo Live screen,
2. In the NUENDO LIVE SETUP
3. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN
4. When you have finished ma
1
Recorder
Reference Manual
lection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS
pecify the IP address of the computer in the SPECIFIED IP
ress of Dante Accelerator will differ from the IP address used
ou must specify the IP address manually.
s to specify the IP address.
e IP address of the computer that is running Nuendo Live.
uter in the range of 169.254.0.0 - 169.254.255.255, and set the
.
ante Accelerator is installed, the Dante port of Dante Accelerator as
he computer must both be connected to the same network.
.
SW
(Primary)
SW
(Secondary)184
1 Setup method select buttons
Choose one of the following methods by which to specify DVS or Dante Accelerator.
• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not assigned
• DVS ..................................... Select a DVS from the device list
• SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS .. When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of
the computer
When setup method selection button = DVS
To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to
display the DEVICE LIST field.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live.
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Operate the multifunction knob to choose the DVS that you want to select.
When setup method se
When using Dante Accelerator, s
ADDRESS field. Since the IP add
by Yamaha Console Extension, y
1 IP ADDRESS knobs
Use the multifunction knob
NOTE
• As the IP address, specify th
• Set the address of that comp
subnet mask as 255.255.0.0
• For the computer in which D
well as the Ethernet port of t
Refer to the illustration below
1
2
1
Computer
Ethernet
Dante Accelerator P
S
CL Dante
P
S
Recorder
Reference Manual
T PATCH settings in a library, the settings of the CL series console
y (page 155).
ab)
DANTE INPUT PATCH window185
NOTE
• Depending on the firmware version, Dante Accelerator might not support redundant networking.
Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the Dante Accelerator firmware
supports redundant networking.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Playing a multi-track project
NOTE
If you save the DANTE INPU
can be switched convenientl
STEP
1. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the RECORDER screen (Nuendo Live page).
2. In the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, press the PORT SELECT button for the port to
which you want to assign the signal from Nuendo Live.
3. In the list at the left of the PORT SELECT window, select the DVS you're using with
Nuendo Live, and select the port you want to assign it to.
4. Press the + button located in the upper part of the window to switch the port, and
assign a DVS port to it in the same way.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the
window.
6. Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close
it.
7. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button.
8. Operate the channels so that sound is output.
9. To stop playback, press the STOP button.
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo Live t
PORT SELECT window
Setup
Reference Manual
ton
e PASSWORD CHANGE window, in which you can change
e SAVE KEY window, in which you can overwrite (save) the
ge 193).
save, or load a user authentication key.
n e CREATE USER KEY window, in which you can create a new
e SAVE/LOAD window, in which you can save or load user
sole files.
arious settings that globally apply to the CL series console.
er +48V master phantom power on or off. When this button
r for all the head amps turns off.
power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of each channel
UP button
e WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window, in which you can
nd various settings for each slot.
e CASCADE window, in which you can make patch settings
e OUTPUT PORT window, in which you can make output
e MIDI/GPI window, in which you can make MIDI and GPIe DANTE SETUP window. This window enables you to make
gs (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality
cy setting; DANTE device ID and device type settings for
O RACK screen).186
Setup
About the SETUP screen
The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console.
To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The
screen contains the following items.
CURRENT USER field
This field enables you to make various user-related settings.
1 USER SETUP button
Press this button to open the USER SETUP window, in which you can make various
settings for each user.
2 CURRENT USER button
Press this button to open the LOG IN window, in which you can switch log-in users.
3 COMMENT EDIT button
Press this button to open the COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter
comments that will be displayed in the comment area.
4 PASSWORD CHANGE but
Press this button to open th
the password.
5 SAVE KEY button
Press this button to open th
user authentication key (pa
STORAGE field
This field enables you to create,
6 CREATE USER KEY butto
Press this button to open th
user authentication key.
7 SAVE/LOAD button
Press this button to open th
authentication keys and con
SYSTEM SETUP field
This field enables you to make v
8 +48V MASTER button
Switches the console's mast
is off, +48V phantom powe
NOTE
If this button is off, phantom
is on.
9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT SET
Press this button to open th
make word clock settings a
0 CASCADE button
Press this button to open th
for cascade connections.
A OUTPUT PORT button
Press this button to open th
port settings.
B MIDI/GPI button
Press this button to open th
related settings.
C DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open th
various audio network settin
setting; audio bit rate; laten
devices controlled via the I/
1 6 72 543
8
F
G
9
C
A
0
H
D
B
I J K
E
Setup
Reference Manual
6 for surround output. You can press the APPLY button to
dialog box. Press the OK button to set the bus to Surround
o mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6
und mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6
mode to Surround mode, the STEREO and MONO(C) inserts are
rround mode187
BUS SETUP field
This field enables you to make bus-related settings.
D BUS SETUP button
Press this button to open the BUS SETUP window, in which you can make MIX bus/
MATRIX bus-related settings.
E SURROUND SETUP button
Press this button to call up the SURROUND SETUP screen. In this screen, you can switch
the bus settings from Stereo mode to Surround mode. If set to Stereo mode, the bus
settings for MIX1-6 will be grayed out. If you press the 5.1 SURROUND button to switch
to Surround mode, you can then set the bus settings for MIX1-6.
Assign channels to MIX 1 open the CONFIRMATION
mode.
NOTE
• When you switch from Stere
change to MONO x2.
• When you switch from Surro
remain as MONO x2.
• When you switch from Stereo
turned off.
For Stereo mode
For Su
Setup
Reference Manual
Lock function. If the console password has been set,
AUTHORIZATION window. Enter the correct password to
been set, pressing this button will execute Console Lock
S field
LCD brightness and contrast.
want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can
n bank A and B, and switch between them if desired.
hannel name display.
e channel name display.
knob
ce of the channel color and the channel name display.
ob e display.
b e panel LEDs.
e lamp connected to the LAMP connector.
estrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or
DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user.
red as a “user authentication key” inside the console or
owing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in
peration can be prevented.
operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be
tiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc.
unintended operations.
ator can easily be switched.188
If you set Surround mode, the BUS SETUP screen appears as shown below.
DATE/TIME button
Press this button to open the DATE/TIME window, in which you can set the date and time.
NETWORK button
Press this button to open the NETWORK window, in which you can set the network address.
 Indicator field
This field displays various information about the console.
F BATTERY indicator
Indicates the status of the internal battery.
NOTE
The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact
your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual
(separate document) to have the backup battery replaced.
G POWER SUPPLY indicator
Indicates the currently-running power supply.
• INT .........................Internal
• EXT ........................PW800
H Version indicator
Indicates the version number of the main CPU, sub CPU, and Dante module.
CONSOLE LOCK button
This button executes the Console
pressing this button will open the
execute Console Lock.
If the console password has not
immediately.
CONTRAST/BRIGHTNES
This field enables you to set the
I BANK A/BANK B buttons
Select a bank to which you
save two different settings i
J CONTRAST NAME knob
Adjusts the contrast of the c
K BRIGHTNESS NAME knob
Adjusts the brightness of th
BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR
Adjusts the brightness balan
BRIGHTNESS SCREEN kn
Adjusts the brightness of th
BRIGHTNESS PANEL kno
Adjusts the brightness of th
BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob
Adjusts the brightness of th
User settings
User Level settings allow you to r
to change the settings of USER
Settings for each user can be sto
together on a USB flash drive, all
the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken o
• The range of functionality
limited.
• In situations in which mul
can be locked to prevent
• Preferences of each oper
Setup
Reference Manual
rator password
inistrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log
nd perform all operations. If you want to restrict the
ust specify an Administrator password.
ight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the
e set.
sword, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner's Manual.
ntication key
tion key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console's
cation key can be created only by an Administrator or Power
ified when the authentication key is created, but the USER
rence settings will be carried over from the user who is
console's internal memory.
thentication key will be specified as the current user name, and its
he root directory.
, press the SETUP button.
the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
ter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then
the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and
.
Keyboard window189
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the CL series console, you must log-in
as a user.
• Administrator ...... The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality.
Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the
console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys for
other users.
• Guest...... A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator.
Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console.
• User ........A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as
user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in internal
memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name.
A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user
authentication keys with a specified user level.
When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the
following information.
• Password (except for Guest)
• User Level settings (except for Administrator)
• Preferences
• USER DEFINED keys
• USER DEFINED knobs
• Assignable encoders
• Custom fader bank
• MASTER fader
Privileges for each user are as follows.
Setting the Administ
With the factory settings, the Adm
in with Administrator privileges a
operations of other users, you m
NOTE
• The password can be up to e
Administrator password will b
• For details on entering a pas
Creating a user authe
You can create a user authentica
internal memory. A user authenti
User. The user level can be spec
DEFINED key settings and prefe
currently logged-in.
NOTE
• You can store ten keys in the
• The file name of the user au
location will be specified as t
Logged-in user
Editing user setup
data, such as
USER DEFINED
keys and
Preferences
Editing User
Level settings
Password
setting
Editing
commen
ts User authentication key
Create
new Overwrite-save
Administrator
Available
(Can edit the
settings for
Administrator
and for Guest.)
Available
(Cannot edit the
user level, since
the administrator
can always
perform all
operations. Can
edit the settings
for Guest.)
Available - Available User
Power user Available Available Available Available Available Available
Normal user
(User without
Power User
privileges)
Available N/A(Viewing only) Available Available Available
(Excluding User
Level settings)
Guest Available N/A(Viewing only) - Available - STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the keyboard window, en
enter the same password in
finally press the OK button
SETUP screen
Setup
Reference Manual
ow ss this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can
eight characters.
the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in
ment of up to 32 characters.
sword. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which
f up to eight characters.
er privileges will be granted to this user.
nge of operations that the user can perform. For details on
faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3 4190
CREATE USER KEY wind
1 USER NAME
Displays the user name. Pre
enter a user name of up to
2 COMMENT
Displays a comment about
which you can enter a com
3 PASSWORD
Enables you to specify a pas
you can enter a password o
4 POWER USER
Specifies whether Power Us
5 ACCESS PERMISSION
These settings specify the ra
each item, refer to P.193.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
STEP
1. To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive
to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the CREATE USER KEY button.
4. In the CREATE USER KEY window, when you have specified the user name, comment,
password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button.
5. If you want to create a user authentication key in the console's internal memory,
press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field in the CREATE KEY
window. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive,
press the PATCH button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field.
6. Press the CREATE TO button.
7. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
SETUP screen CREATE USER KEY window
CREATE KEY window
1
2
5
Setup
Reference Manual
a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB
rive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key
onsole.
stored in the console
, press the SETUP button.
the CURRENT USER button.
s the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button.
, press the SETUP button.
the CURRENT USER button.
AL STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, choose the user
ich you want to log in, and press the LOGIN button.
ss the OK button.
LOGIN window191
Logging-in
To operate the CL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log
in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the
USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user
authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you
remove the USB flash drive after logging-in. If you use a user authentication key on a USB
flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after
logging-in.
NOTE
If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state
in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter
the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.
Logging-in as Administrator
NOTE
• If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press
the LOGIN button. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to
enter the password.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom
of the screen.
Logging-in as Guest
Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use
flash drive. If using a USB flash d
created on a different CL series c
With a user authentication key
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3. In the LOGIN window, press the ADMINISTRATOR button.
4. Enter the password and press the OK button.
SETUP screen LOGIN window
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the LOGIN window, pres
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the LOAD FROM INTERN
authentication key with wh
4. Enter the password and pre
SETUP screen
Setup
Reference Manual
, you will simply be logged-in in step 6 when you press the LOAD
t, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom
uthentication key that was created on a different CL series console,
ar, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series
g. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not
correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will
r the password for the selected user. If you re-save the user
ot be asked for the Administrator password the next time. Refer to
n key” (page 193).
s from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from a USB flash
rd e the password of the logged-in user. The Guest account
rd, if you log out from the console without saving the user
ed password will be discarded.
, press the SETUP button.
the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
ter the current password and press the OK button.
the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same
ASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK
hentication key” (page 193) to overwrite the user 192
NOTE
• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN
button.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom
of the screen.
With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive
NOTE
• If no password has been set
button.
• If the password was incorrec
of the screen.
• If you have selected a user a
a keyboard window will appe
console that you will be usin
appear.) When you enter the
appear, allowing you to ente
authentication key, you will n
“Editing a user authenticatio
• For details about loading file
drive” (page 214).
Changing the passwo
Follow the steps below to chang
does not have a password.
NOTE
After you change the passwo
authentication key, the chang
STEP
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
4. In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, press the (LOAD .CLU
FILE) button.
5. In the SAVE/LOAD window, choose the user authentication key with which you want
to log in.
6. Press the LOAD button.
7. Enter the password and press the OK button.
SETUP screen LOGIN window
LOGIN window SAVE/LOAD window
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the keyboard window, en
4. Enter the new password in
password in the RE-ENTER P
button.
5. Refer to “Editing a user aut
authentication key.
Setup
Reference Manual
vel
level.
The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can
change the user level setting of the Guest account.
The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest
account. It cannot be changed.
A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her
User account. It cannot be changed.
A power user can view and change his or her User account.
, press the SETUP button.
the USER SETUP button.
, press the USER LEVEL tab. (If you are logged-in as the
R GUEST button to switch to the USER LEVEL for Guest
essing the button for each item that will be permitted.
king settings, close the window and press the SETUP
ss Area.
USER SETUP window193
Editing a user authentication key
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your USER DEFINED keys, preference settings,
comments and password, and save them onto your user authentication key. If you are loggedin as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
• If you loaded a user authentication key from a USB flash drive, press the SAVE KEY button before
removing the USB flash drive. If you do remove the USB flash drive before pressing this button,
load the user authentication key again.
Changing the user le
You can view or change the user
• Administrator................
• Guest .............................
• Normal user ..................
• Power User ...................
STEP
1. Log-in as a user, and edit the USER DEFINED keys (page 197) and Preference settings
(page 195).
2. Close the USER SETUP window.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE KEY button.
4. In the SAVE KEY window, choose the save-destination button, and then press the
SAVE TO button.
5. If you selected the same location as the current user authentication key, press the
OK button in the dialog box that asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite that
user authentication key.
SETUP screen SAVE KEY window
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the USER SETUP window
Administrator, press the FO
page.)
4. Specify the user level by pr
5. When you have finished ma
button in the Function Acce
SETUP screen
Setup
Reference Manual
..... Restricts operation of that channel's send parameters.
(From MIX, From MATRIX)
..... Restricts operation of that channel's DCA group fader,
ON/OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME.
..... Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group.
..... If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of
a channel to enable or disable the above-mentioned
operating restrictions for that channel.
t can be performed on the current scene memory.
..... Restricts operations for input channel patching and
names.
..... Restricts operations for output channel patching and
names.
..... Restricts operations for bus setup.
CK/PREMIUM RACK
..... Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open
the RACK USER LEVEL window, in which you can set
this restriction.
However, there will be no restriction on operating the
MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and
modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button
displayed for the FREEZE effect.
MASTER
..... Operations for mute group assignment and mute group
master will be restricted.
faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
t can be performed on scene memories.
t can be performed on libraries.
s 194
USER SETUP window
1 CH OPERATION
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input
channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currentlyselected channel. Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the
CH OPERATION section. Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the
Function Access Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings.
The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group.
• INPUT channel................... [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• MIX/MATRIX channel......... [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• STEREO/MONO channel
......................... ............ [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• DCA group ......................... [DCA MASTER], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN]
• HA ....................................... Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that
channel.
• PROCESSING .................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters
for that channel (excluding the fader, [ON] key, and send
level).
• FADER/ON.......................... Restricts operation of that channel's fader, [ON] key, and
send level.
• WITH SEND...................
• DCA MASTER ...............
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN...
• SET BY SEL ..................
2 CURRENT SCENE
Specifies the operations tha
• INPUT PATCH/NAME ....
• OUTPUT PATCH/NAME
• BUS SETUP ..................
• GEQ RACK/EFFECT RA
................
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/
................
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1,
3 SCENE LIST
Specifies the operations tha
• STORE/SORT operations
• RECALL operations
4 LIBRARY LIST
Specifies the operations tha
• STORE/CLEAR operation
• RECALL operations
3
4
1
8
2
6
7
5
Setup
Reference Manual
arious settings for the CL console operating environment,
d whether [SEL] key on/off operations will be linked. These
r who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the
le to change the Guest settings.
ministrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
t page and make preference settings for the Guest account.
REFERENCE page)
ff options related to scene store/recall operations.
, press the SETUP button.
the USER SETUP button.
, press the PREFERENCE tab.
to make Preference settings.
king settings, close the window and press the SETUP
ss Area.
5
195
5 FILE LOAD
Specifies the types of file that can be loaded from USB flash drives. The user
authentication key contains the user level, USER DEFINED keys, and Preference settings.
Other data is saved in an “ALL” file. The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings
of the Administrator and the Guest.
• USER SETUP (USER DEFINED keys and Preferences settings)
• SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP
• CURRENT SCENE
• SCENE LIST
• LIBRARY LIST
6 MONITOR SETUP
Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed.
• OSCILLATOR
• TALKBACK
7 SYSTEM SETUP
Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed.
• MIXER SETUP
• OUTPUT PORT
• MIDI/GPI
• DANTE SETUP
NOTE
• The content that is restricted with the DANTE SETUP button is as shown below.
• Changing the CONSOLE ID
• Changing the SECONDARY PORT setting
• Changing control of DANTE PATCH changes (THIS CONSOLE or DANTE CONTROLLER)
• Changing BIT DEPTH
• Changing LATENCY
• Changing DEVICE MOUNT
• Changing REMOTE HA ASSIGN
• Changing the Dante Input Patch
• Changing the Dante Output Patch
• Changing the Dante Input Patch Library (Changing Store, Recall, Clear, Library Name)
• If an operation is restricted, the message “This operation is not allowed.” is displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
• With the factory settings, this is turned off (no restrictions).
8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button
Permits/clears all items.
Preferences
Follow the steps below to make v
such as how windows appear, an
settings are changed for the use
Administrator, you will also be ab
NOTE
If you are logged-in as the Ad
the PREFERENCE for Gues
USER SETUP window (P
1 STORE/RECALL field
Enables you to turn on or o
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the USER SETUP window
4. Use the buttons on screen
5. When you have finished ma
button in the Function Acce
1
2
3
4
Setup
Reference Manual
sing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator
/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by
PATCH settings.
NOB(S) PRESSED
knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the panel while
EW screen is displayed will cause a window (1ch) to appear.
dow (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob.
N knob, a window (8ch) will open.
when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED
anel. When ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust
p. When DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital
EMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys will do when pressed in the
ton is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will increment or
er.
utton is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will scroll the list
scene memories and library items will appear on the list.
is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When
e list appears in descending numerical order.
name display in the Channel Strip section.
on is lit, the channel name and the channel number appear.
the GR meter and fader level value.
isplay the information of a function that has been assigned
nob on the channel fader strip. This option is the same as
in CL version 1.7 or earlier.
duction meter for DYNAMICS 1 and 2, as well as other information,
.
during SENDS ON FADER mode, the channel name display will be
bles you to easily view the movement of the gain reduction.196
• STORE CONFIRMATION
• RECALL CONFIRMATION
If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a
Store or Recall operation respectively.
2 PATCH field
Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations.
• PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch
or output patch.
• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or
output patch item that is already patched to a port.
3 LOCALE SETUP field
Enables you to select the language used in Help files. Select “EN” to display Help files in
English.
4 ERROR MESSAGE field
Enables you to specify whether certain error messages should be displayed.
• DIGITAL I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a digital audio I/O error occurs.
• MIDI I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI I/O error occurs.
5 PANEL OPERATION field
Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation.
• AUTO CHANNEL SELECT
Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the
[ON] key or fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input
channels) and OUTPUT (output channels).
• [CUE][SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK
button is on, channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected.
• [FADER BANK][SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set
this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and
CUSTOM (Custom fader bank).
If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in
that bank that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.
• IDENTIFY I/O RACK PORT BY [SEL]
Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port
connected to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel.
If this ON button is lit, pres
to flash for the port of the I
the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT
• POPUP APPEARS WHEN K
Specifies whether pressing a
the SELECTED CHANNEL VI
If the ON button is lit, a win
NOTE
If you press the SEND or PA
• GAIN KNOB FUNCTION
Specifies what will happen
CHANNEL section on the p
analog gain on the head am
gain on the console.
• SCENE UP/DOWN
Specifies what the SCENE M
SCENE windows.
When the SCENE +1/-1 but
decrement the scene numb
When the LIST UP/DOWN b
upward or downward.
• LIST ORDER
Specifies the order in which
When the NORMAL button
the REVERSE button is lit, th
• NAME DISPLAY
Specifies the content of the
When the NAME ONLY butt
Select GR METER to display
Select ENCODER INFO to d
to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN k
the FULL FUNCTION option
NOTE
• You can now view the gain re
on the channel name display
• In addition, if a channel is off
highlighted.
• The GR meters function ena
Setup
Reference Manual
ministrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
r Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest
DEFINED KEYS page correspond to USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16]
of the function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the
tton. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “---” is
EFINED KEY SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL
will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does
r the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the
unction
n (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you
on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED
g and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
de when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key
as been assigned (the key will light).
wo options: LATCH and UNLATCH.
ate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and
g down the USER DEFINED key.
press of the USER DEFINED key will turn Alternate mode
off. You do not need to hold down the key.
lternate function, the console disables the Alternate function when
en the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
window.
be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area.
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window197
USER DEFINED keys
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the
USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and to press these keys to execute the
defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED key settings for the user. If you
are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED key settings for
the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be
assigned to USER DEFINED keys” (page 199).
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Ad
the USER DEFINED KEYS fo
account.
• The 16 buttons in the USER
on the top panel. The name
right of the corresponding bu
shown.
• The list shown in the USER D
series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display
not exist on that model.
• If there are no parameters fo
key is operated.
Using the Alternate f
If you assign the Alternate functio
will be able to switch parameters
CHANNEL section while pressin
The console enters Alternate mo
to which the Alternate function h
The Alternate function features t
• UNLATCH ..............Altern
holdin
• LATCH ...................Each
on or
NOTE
• If you select LATCH for the A
you switch the display betwe
screen, or when you open a
• In Alternate mode, “ALT” will
GR meter indicator
Highlighted display
- The channel is off in SENDS ON FADER
mode.
- The channel is assigned to a DCA group, and
that DCA [ON] key is off.
- The channel is assigned to a mute group, and
that mute group master is on.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to
assign a function.
5. In the FUNCTION field of the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, select the function
you want to assign.
6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window.
8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[16]
key on the panel.
USER SETUP screen
(USER DEFINED KEYS page)
Setup
Reference Manual
tons on the left to select a bank.
utton on the top right side to clear the content of the selected 198
In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior.
• [GAIN] knob
Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for
HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP window, rotate this
knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp.
• [MIX/MATRIX] knob
Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal.
Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off.
• [HPF] knob
Press this knob to switch the high-pass filter on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 1] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 2] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off.
NOTE
In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs
mentioned above will be disabled.
Switching banks for USER DEFINED key settings
You can register the USER DEFINED key settings (16 keys for CL series consoles) to a
maximum of four banks.
Use the four BANK SELECT but
You can press the CLEAR ALL b
bank.
Setup
Reference Manual
- This function rolls out or retracts the selected
DCA group.-
-
-
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
-
CH 1-16 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH17-32 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH33-48 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH49-64 {CL5/CL3}
CH65-72 {CL5}
ST IN
MIX1-16
MIX17-24
MATRIX
STEREO/MONO
DCA
A1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
A2 {CL5/CL3}
A3 {CL3}
B1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
B2 {CL3/CL1}
B3 {CL1}
B4 {CL1}
C1 {CL5}
C2 {CL5}
C3 {CL5}
C4 {CL5}
C5 {CL5}
C6 {CL5}
-
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
INPUT EQ LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
INPUT CH LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
PEQ LIBRARY
PARAMETER 2 Description199
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
NO ASSIGN - - No assignment.
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
LATCH -
Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is
pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
UNLATCH -
Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while
pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
AUTOMIXER
group a OVERRIDE ON Apply a fade-in to the channels in group a
where the override button is on, until the level
drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all
channels with the button turned off.
group a PRESET ON Switch the channels in group a to the mode
indicated by the mode button (man/auto/
mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
group b OVERRIDE ON Apply a fade-in to the channels in group b
where the override button is on, until the level
drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all
channels with the button turned off.
group b PRESET ON Switch the channels in group b to the mode
indicated by the mode button (man/auto/
mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
group c OVERRIDE ON Apply a fade-in to the channels in group c
where the override button is on, until the level
drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all
channels with the button turned off.
group c PRESET ON Switch the channels in group c to the mode
indicated by the mode button (man/auto/
mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
BRIGHTNESS BANK CHANGE - Toggle between the brightness settings stored in A and B.
CH ON SPECIFIC CH *4) Switch the CH ON/OFF.
CH SELECT
INC
- Increment or decrement the selected channel number.DEC
SPECIFIC CH *1) Select a channel from list 1).
CUE
OUTPUT - Switch CUE on/off.
CLEAR CUE - This clears the CUE.
SPECIFIC CH *2) CUE the channel selected from list 2).
CUE MODE -
This function switches the cue mode. In
Surround mode, it toggles between MIX, LAST,
and 5.1 SOLO with each press. When set to
MIX, the lamp is off. When set to LAST, the lamp
is on. When set to 5.1 SOLO, the lamp flashes.
CUE INTERRUPTION - Switches the CUE INTERRUPTION function on or off.
FADER CUE RELEASE - Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.
DANTE
INPUT
PATCH LIB
DIRECT RECALL LIBRARY #000-#010
Directly recalls the desired number of the
DANTE INPUT PATCH library. However, it does
not function during a scene recall.
DCA ROLL-
OUT
LAST DCA SEL
DCA1
:
DCA16
EDITOR
CONTROL
MASTER
SENDS ON FADER
OVERVIEW
Custom fader bank
Custom fader bank
SELECTED CHANNEL
LIBRARY
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
Setup
Reference Manual
-
Toggle the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is
selected.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
-
Assign the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while
held down.
* However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is
switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE
screen etc., this will remain lit until the next
time it is pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
- Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ EDIT screen.
PORT1-PORT5
Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active.
Make GPI OUT active only while pressed.
-
Opens and closes the HELP window. Operating
the controllers on the panel (excluding faders),
or controllers on the screen, while holding
down this key will display the related
information.
- Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
- Displays the OVERVIEW screen.
-
Each press of the key will alternately display the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the
OVERVIEW screen.
- Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit when ON.
-
For Surround mode, toggle between the
content to be shown in meters displayed in the
Function Access Area. The lamp is off for MIX 16, and on for SURROUND MONITOR.
PGM 1-128
Transmit the corresponding MIDI message.
For NOTE ON, it goes OFF when the bank is
switched.
CC 1-31, 33-95, 102-119
NOTE ON C-2 (0)
:
NOTE ON G 8 (127)
- Switch the monitor output on/off.
-
While holding down this key, press the SEL key
of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the
assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL]
LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding
down this key will be stored. Pressing the key
again will recall the stored setting. Settings can
be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid
assignment switching.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
- Enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
PARAMETER 2 Description200
EDITOR
CONTROL
PREMIUM RACK
LIBRARY
Portico5033 LIBRARY
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
Portico5043 LIBRARY
U76 LIBRARY
Opt-2A LIBRARY
EQ-1A LIBRARY
DynamicEQ LIBRARY
Buss Comp 369 LIBRARY
PATCH EDITOR
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH
OUTPUT INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT PATCH
PATCH LIST
RACK EDITOR
RACK
GEQ 1-16
EFFECT 1-8
PREMIUM 1A
PREMIUM 1B
:
PREMIUM 8A
PREMIUM 8B
METER
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
GROUP/LINK
DCA GROUP
MUTE GROUP
CHANNEL LINK
OUTPUT CHANNEL LINK
SCENE
SCENE MEMORY
RECALL SAFE
Fade time
FOCUS RECALL
EFFECT
BYPASS
EFFECT RACK1-8 -
Turns BYPASS for each RACK on and off. Lit
when ON.
PREMIUM RACK1A -
PREMIUM RACK1B -
: -
PREMIUM RACK8A -
PREMIUM RACK8B -
FADER BANK
SNAPSHOT - -
Takes a snapshot of the bank settings for all A, B,
and C blocks (hold down the key for two
seconds or longer), or displays the last bank for
which a snapshot was taken (press and release
the key within two seconds).
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
GAIN KNOB
FUNCTION
LATCH
UNLATCH
GEQ FREQ
BANK
INC
DEC
GPI OUT
LATCH
UNLATCH
HELP -
HOME
SELECTED CH VIEW
OVERVIEW
TOGGLE
METER
PEAK HOLD ON
SURROUND METER
MIDI
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
NOTE ON
MONITOR
OUTPUT
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIMMER ON
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
Setup
Reference Manual
- Switch the OSC on/off.
-
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of
a channel to switch the assignment on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if
assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
*1) Assign the oscillator to the channel selected from list 1).
-
Memorize the currently-selected screen (hold
down the key for two seconds or longer), or
display the last-memorized screen (Hold down
the key, then release it within two seconds).
Popup windows can also be memorized. In the
case of a rack, the number of that rack is also
memorized.
- Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the addition of the SEL status.
- Display the previous/next page.
- Close the displayed window.
PLAY/PAUSE, STOP,
FF/NEXT,
REW/PREVIOUS, REC
Recorder transport functions.
AUTO REC
Shortcut function for STOP  REC  PLAY.
Recording will be initiated in a single action. If
this is executed during recording, the file being
recorded will first be closed, and then recording
will continue with a new file.
REC & START Start recording immediately without entering record-ready mode.
NO ASSIGN The specified audio file will be played once from
the beginning.
Audio files to be played should be saved in the
SONGS folder inside the YPE folder. Please note
that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the
root directory or in any other folder. When you
execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST
screen will move to \YPE\SONGS\.
(TITLE 1)
:
- Recall the scene of the next existing number.
- Recall the scene of the previous existing number.
SCENE #000-#300 Directly recall the scene of the specified number.
- Execute RECALL UNDO.
- Execute STORE UNDO.
- Select the scene of the next existing number.
- Select the scene of the previous existing number.
- This function recalls the currently-selected scene.
- Store the current settings.
-
If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch the function
of the Selected Channel section's send encoders
from TO MIX1-16, TO MIX17-24, and MATRIX.
PARAMETER 2 Description201
MONITOR
SOURCE SELECT
STEREO L/R
Recall the selected signal to the monitor.
MONO (C)
LCR
PB OUT
OMNI1-2
OMNI3-4
OMNI5-6
OMNI7-8
DEFINE
SURROUND SOURCE
SELECT *6)
Recall the selected signal to the surround
monitor.
SURROUND DOWN-
MIX STEREO MONO
When this function is off (the lamp is off), the
setting returns to 5.1 monitor.
SURROUND SPEAKER
SOLO
When this function is on (the lamp is on), the
SURROUND MONITOR screen opens. When this
function is off (the lamp is off), the SURROUND
MONITOR screen closes.
L, R, C, Ls, Rs, LFE
This functionality is the same as the SPEAKER
MUTE function in the SURROUND MONITOR
screen. When the SOLO button is on, it
functions as a SOLO key.
MUTE
MASTER
MUTE GROUP 1
- Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off.:
MUTE GROUP 8
ALL MUTE - Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on/off together.
NUENDO
LIVE TRANSPORT
GO TO PROJECT START
Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.
GO TO PREV MARKER
REWIND
FAST FORWARD
GO TO NEXT MARKER
NUENDO
LIVE
TRANSPORT
GO TO PROJECT END
Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.
CYCLE
STOP
START
REC
EASY RECORDING
PEAK CLEAR - Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live screen.
ADD MARKER - This function executes ADD MARKER of NUENDO Live.
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
OSCILLATOR
OSCILLATOR ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIRECT ASSIGN
PAGE
CHANGE
BOOKMARK
BOOKMARK with “SEL”
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
CLOSE POPUP
RECORDER
TRANSPORT
DIRECT PLAY
SCENE
INC RECALL
REC RECALL
SCENE
DIRECT RECALL
RECALL UNDO
STORE UNDO
INC
DEC
RECALL
STORE
SEND MODE MIX1-16/MIX17-24, MATRIX
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
Setup
Reference Manual
*5)
In Surround mode, this is used to toggle the
settings for hard panning for the channel
selected in list 5).
With each press, the setting is toggled in the
following order: Center  L  Front Center  R
 Side R  Rs  Back, Ls  Side L  (Center).
LATCH Switch TALKBACK on/off.
UNLATCH Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
-
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of
an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment
on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit
if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding
down this key will be stored. Pressing the key
again will recall the stored setting. Settings can
be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid
assignment switching.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
*3)
The operations performed when this key is
pressed are as follows.
- Toggle assignment of channel selected in list
3) ON and OFF.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned, the LED will be on.
Otherwise, the LED will be off.
*3)
The operations performed when this key is
pressed are as follows.
- Assignments other than for the channel
selected in list 3) are removed.
- If a channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON
at the same time, TALKBACK is turned OFF
and the channel assignment is removed.
- Otherwise, TALKBACK will be ON and the
channel assignment will be ON.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON
at the same time, the LED will be on.
- Otherwise, the LED will be off.
- Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen.
WITH POPUP
Use the tap tempo function for the specified
effect. If WITH POPUP is selected, the Tap
Tempo screen is displayed. If WITHOUT POPUP
is selected, the Tap Tempo screen is not
displayed.
WITHOUT POPUP
PARAMETER 2 Description202
SENDS ON
FADER
MIX1-MIX24
NORMAL/WITH CUE
This function switches between the normal
function on/off (NORMAL), and the function
with cue on/off (WITH CUE). With the WITH
CUE option, cue will be enabled if SENDS ON
FADER mode is engaged or if you switch mode
during SENDS ON FADER mode. Also, with the
WITH CUE option, cue for all output channels
will be canceled if SENDS ON FADER mode is
disengaged.
MTRX 1-MTRX 8
MIX ON FADER
MATRIX ON FADER
SENDS ON FADER
SET BY SEL
+48V
-
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it
on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or
dark if off.
If SET [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON
FADER” mode is engaged while you are holding
down the [SEL] key.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Ø
INSERT ON
DIRECT OUT ON
PRE SEND
TO STEREO
TO MONO
TO LCR
GAIN COMPENSATION
SET DEFAULT
VALUE - -
Press and hold this key, and then press any of
the following knobs on the panel to reset that
knob to its default value: a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section, a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or a knob in
the Centralogic section.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
SET NOMI-
NAL VALUE - -
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key
to set the fader of that channel to nominal level.
You can also push a knob in the SEND field of
the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to set the
send level to nominal level.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
SURROUND
PAN
L ON
*5)
In Surround mode, this is used to switch the bus
assign on and off for the channel selected in list
5).
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
Ls ON
Rs ON
SURROUND
PAN
PANNING L
*5) In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).
PANNING R
PANNING Front Center
PANNING Ls
PANNING Rs
PANNING Back
PANNING Side L
*5) In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).PANNING Side R
PANNING Center
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
SURROUND
PAN PANNING TOGGLE
TALKBACK
TALKBACK ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIRECT ASSIGN
TALKBACK DIRECT ASSIGN WITH ON
TAP TEMPO
CURRENT PAGE
EFFECT RACK1-8
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
Setup
Reference Manual
bs gn the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the
on the top panel, and press these knobs to execute the
u can make USER DEFINED knob settings for the user. If
trator, you can also make the USER DEFINED knob settings
functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be
knobs” (page 204).
, press the SETUP button.
the USER SETUP button.
, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.
ding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to
SETUP window, make sure that the FUNCTION field is
elect the function that you want to assign.
parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
meters 1 and 2 in the same way.
e the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window.
ction, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[4]
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window203
*1) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST
R, MONO
*2) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,
MONO(C)
*3) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
*4) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,
MONO(C), DCA1-DCA16
*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
*6) MIX1-6, EXT5.1 1, EXT5.1 2, EXT5.1 3, EXT ST 1, EXT ST 2, EXT ST 3, EXT ST 4, MIX1/2, MIX3/4, MIX5/6,
MIX7/8, MIX9/10, MIX11/12, MIX13/14, MIX15/16, MIX17/18, MIX19/20, MIX21/22, MIX23/24, MATRIX1/2,
MATRIX3/4, MATRIX5/6, MATRIX7/8, STEREO, MONO, PB OUT
USER DEFINED kno
This section explains how to assi
USER DEFINED KNOBS section
defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, yo
you are logged-in as the Adminis
for the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable
assigned to USER DEFINED
USER
DEFINED
KEYS
BANK SELECT
BANK A When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
BANK B When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
BANK C When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
BANK D When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
PREVIOUS BANK Switches to the previous bank. If the current bank is BANK A, it switches to BANK D.
NEXT BANK Switches to the next bank. If the current bank is BANK D, it switches to BANK A.
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the USER SETUP window
4. Press the button correspon
assign a function.
5. In the USER DEFINED KNOB
enclosed by a frame, then s
6. If the selected function has
the frame, then select para
7. Press the OK button to clos
8. To execute an assigned fun
knob on the panel.
USER SETUP screen
(USER DEFINED KNOBS page)
Setup
Reference Manual
be assigned to USER DEFINED
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
-
*1)
-
-
-
OR -
-
FL TRIM -
M -
PFL TRIM -
EL -
*14)
OLD *2)
*4)
*2)
*4)
*2)N
*13)
OLD
*4)
CY
N
the EFFECT RACK No. (1-8) for
t operation as well as the
the mounted EFFECT TYPE or
e of the GEQ/PEQ TYPE *a).
Displays the names of the 32 parameters for the EFFECT TYPE *b). Displays
“----” if a GEQ/PEQ is mounted.204
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make USER
DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
• The 4 knobs in the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page correspond to
USER DEFINED knobs [1]-[4] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned
to each knob appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button,
an indication of “---” is shown.
• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL
series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” you specify a parameter that does not
exist on that model.
• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED knob, nothing will occur when the
knob is operated.
About TOUCH AND TURN
The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED [4]
knob by default. If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED
knobs, you can press a desired knob in the touch screen and then
immediately use the USER DEFINED knob to operate it.
At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen,
indicating that you can operate that knob.
Functions that can
knobs
Function
NO ASSIGN -
AUTOMIXER WEIGHT
BRIGHTNESS
LAMP
PANEL
SCREEN
CH COL
NAME
CUE
INPUT P
DCA TRI
OUTPUT
CUE LEV
DIRECT OUT LEVEL LEVEL
DYNAMICS1
THRESH
RANGE
RATIO
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RELEASE
OUTGAI
KNEE
WIDTH
DYNAMICS2
THRESH
RATIO
FREQUEN
ATTACK
RELEASE
OUTGAI
KNEE
WIDTH
EFFECT
Displays
the targe
name of
the nam
Setup
Reference Manual
L3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-
L3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
L3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8
L3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24
ST R, MONO
L3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, ST L, ST
, SLOT1 1-SLOT1 16, SLOT2 1-SLOT2 16, SLOT3 1-SLOT3 16, DIGITAL
1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48
isplayed.
played.
AIN -
GAIN -
-
IX24 *3)
-MATRIX8 *7)
MIX15/16 *3)
/2-MATRIX7/8 *7)
*5)
-
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2205
*1) SELECTED CH, Automixer ch1-16
*2) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, C
MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
*3) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, C
*4) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, C
*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, C
*6) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L,
*7) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, C
R, MONO
*10) # 1-# 6
*11) REMOTE HA #1-#8
*12) DANTE 1-DANTE64, OMNI 1-OMNI 8
OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R
*13) SELECTED CH, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX
*14) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL
*a) If not mounted in the RACK, “----” is d
*b) If there are no parameters, “----” is dis
EQ
ATT
*2)
LOW Q
LOW FREQUENCY
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQUENCY
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQUENCY
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQUENCY
HIGH GAIN
EXTERNAL HA GAIN1-GAIN8 *10)
HPF FREQUENCY *4)
I/O DEVICE GAIN1-GAIN32 *11)
INPUT DELAY DELAY TIME *3)
INPUT GAIN
ANALOG GAIN
*4)
DIGITAL GAIN
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE
CTRL 1-CTRL 31 -
CTRL 33-CTRL 95 -
CTRL 102-CTRL 119 -
MONITOR
DIMMER LEVEL -
TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL -
MONITOR DELAY -
MONITOR FADER -
OSCILLATOR
LEVEL -
FREQUENCY -
LEVEL(EVEN) -
FREQUENCY(EVEN) -
HPF -
LPF -
WIDTH -
INTERVAL -
OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL *6)
OUTPUT PORT
DELAY TIME
*12)
GAIN
PREMIUM RACK
Displays the PREMIUM RACK No. (1A8B) for the corresponding operation, as
well as the name of the mounted PROCESSOR *a).
Displays the names of the 64 parameters for the PROCESSOR *b).
Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
RECORDER
INPUT G
OUTPUT
SCENE SELECT
TO MIX LEVEL MIX1-M
TO MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX1
TO MIX PAN MIX1/2-
TO MATRIX PAN MATRIX1
TO ST/MONO
PAN/BAL
CSR
TOUCH AND TURN -
Function
Setup
Reference Manual
one [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key, so the function
obs will change simultaneously. On the CL5,
tion in block A (left side) and block C/Master
pendently by using the corresponding [GAIN/
ply to the multifunction knobs in the
ese knobs are used to control on-screen 206
Assignable encoders
You can assign the desired function to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each
channel, and control the function using the knob. For details on the assignable functions and
their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders”
(page 207).
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make
assignable knob settings for the Guest account.
• SELECTED SEND is the default setting. If SELECTED SEND is selected, you can use the
assignable encoders to adjust the send level to the MIX/MATRIX channel that is selected for
SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area.
• The CL3 and CL1 have only
of all GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN kn
you can switch the knob func
fader section (right side) inde
PAN/ASSIGN] keys.
• This assignment does not ap
Centralogic section, since th
parameters.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.
4. Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field on the USER DEFINED KNOB
page.
5. In the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window, select the function you want to
assign.
6. Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window.
7. Press the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key on the top panel repeatedly to select ASSIGN.
8. Operate the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on each channel strip.
USER SETUP screen
(USER DEFINED KNOBS and
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page)
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER
SETUP window
Setup
Reference Manual
e ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or
t of Sends On Fader will be selected.
will determine whether turning the encoder will switch the PRE/POST
will switch the corresponding send on/off when pressed.
rmine whether pressing the encoder will switch the high-pass filter on/off.
will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 1 on/off.
will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 2 on/off.
will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to F/R.
will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to L/R.
8 SEND MTRX8 *3
QUENCY HPF *4
ICS1 THRESHOLD THRE1 *5
ICS2 THRESHOLD THRE2 *6
L GAIN D.GAIN
ATT
DELAY DELAY
Units of scale
are m, ms, ft,
and fr. No
description for
samples.
OUT LEVEL D.OUT
UND L-R PAN L/R *7
UND F-R PAN F/R *8
UND ROUND PAN L/R and F/R
UND DIV DIV
UND LFE LFE
Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2207
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable
encoders
*1 Preference setting and the state of th
digital gain.
*2 The send destination that is the targe
*3 The state of the ALTERNATE function
setting of the corresponding send or
*4 The state of the ALT function will dete
*5 The state of the ALTERNATE function
*6 The state of the ALTERNATE function
*7 The state of the ALTERNATE function
*8 The state of the ALTERNATE function
PAN GAIN ASSIGN Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
O PAN/BALANCE
PAN
BAL
O ANALOG GAIN A.GAIN *1
O DIGITAL GAIN D.GAIN *1
O NO ASSIGN (Nothing will be displayed.)
O SELECTED SEND
MIX1-MTRX8
Depends on
status
*2
O MIX1 SEND MIX1 *3
O MIX2 SEND MIX2 *3
O MIX3 SEND MIX3 *3
O MIX4 SEND MIX4 *3
O MIX5 SEND MIX5 *3
O MIX6 SEND MIX6 *3
O MIX7 SEND MIX7 *3
O MIX8 SEND MIX8 *3
O MIX9 SEND MIX9 *3
O MIX10 SEND MIX10 *3
O MIX11 SEND MIX11 *3
O MIX12 SEND MIX12 *3
O MIX13 SEND MIX13 *3
O MIX14 SEND MIX14 *3
O MIX15 SEND MIX15 *3
O MIX16 SEND MIX16 *3
O MIX17 SEND MIX17 *3
O MIX18 SEND MIX18 *3
O MIX19 SEND MIX19 *3
O MIX20 SEND MIX20 *3
O MIX21 SEND MIX21 *3
O MIX22 SEND MIX22 *3
O MIX23 SEND MIX23 *3
O MIX24 SEND MIX24 *3
O MATRIX1 SEND MTRX1 *3
O MATRIX2 SEND MTRX2 *3
O MATRIX3 SEND MTRX3 *3
O MATRIX4 SEND MTRX4 *3
O MATRIX5 SEND MTRX5 *3
O MATRIX6 SEND MTRX6 *3
O MATRIX7 SEND MTRX7 *3
O MATRIX
O HPF FRE
O DYNAM
O DYNAM
O DIGITA
O EQ ATT
O INPUT
O DIRECT
O SURRO
O SURRO
O SURRO
O SURRO
O SURRO
PAN GAIN ASSIGN
Setup
Reference Manual
k outed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.”
nel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader
us combinations of channels, regardless of channel types.
up a custom fader bank.
ministrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank
nt.
assign select buttons to assign channels to faders.
, press the SETUP button.
the USER SETUP button.
, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.
recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels
tom fader bank.
K/MASTER FADER page, press the bank select button for
want to set up.
e select button for the fader you want to set up.
panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected
faders, repeat steps 5 through 7.
OM
page)208
GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder)
functions
In CL V1.7 and later, the following functions have been added to SENDS ON FADER mode.
When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select
ASSIGN
Use assignable encoders to adjust the level of channels.
Channel name display indication
When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select
PAN
Use assignable encoders to adjust PAN sent from channels to the MIX/MATRIX bus (bus set
for Stereo send in the BUS SETUP screen).
Channel name display indication
Custom fader ban
Groups that organize channels r
There are input and output chan
banks enable you to select vario
This section explains how to set
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Ad
the CUSTOM FADER BANK
settings for the Guest accou
• You can also press the fader
Channel levels
Adjust with assignable encoder.
Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus
Adjust with the fader on the top panel.
PAN sent from channel to MIX/MATRIX bus
Adjust with assignable encoder.
Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus
Adjust with the fader on the top panel.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the USER SETUP window
4. Use the Bank Select keys to
you want to add to the cus
5. In the CUSTOM FADER BAN
the custom fader bank you
6. In the FADER field, press th
7. Press a [SEL] key on the top
in step 6.
8. To assign channels to other
USER SETUP window (CUST
FADER BANK/MASTER FADER
Setup
Reference Manual
ss this button to select it, then press [SEL] keys on the top
ding channels to the selected fader bank.
n ct window, in which you can change the channel assigned
bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a
ess OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to
n without changing the setting.
ll be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section.
ministrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access
/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make master fader settings
, press the SETUP button.
the USER SETUP button.
, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.
K/MASTER FADER page, press the MASTER button.
e number button for the fader you want to set up.
panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected
OM
page)209
USER SETUP screen
(CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page)
CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER field
1 Bank select buttons
Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of
channels.
The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console
model.
CL5: A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
CL3: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2
CL1: A1, B1, B2, B3, B4
2 MASTER button
Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader
section.
3 Block indicators
Display the graphics of the top panel block and faders that are the current target for
editing.
The graphics vary depending on the console model.
CL5: A (16 faders), B, C, MASTER
CL3: A (16 faders), B, MASTER
CL1: A (8 faders), B, MASTER
FADER field
4 Fader select button
Selects the target fader. Pre
panel to add the correspon
5 Fader assign select butto
Opens the Fader assign sele
to the fader.
6 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all the current fader
confirmation dialog box. Pr
return to the previous scree
Master fader
You can set the channels that wi
NOTE
If you are logged-in as the Ad
the CUSTOM FADER BANK
for the Guest account.
1
2
6
4
3
5
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the USER SETUP window
4. In the CUSTOM FADER BAN
5. In the FADER field, press th
6. Press a [SEL] key on the top
in step 5.
USER SETUP window (CUST
FADER BANK/MASTER FADER
Setup
Reference Manual
ole operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This
panel, so that controllers cannot be operated by an
orized third party while the operator is taking a break.
tly logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console
Lock function is enabled, the CONSOLE LOCK screen will
ing the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will become inoperable.
sword, refer to “Initializing the unit to factory default settings”
word.
ked, control from an external device via MIDI or CL Editor will still
, press the SETUP button.
the CONSOLE LOCK button.
r for whom a password is set, enter the password for the
ble Console Lock function.210
Custom fader bank functions
Custom fader bank settings can be stored/recalled for individual scenes.
Custom fader bank settings are stored in scene data in separate regions for each model.
NOTE
Custom fader bank settings differ between models, and are not compatible. For example, custom
fader bank settings included in scenes stored in CL5 cannot be reproduced if that same scene is
recalled in CL3 or CL1. You must create and store custom fader bank settings in CL3 and CL1.
Precautions for when Loading Console Data
In V2.0 and later, custom fader bank settings are not only included in user settings, but in
scene data as well. The custom fader bank settings that are called up vary depending on the
logged-in user, the type of the loaded data, and the version. Please note the following points:
• If you load console data of the ALL type as Administrator, the custom fader bank settings
for the saved Administrator are called up.
If you load ALL data as Guest or another user, the custom fader bank settings for the saved
current scene are called up.
• If you load ALL data that was saved in CL V1.70 or earlier, since scenes do not include
custom fader bank settings, the custom fader bank settings for the current scene when the
load was performed are applied to all scenes. Therefore, before loading ALL data, we
recommend that you either change users to set the custom fader bank to the desired
setting, or that you enable Recall Safe for the custom fader bank.
Console Lock
You can temporarily prohibit cons
setting disables operations of the
accidental touch or by an unauth
If a password is set for the curren
Lock function. When the Console
appear and all controllers (exclud
NOTE
• If you have forgotten the pas
(page 245).
• The Guest cannot set a pass
• Even while the console is loc
operate as usual.
Locking the console
CL5
CL5 console
Recall Store Recall Store Recall Store
CL3 CL1
CL3 console CL1 console
Custom fader bank settings
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. If you are logged-in as a use
user.
4. Press the OK button to ena
Setup
Reference Manual
g setup data to and from a USB
-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to
the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL
drive or load them from the USB flash drive.
n in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved,
his time, do not disconnect the USB port or power-off the CL unit.
ata in the flash drive.
for USB flash drives.
rives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this
tee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32
B flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in
e with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
, press the SETUP button.
the SAVE/LOAD button.211
Unlocking the console
NOTE
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked when
you touch the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image
If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the
CONSOLE LOCK screen.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it
from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to
“Loading a file from a USB flash drive” (page 214).
NOTE
Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be
converted into 16-bit for display.
Saving and loadin
flash drive
You can connect a commercially
the right of the display, and save
series console to the USB flash
CAUTION
An ACCESS indicator is show
loaded, or deleted). During t
Doing so may damage the d
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only
• The operation of USB flash d
does not necessarily guaran
formats are supported. A US
FAT32, and a USB flash driv
Basic operation
STEP
1. Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
2. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the
user, then press the OK button.
SETUP screen
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. Save/load/edit the data.
SETUP screen
Setup
Reference Manual
owing items. When you press an item name, it will turn
orted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the
between ascending and descending order.
dicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon
dicating its type.
e comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed
re. You can press this area to open a keyboard window,
lowing you to enter a comment for the file.
lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding
is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable
e protect setting.
otected files cannot be overwritten.
dicates the file type.
File containing CL internal settings
User authentication key
Help file
Bitmap image file
MP3 file
Directory
displayed in this field.
dicates the date and time at which the file was modified most
cently.
You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob.
internal settings together (page 213).
g file (page 214).
n n key (page 189).
e. occurred at the USB port, this button will become a USB
is button to remount a USB flash drive (page 217).
I/O RACK button
P and I/O device settings as well as word clock settings will
file is loaded.
SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even
AND I/O RACK” button is on. 212
SAVE/LOAD window
The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved.
1 COPY button
Copies a file into a memory buffer (a temporary holding area).
2 PASTE button
Pastes the file that has been copied into a buffer memory.
3 DELETE button
Deletes the currently selected file.
NOTE
A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear.
4 MAKE DIR button
Creates a new directory.
5 PATH
Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next
higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed.
6 VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE
Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive. If the
USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME
field.
7 File list
This area lists the files and sub-directories that are saved on the USB flash drive. The
highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations.
The file list contains the foll
orange, and the list will be s
sorting order will alternate
• FILE NAME................. In
in • COMMENT .................Th
he al • READ ONLY ...............A
file
th Pr • TYPE........................... In
ALL:
KEY:
XML:
BMP:
MP3:
[DIR]:
NOTE
The file format version will be
• TIME STAMP .............. In
re 8 File selection knob
Selects a file on the file list.
9 SAVE button
Saves all of the CL console
0 LOAD button
Loads the selected CL settin
A CREATE USER KEY butto
Creates a user authenticatio
B FORMAT button
Initializes the USB flash driv
If an overcurrent condition
REMOUNT button. Press th
C WITH DANTE SETUP AND
If this is off, the DANTE SETU
be omitted when a settings
NOTE
The DANTE SETUP settings
if the “WITH DANTE SETUP
1 2 3 45 6
7
8 9 0 A BC
Setup
Reference Manual
o be saved. The view of the TYPE field will vary depending
ems.
emories.
items that you can select.
items that you can select.
items that you can select.
Data content
ut channel library
tput channel library
ut EQ library
tput EQ library
namics library
Data content
fect library
Q library
and PEQ library
Data content
rtico 5033 library
rtico 5043 library
6 library
t-2A library
-1A library
namicEQ library
ss Comp 369 library213
Saving the CL console's internal data on a USB flash drive
All of the CL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file.
The saved file will have an extension of “.CLF”.
SAVE SELECT screen
1 TYPE field
Specifies the types of data t
on the tab you select.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the it
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene m
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the
STEP
1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the SAVE button.
2. In the SAVE SELECT screen, select the data to be saved, the data type, and the save
destination.
3. In the SAVE SELECT screen, press the SAVE button.
4. Enter a file name and comment.
5. Press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation.
1
47654
2 3
Button
IN CH LIB Inp
OUT CH LIB Ou
IN EQ LIB Inp
OUT EQ LIB Ou
DYNA LIB Dy
Button
EFFECT LIB Ef
GEQ LIB GE
8PEQ LIB 8B
Button
5033 LIB Po
5043 LIB Po
U76 LIB U7
Opt-2A LIB Op
EQ-1A LIB EQ
DynaEQ LIB Dy
BussComp LIB Bu
Setup
Reference Manual
USB flash drive
L settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into
to load the following files as well as settings files.
ngs that will cause the console to output signals immediately after
u load, turn off the power of the equipment connected to the CL
the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem
the CL console.
ing loaded, the window that shows the progress of the loading
ta will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data
ill still be loaded.
e loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load
Contents of file
console internal setting file
console user authentication key
L file for displaying Help
t file for displaying Help
ge file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more
rs, uncompressed bitmap format)
ant to load, press the name of the desired file in the file
ow, or rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
UP and I/O device-related settings saved in the CL
nsion .CLF) and the word clock settings to be applied to
ITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on.
, press the LOAD button.
, select the data to load, the data type, and the load
oad the selected file.214
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
NOTE
When the output port items are saved individually, channel assignments for the port will not be
saved. To prevent this, save the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel
assignment as well.
2 SOURCE field
Indicates the internal data of the CL series console.
3 DESTINATION field
Indicates the save destination.
4 Data selection knob
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
5 MULTI SELECT button
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
6 SELECT ALL button
Press this button to select all items.
7 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
NOTE
• To select a different directory as a save destination, in the SAVE/LOAD window, press a directory
icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field.
• If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog
will ask you to confirm the overwrite.
• You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
• You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name,
and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you may be unable
to save the file, depending on the length of the file name. If this error indication appears at the
bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again.
Loading a file from a
Follow the steps below to load a C
the CL series console.
You can use the same procedure
CAUTION
Some data may contain setti
the data is loaded. Before yo
series console and/or lower
even if a signal is output from
NOTE
• When the file has finished be
operation and the type of da
up to the cancellation point w
• Some setting data may not b
operation.
Button Data content
MIXER SETUP Mixer setup
OUTPUT PORT Output port
MONITOR CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
MIDI SETUP MIDI setup
MIDI PGM MIDI program changes
MIDI CTL MIDI control changes
Dante In Patch Dante input patch library
Extension Type
.CLF ALL CL
.CLU KEY CL
.XML XML XM
.TXT TEXT Tex
.BMP BMP
Ima
colo
STEP
1. To select the file that you w
list in the SAVE/LOAD wind
2. If you want the DANTE SET
settings file (file name exte
the CL console, press the W
3. In the SAVE/LOAD window
4. In the LOAD SELECT screen
destination.
5. Press the LOAD button to l
Setup
Reference Manual
items that you can select.
items that you can select.
items that you can select.
re loaded individually, channel assignments for the port will not be
and then recall the scene that contains input/output patching for the
Data content
fect library
Q library
and PEQ library
Data content
rtico 5033 library
rtico 5043 library
6 library
t-2A library
-1A library
namicEQ library
ss Comp 369 library
Data content
xer setup
tput port
E/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
DI setup
DI program changes
DI control changes
nte input patch library215
LOAD SELECT screen
1 TYPE field
Indicates the type of data to be loaded. The view will vary depending on the tab you
select.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the items.
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene memories.
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the
NOTE
When the output port items a
applied. To prevent this, load
channel assignment.Button Data content
IN CH LIB Input channel library
OUT CH LIB Output channel library
IN EQ LIB Input EQ library
OUT EQ LIB Output EQ library
DYNA LIB Dynamics library
1
47654
2 3
Button
EFFECT LIB Ef
GEQ LIB GE
8PEQ LIB 8B
Button
5033 LIB Po
5043 LIB Po
U76 LIB U7
Opt-2A LIB Op
EQ-1A LIB EQ
DynaEQ LIB Dy
BussComp LIB Bu
Button
MIXER SETUP Mi
OUTPUT PORT Ou
MONITOR CU
MIDI SETUP MI
MIDI PGM MI
MIDI CTL MI
Dante In Patch Da
Setup
Reference Manual
d on the USB flash drive
editing operations such as sorting the files and directories
e file names or comments, copying, and pasting.
headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,”
top of each column on the SAVE/LOAD window. The list will
o the column heading you press.
habetical order of the file names.
habetical order of the comment.
t on/off status.
e of update.
n again, you can change the direction (ascending order or
he list is sorted.
ments
or comment of a write-protected file.
, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each
nt in the keyboard window, and press the RENAME
2 3 4 5216
• ADMIN tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
2 SOURCE field
This area lists the data that is saved on the USB flash drive.
3 DESTINATION field
Indicates the load destination.
4 Data selection knob
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
5 MULTI SELECT button
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
6 SELECT ALL button
Press this button to select all items.
7 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
Editing the files save
Follow the steps below to perform
on the USB flash drive, editing th
Sorting files
To sort the files, press one of the
“TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the
be sorted as follows, according t
1 FILE NAME
Sort the list in numerical/alp
2 COMMENT
Sort the list in numerical/alp
3 READ ONLY
Sort the list by Write Protec
4 TYPE
Sort the list by file type.
5 TIME STAMP
Sort the list by date and tim
NOTE
By pressing the same locatio
descending order) in which t
Editing file names/com
NOTE
You cannot edit the file name
Type Data content
ADMIN PREF PREFERENCE (for the Administrator)
ADMIN UDEF
USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the
Administrator)
ADMIN FADER CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Administrator)
GUEST PREF PREFERENCE (for the Guest)
GUEST UDEF USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the Guest)
GUEST FADER CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Guest)
GUEST LEVEL USER LEVEL (for the Guest)
STEP
1. In the SAVE/LOAD window
file.
2. Enter a file name or comme
button or SET button.
1
Setup
Reference Manual
flash drive
a USB flash drive.
of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash
maller will be formatted in FAT16.
, press the SETUP button.
the SAVE/LOAD button.
, press the FORMAT button.
press the FORMAT button.
ration, press the OK button.217
Copying and pasting a file
Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a
different file name.
NOTE
You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.
Deleting a file
NOTE
You cannot delete a protected file.
Creating a directory
NOTE
You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.
Formatting a USB
Follow the steps below to format
A USB flash drive with a capacity
drive with a capacity of 2GB or sSTEP
1. Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY
button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field to move to the
directory into which you want to paste the file.
3. Press the PASTE button.
4. Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button.
STEP
1. Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE
button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2. To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button.
STEP
1. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field in the SAVE/
LOAD window to change the directory.
2. Press the MAKE DIR button.
3. Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SETUP screen, press
3. In the SAVE/LOAD window
4. Enter a volume name, and
5. To execute the Format ope
SAVE/LOAD window
Setup
Reference Manual
ot settings
hat provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal
digital audio signals between devices, those devices must
rd clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an
ay not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may
he sampling rates are the same.
which device will transmit the reference word clock for the
ster), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock
to the word clock master.
nsole as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word
evice, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the
k is obtained).
ct the clock source that the CL series console will use.
, press the SETUP button.
of the SETUP screen, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT
CT field of the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window,
d in the upper right to close the window.
WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window218
Recovering after overcurrent at the USB port
Even if the connection with the USB device was stopped because an overcurrent condition
occurred at the USB port, it is possible to use the USB device again without turning the
console power off and back on.
Recovery procedure
After removing the cause of the overcurrent at the USB port, press the location that shows
“USB REMOUNT” at the FORMAT button of the SAVE/LOAD window.
Word clock and sl
“Word clock” refers to the clock t
processing. To send and receive
be synchronized to the same wo
unsynchronized state, the data m
be present in the signal, even if t
Specifically, you must first decide
entire system (the word clock ma
slaves) so that they synchronize
If you wish to use the CL series co
clock supplied from an external d
port through which the word cloc
This section explains how to sele
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field
SETUP button.
3. In the MASTER CLOCK SELE
select a clock source.
4. Press the “x” symbol locate
SETUP screen
Setup
Reference Manual
m the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be
ou initialize the console to factory settings, the default value for the
8k. This allows you to synchronize word clock even when using
at their default settings.
a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as
k can be selected in pairs for each slot.
s as a master or a slave in the Dante audio network.
is displayed and the specified word clock is not synchronized
nte master, the audio might cut out.
ronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each
:
ronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an
d to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is
that device and the CL series console. If the sampling
s may be displayed even if not synchronized.
ED (yellow)
but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an
d to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot
t device and the CL series console.
pplies only to SLOT1-3. It indicates that SCR (Sample Rate
e corresponding channel. This means that even if the signal
l input/output with the CL series console is occurring.
put. If an external device is connected to the corresponding
nnot occur correctly between that device and the CL series 219
WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window
MASTER CLOCK SELECT field
1 Master clock frequency display
Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If
the unit is not synching to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.
NOTE
• If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante
Controller application, this area indicates the change in the
sample rate as a percentage, such as -4.0%, -0.1%, +0.1%, and
+4.1667%.
• To change the master clock when sample rate pull-up/down has been specified, disable the pullup/down in the Dante Controller, change the master clock, then specify pull-up/down again.
2 Master clock select buttons
Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master
from the following options:
• INT 48 k
• INT 44.1 k
The CL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock
source.
• WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console
will be used as the clock source.
• DANTE 48 k
• DANTE 44.1 k
The word clock supplied fro
used as the clock source.
NOTE
With CL V2.03 and later, if y
word clock is set to DANTE 4
multiple CL and QL consoles
• SLOT 1-3
The word clock supplied via
the clock source. Word cloc
3 Clock status Indicator
Indicates the console's statu
NOTE
When
with a device acting as a Da
4 Clock status display
Indicates the status of synch
indicator is explained below
• LOCKED (light blue)
Indicates that a clock synch
external device is connecte
occurring properly between
frequency is close, this statu
• LOCKED, BUT NOT SYNC'
A valid clock is being input,
external device is connecte
occur correctly between tha
• SRC ON (green)
This is a special status that a
Converter) is enabled for th
is not synchronized, norma
• UNLOCKED (red)
A valid clock is not being in
connector, input/output ca
console.
3
1
5
2
4
7
6
8
Master
Slave
Setup
Reference Manual
nections
s, or a CL console and an external mixing console (such as
onnection enables buses to be shared among the devices.
nt to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
nnections and operation, using an example in which two CL
configuration.
ctions
les, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate
rts of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports
master).
n example in which three eight-channel digital I/O cards for
cade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit. The
g unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving
r buses chosen from MIX bus 1-24, MATRIX bus 1-8,
us, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals
ster CL unit. (If you use three 16-ch digital I/O cards, all
devices.) When the required settings are made for the
de master, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent
scade master, and the combined signals of both buses will
ter. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified
s performed on either CL series console will be followed by
ts for each slot or channel on each CL unit. The procedure
cascade slave and the cascade master.
CL B
DIGITAL
IN
Audio signals of
A + B
(Cascade master)220
• UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is
connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this
connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is
established.
NOTE
• If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device
is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your
speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock
setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will
appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
SLOT SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the
console.
5 Card name
Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.
6 SRC buttons
The SCR (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which
an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of
card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear.
7 FREQUENCY display
Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the
substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed,
or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
8 EMPHASIS STATUS display
Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the
substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed,
or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
Using cascade con
Using multiple CL series console
a Yamaha PM5D) in a cascade c
This can be convenient if you wa
This section explains cascade co
units are connected in a cascade
About cascade conne
To cascade two CL series conso
slots, and connect the output po
of the receiving unit (the cascade
The following illustration shows a
each unit are installed in the cas
DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sendin
unit.
In this example, up to twenty fou
STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) b
transmitted from the cascade ma
buses can be shared among the
cascade slave and for the casca
via the slot to the buses of the ca
be output from the cascade mas
operations or parameter change
the other CL console.
You must specify bus assignmen
below is given separately for the
CL A
DIGITAL
OUT
Audio signals of
unit A
Digital I/O card
(Cascade slave)
Setup
Reference Manual
SCADE OUT PATCH page)
t port that will output each bus.
CADE OUT PATCH section)
tput port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1-24,
ONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the
hich you can select a port.
ttons
ions or scene store/recall operations will be linked on the CL
connection.
ted parameters and events will be linked.
e UE or LAST CUE)
for input channels and output channels
s and events (including cue-related parameters) will be
eters and events (see above)
tions
tions
3
1
2
221
NOTE
• In Surround mode, you cannot use cascade output on MIX buses1-6. In addition, if you have
selected 5.1 SOLO in CUE mode, you cannot monitor CUE from the cascade slave at the
cascade master.
• If you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D, you can use the CL
unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D's CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However,
only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.
• You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at
the cascade slave will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master.
Operations on a cascade slave CL unit
NOTE
• You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a
signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled.
• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select
a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask
whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
CASCADE window (CA
You can select the slot and outpu
1 OUT PATCH buttons (CAS
Enable you to select the ou
MATRIX 1-8, STEREO L/R, M
PORT SELECT window, in w
2 CASCADE LINK MODE bu
Specify whether cue operat
series consoles in a cascade
• OFF
No link operation
• CUE
The following cue-rela
• Cue enable/disabl
• Cue mode (MIX C
• Cue point settings
• ALL
All linkable parameter
linked.
• Cue-related param
• Scene recall opera
• Scene store opera
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
3. In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab.
4. In the CASCADE OUT PATCH page, press the OUT PATCH button for the bus to which
you want to assign the port.
5. Use the slot select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and output ports
that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button.
6. In the CASCADE COMM PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive
control signals for cascade link.
7. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
4
Setup
Reference Manual
scade master CL unit
ut port to two or more buses.
e link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select
d for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask
e existing settings.
, press the SETUP button.
of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
ress the CASCADE IN PATCH tab.
age, press the IN PATCH button for the bus to which you
, use the slot select list and the port select buttons to
rts that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE
perations on a cascade slave CL unit” (page 221), in the
select the port that will transmit and receive control
perations on a cascade slave CL unit” (page 221), in the
, select the same item as the cascade slave.222
• DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations
• Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP screen) operations
• Master mute group operations
3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons
Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information
when cue operations or scene store/recall operations are linked on the CL series consoles
in a cascade connection.
• NONE.....................No link operation
• MIDI........................Use MIDI port
• SLOT1 ....................Use SLOT1
4 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
PORT SELECT window
Press the OUT PATCH button to open this window.
1 Slot select list
This list selects slots 1-3.
2 Port select buttons
These buttons select the port of the specified slot.
Operations on the ca
NOTE
• You can assign the same inp
• Control signals for the cascad
a port that is already specifie
whether it is OK to cancel th
2
1
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field
3. In the CASCADE window, p
4. In the CASCADE IN PATCH p
want to assign the port.
5. In the PORT SELECT screen
select the slot and input po
button.
6. As described in step 6 of “O
CASCADE LINK PORT field,
signals for cascade link.
7. As described in step 7 of “O
CASCADE COMM LINK field
Setup
Reference Manual
r MIX buses and MATRIX buses.
ons
essed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO
(monaural signal x 2).
t buttons (MIX bus only)
ses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send
pond to the following parameters.
(MATRIX bus only)
int from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the
Bus type Pre-fader send point
Immediately before the EQ
Immediately before the fader
---
Pre-fader send point
diately before the EQ
diately before the fader
4 1 43
5
MIX BUS 17-24/MATRIX BUS page223
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
Follow the steps below to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such
as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the
signal of an input channel will be sent. The settings you make in the following procedure are
saved as part of the scene.
BUS SETUP window
You can make various settings fo
1 SIGNAL TYPE switch butt
Select how signals are proc
(stereo signal) or MONOx2
2 Bus type/send point selec
For every adjacent pair of bu
point. These buttons corres
3 Send point select buttons
Select the pre-fader send po
following parameters.
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button.
3. Use the tabs in the BUS SETUP window to select the MIX bus or MATRIX bus.
4. Use the SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons to specify whether each bus will function as
STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).
5. Use the bus type/send point select buttons to select the bus type and the position
from which the signal of the input channel will be sent.
6. As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off.
SETUP screen BUS SETUP window Button
VARI [PRE EQ] VARI
VARI [PRE FADER] VARI
FIXED FIXED
Button
PRE EQ Imme
PRE FADER Imme
1 2
5
MIX 1-16 page
Setup
Reference Manual
htness of the touch screen,
e displays, and lamps
the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel
cted to the rear panel LAMP connectors. You can save two
nk A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired.
ameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch
ss setting field)
ess settings.
haracters of the channel name displays on the top panel.
e channel name displays on the top panel.
COLOR brightness. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR
name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob.
e channel colors on the top panel.
e adjustment to only the channel color brightness without
e display brightness.
, press the SETUP button.
ight of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the
to adjust the brightness of each item.
5 6 7224
4 PAN LINK button
This button appears if SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and VARI is set. If the button is on,
the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will
link with the STEREO bus pan setting.
5 Tabs
Enable you to switch between the MIX and MATRIX buses.
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off
NOTE
This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs (I/
O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.
Specifying the brig
LEDs, channel nam
Follow the steps below to specify
name displays, and lamps conne
different brightness settings in ba
NOTE
You can also assign this par
between banks A and B.
SETUP screen (brightne
1 BANK A/B buttons
Switch between the brightn
CONTRAST field
2 NAME
Adjusts the contrast of the c
BRIGHTNESS field
3 NAME
Adjusts the brightness of th
This will also change the CH
brightness after setting the
4 CH COLOR
Adjusts the brightness of th
This lets you apply a relativ
changing the channel nam
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V MASTER field's ON button or OFF
button.
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an
OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on.
SETUP screen
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. In the field located in the r
BANK A or BANK B button.
3. Use the multifunction knob
1 2 3 4
Setup
Reference Manual
h the date and time of the internal clock are displayed.
owing display formats.
/Year)
/Year)
/Day)
e range of 0-23)
0am-11am, and 0pm-11pm)
rk address
the network address that will be required when you use the
series console to connect it to a computer.
es console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we
owing default values.
.168.0.128
.168.0.1
.255.255.0
d Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other
hange network settings.
d to connecting to a LAN, refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide.
, press the SETUP button.
at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
RK screen to select it, and use the multifunction knobs in
pecify the address.
king settings, press the OK button.
le.225
5 SCREEN
This knob adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
If you have set the brightness to lower than level 2, the CL will start up next time with
a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen.
6 PANEL
Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the optional MBCL meter bridge is
installed on the CL3/CL1, this knob setting will also affect the LEDs on the meter bridge.
NOTE
If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR's LEDs will also change.
7 LAMP
This knob adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL console’s internal clock, and how
to select the date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the
time stamp used when saving a scene.
DATE/TIME window
Press the DATE/TIME button in the SETUP screen to open this window.
1 DATE
This field specifies the date of the internal clock.
2 TIME
This field specifies the time of the internal clock.
3 FORMAT (Display format)
Specifies the format in whic
You can select from the foll
• Date
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day
DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month
YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month
• Time
24-Hour (hours shown in th
12-Hour (hours shown from
Setting the netwo
This section explains how to set
NETWORK connector on the CL
If you plan to connect the CL seri
recommend that you use the foll
IP Address: 192
Gateway address: 192
Subnet mask: 255
Make sure that the IP address an
device on the network.
NOTE
• Only the Administrator can c
• For details on settings relate
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the DATE/TIME button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
3. In the FORMAT field of the DATE/TIME window, press the MODE buttons several
times to select the desired format for date and time display.
4. Use multifunction knobs 1-6 in the Centralogic section to specify the current date
and time.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
1 2 3
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area
2. Press the NETWORK button
3. Press a knob in the NETWO
the Centralogic section to s
4. When you have finished ma
5. Restart the CL series conso
Setup
Reference Manual
(SETUP page)
f the CL series console and the Dante network.
ns consoles.
connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to
OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID.
t buttons
io network is configured.
DANTE SETUP window
1
3
7
5
6
226
NETWORK window
1 IP ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network.
2 GATEWAY ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between
different media or protocols to allow communication within the network.
3 SUBNET MASK
Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the
network address that distinguishes the network.
4 MAC ADDRESS
Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a
network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited.
NOTE
The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX
(transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps).
Dante audio network settings
You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself
and the I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console. This section
explains how to make Dante audio network settings.
DANTE SETUP window
1 STATUS indicators
Show the operating status o
2 CONSOLE ID select butto
Set the IDs for the CL series
If five or more CL units are
some of the units, press the
3 SECONDARY PORT selec
Specify how the Dante aud
STEP
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to
open the DANTE SETUP window.
3. Press the SETUP tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
1
2
3
4
SETUP screen
4
2
9
8
Setup
Reference Manual
pplied to the device if the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF)
conditions. Otherwise, the information is not applied and the current
(page 211), the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is
NSOLE ID select button is on.
n of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons is on.
n settings are initialized, including Dante audio network settings, or
d, the Preferred Master setting is turned on. This setting is not
gs are changed or when the console is restarted. It can be turned
, if necessary. If this default setting is used to change CL or QL word
her than Dante, that console is given priority as the clock master for
clock synchronization errors. Further, you can use Dante Controller
by turning on only Preferred Master for the device that will always be
ces).227
4 CANCEL button
When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button
to cancel the changes you made.
5 APPLY button
After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to
apply the changes you made.
6 BIT select buttons
Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit.
• 24bit................... Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an R series
unit. When using a CL series system, you will normally use this
setting.
• 32bit................... This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data
(when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data
being transmitted will increase 20-30% compared to 24-bit.
7 LATENCY select buttons
Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms,
or 5.0 ms.
The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For
details, refer to “Setting the Dante audio network latency” (page 228).
8 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons
If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT
PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console.
If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante
patch settings. You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE
PATCH BY select buttons on other CL/QL series consoles on the network.
9 PREFERRED MASTER button
If this button is turned ON, the console's status as a master is given greater priority in
the Dante audio network.
If this button is turned OFF, the console's status as a master is given less priority in the
Dante audio network.
• If there is only one CL console for which this button is turned ON, that console will become the
master.
• If there are multiple CL consoles for which this button is turned ON, only one of them will become
the master.
• If this button is turned OFF for all CL consoles, one unit out of all Dante devices, including I/O
devices, will become the master.
NOTE
• Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of
the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1.
• If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you
attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not
Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen.
• DANTE patch information is a
is loaded under the following
state will be maintained.
• In the SAVE/LOAD window
on.
• Either #1, #2, #3, or #4 CO
• The THIS CONSOLE butto
• With CL V2.03 and later, whe
a firmware update is installe
changed when console settin
off using the Dante Controller
clock settings for anything ot
the Dante network to prevent
to clearly specify the master
running (off for all other devi
Setup
Reference Manual
et to OFF, the DANTE PATCH BY field is fixed to “DANTE
ing cannot be changed in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window.
et to OFF, all the mounted devices will be “virtual.”
ther settings for R series units, but notification of the settings will not
the same as when the devices are not connected.
dio network latency
r signals transmitted over a Dante audio network varies
ction method and size. This section explains how to set an
ding on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices
ies console.
he switches and the number of hops
a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of
the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the
master device to the most distant device (assuming that all
.
s well as the switches that are built into CL series consoles
value based on the number of hops. The following table
sed on the number of hops.
itions, you may want to raise the latency value even if the number of
.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting
Latency (ms)
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
5.0228
Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT
DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)
The button you switched is shown in red.
When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return
to its original appearance.
NOTE
• If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between
the CL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the
REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will
become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you
change the setting.
• The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the
CL series console.
• When the CONSOLE ID is OFF or is set to 2, 3, or 4 for a CL series console, the console's BIT/
LATENCY will not change even if the BIT/LATENCY is changed in the DANTE SETUP window
for the CL series console within a network for which the CONSOLE ID is set to 1.
• When the CONSOLE ID is s
CONTROLLER.” Also, patch
• When the CONSOLE ID is s
You can edit HA GAIN and o
be sent to the device. This is
Setting the Dante au
An appropriate latency setting fo
depending on the network conne
appropriate latency setting depen
that are connected to the CL ser
Relationship between t
An appropriate latency setting on
hops in the network. One hop is
number of hops starting from the
devices are connected in series)
Switches mean switching hubs a
and I/O devices. Set the latency
shows typical latency settings ba
NOTE
• Depending on network cond
hops is small.
• If a problem occurs, select 5
is the cause of the problem.
STEP
1. In the DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page), select the CONSOLE ID and the
SECONDARY PORT.
2. Press the APPLY button.
3. In the window to confirm the change, press the OK button.
Number of hops
Up to 3
Up to 5
Up to 10
Up to 20
21 or more (or if a problem occurs)
Setup
Reference Manual
haring 64-in/48-out.
3
2
3
2
229
Connection examples and latency settings
Daisy chain connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
Daisy chain connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
Redundant connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
Redundant connections
FOH and monitor consoles are s
3
3
2
2
1 1
3 hops = 0.25 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms
4
2
1 1
3
3
2
4 hops = 0.5 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms
4
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
4
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
Setup
Reference Manual
ing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
4
3
2
230
Daisy chain connections
256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
Redundant connections
Two CL series consoles are shar
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
2
3
4
1 1
9 hops = 1.0 ms 4 hops = 0.5 ms
5
1
5 hops = 0.5 ms
Setup
Reference Manual
open the DEVICE SELECT window. The upper line of the
el. The lower line of the button shows the model name and
utputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will
row will show nothing.
RTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,
ce list.”
ns g methods for mounting the I/O device.
..... Not mounted
..... Select and mount from the device list
..... Select and mount a supported device
..... Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS)
..... Enter a device label and mount231
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
Here's how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be
mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
DANTE SETUP window (DEVICE MOUNT page)
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
3 I/O device select buttons
Press one of the buttons to
button shows the device lab
the number of inputs and o
indicate “---” and the lower
For more information on VI
refer to P.154, (1) “I/O devi
DANTE SETUP window
1 Setup method select butto
Choose one of the followin
• NO ASSIGN ...................
• DEVICE LIST .................
• SUPPORTED DEVICE ..
• DVS................................
• MANUAL........................
STEP
1. Press the DEVICE MOUNT tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2. Press the I/O device select button.
3. In the DEVICE SELECT window, press the setup method select button.
4. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
1 2
3
1
Setup
Reference Manual
d select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE
n I/O device that is supported by the CL series, press the
see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be
to a Dante audio network.
I/O device types that are supported by the CL series.
pe of I/O device that you want to mount.
] knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to
I/O device.
ont panel of the I/O device.
odel name and the number of inputs and outputs.
] knobs to specify the UNIT ID.
IT ID.
3
4
232
When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST
To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the
DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount.
3 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the
Dante audio network. If the selected I/O device is supported by the CL series, the inputs
and outputs will be entered and displayed automatically.
When the setup metho
If you want to select and mount a
SUPPORTED DEVICE button to
made even when not connected
1 DEVICE TYPE
This area shows a list of the
From the list, choose the ty
2 DEVICE TYPE select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN
mount.
3 I/O device indication
This area shows the selected
The upper line shows the fr
The lower line shows the m
4 UNIT ID knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN
The indicator shows the UN
1
2
3
1
2
Setup
Reference Manual
d select button is DVS or MANUAL
el of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL
AL field.
the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard.
] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the
rd he device label of the I/O device.
ount it by pressing the DVS button.
k, the first DVS detected is automatically mounted.
d is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will
mber of inputs and outputs will be specified.
2
233
NOTE
• If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device's UNIT ID to “1.”
• If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between
devices.
• For devices other than the R series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned
to the same ID as an R series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However, since
the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish
between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers
to overlap.
• If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit
screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or Dante Accelerator), and you want to use that
device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller.
• An I/O device will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as
follows.
Y###-**********
# is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0 - 9 and uppercase A to F (000 FFF)
* indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or - (hyphen)
may be used)
• If you are controlling the CL series console from an R series unit, we recommend that you set the
R unit's START UP MODE to “REFRESH.” Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting,
since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system
setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.”
With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings
that were backed up by the R series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output.
• A single CL series console can control the HA of up to eight R series units.
If nine or more R series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between
multiple CL series consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the R series
units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to
“RESUME.”
When the setup metho
If you want to enter the device lab
button to access the DVS/MANU
1 DEVICE LABEL
Displays the device label of
2 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN
Dante audio network.
3 Device label entry keyboa
Use this keyboard to enter t
NOTE
• If the I/O device is a DVS, m
• If DEVICE LABEL is left blan
• If the device label you entere
be ignored, and the rated nu
1
3
Setup
Reference Manual
o open the REMOTE HA SELECT window. The upper line of
e label. The lower line of the button shows the model name
nd outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row
wer row will show nothing.
RTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,
ce list.”
ndow
es on the Dante audio network.
ngs saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA
onsole starts up and when a scene is recalled.
] knob to select the HA device that you want to mount.
LL” if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and
ade on a different CL series console.
perated from a CL series console that is not set to “WITH RECALL.”
2
234
REMOTE HA settings
Here's how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be
mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
DANTE SETUP window (REMOTE HA page)
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network.
3 HA device select buttons
Press one of these buttons t
the button shows the devic
and the number of inputs a
will indicate “---” and the lo
For more information on VI
refer to P.154, (1) “I/O devi
REMOTE HA SELECT wi
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the HA devic
2 WITH RECALL button
If this button is on, the setti
device when the CL series c
3 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN
NOTE
• Do not specify “WITH RECA
settings have already been m
• The HA device can also be o
STEP
1. Press the REMOTE HA ASSIGN tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2. Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT window.
3. Select the HA device to mount and press the OK button.
If you have changed the setting by pressing the WITH RECALL button, a
confirmation dialog box will appear. Press the OK button.
13 2
1
3
Setup
Reference Manual
creen shows indicators for the status of the R-series units
rt for V1.60, the version indication will be yellow and the
essages are displayed.
the Dante Controller Error Status field.
s described below:
remains lit steadily.
continues to flash.
flashes twice cyclically.
flashes three times cyclically.235
Displaying the device status
You can use the touch screen to verify the status of a connected CL series or R-series unit
(except the Ro8-D) or the Dante status. In order to verify the status of an R-series unit from
the console, it must be assigned to REMOTE HA in DANTE SETUP.
CL series
The SETUP field of the DANTE SETUP window shows indicators for the status of the CL
series console and the Dante network.
R-series
The I/O field of the I/O DEVICE s
and the Dante network.
For firmware that predates suppo
indicator will be unlit.
Messages
Error, warning, and information m
Messages are also displayed in
Each indicator lights or flashes a
No call-out Unlit
Lit The indicator
Blinking The indicator
Flash x2 The indicator
Flash x3 The indicator
Setup
Reference Manual
ing cyclically until the problem has been resolved.
ot lit, the device's word clock is not defined.
the unit is operating as the word clock master.
nit is operating as a word clock slave and synching to the
Meaning Possible solution
e word clock is not set
rrectly.
Set the word clock master and the
sampling frequency correctly on
the CL5/CL3/CL1-native device or
in Dante Controller.
nte Network circuit is
ken.
Make sure that the Ethernet
cables are not removed or shortcircuited.
nte Network is connected
orrectly. Other Dante
vices cannot be found.
Make sure that the Ethernet
cables are connected correctly.
Meaning Possible solution
on-GbE-compatible device
connected.
If audio is transmitted over the
Dante network, use a GbEcompatible device.
e SECONDARY connector
s taken over
mmunications during
undant network operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
PRIMARY connector.236
Error messages
The SYSTEM indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically as follows until the problem has been
resolved.
If service is necessary, please contact the Yamaha service center listed in the CL5/CL3/CL1
Owner's Manual.
Warning messages
The indicators will remain lit/blink
If the green [SYNC] indicator is n
If the green indicator is blinking,
If the green indicator lights, the u
word clock.
[SYSTEM] indicators Meaning Possible solution
An internal error has occurred.
The device has failed. Contact
your Yamaha dealer for repair.
The MAC address setting has
been corrupted and no
communication can occur via
Dante.
The internal memory has
been corrupted.
If the problem persists after
setting START UP MODE back to
RESUME and turning the power
on again, consult your Yamaha
dealer.
UNIT ID is not unique.
Set a unique UNIT ID number for
the Dante network.
The DIP switches are not set
correctly.
Check the DIP switch settings,
and set them correctly.
Dante flow number limit was
exceeded.
Examine the Dante network
routing.
Flash x2
Flash x3
Flash x3Lit
Lit
flash
BlinkingLit
[SYNC] indicators
Th co Da bro
Da inc
de [SYNC] indicators
A n
is Th ha co red
Blinking
Flash x2
Flash x3
LitLit or
blinking
BlinkingLit or
blinking
Setup
Reference Manual
l Purpose Interface)
rpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output
es five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example
o control internal parameters of the CL series console or to
tions or scene changes performed on the CL series console
ternal device.
l signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer
an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)”
he GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series
For example, you could use an external switch to turn the CL
operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes.
to the CL series console's GPI connector.
, press the SETUP button.
the MIDI/GPI button.
ss the GPI tab.
E for each port as appropriate for the specifications of
sing.
arameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN
TUP window, select the desired function and parameter,
MIDI/GPI screen237
 Information messages
The indicators will remain lit /blinking cyclically to report the status.
If the orange [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the unit is operating correctly.
If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device's word clock is not defined.
Using GPI (Genera
The rear panel GPI (General Pu
connector. This connector provid
you can use an external switch t
switch scenes. Conversely, opera
can send control signals to an ex
For details on how to send contro
to “Outputting a control signal to
(page 98).
Using GPI IN
You can use the GPI IN ports of t
console from an external device.
series console's Talkback on/off,
An abnormality has occurred
on the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector
during redundant network
operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector.
[SYNC] indicators Meaning Possible solution
Muted during startup, or in the
process of synchronization.
Please wait until started has
completed or until the unit has
finished synchronization. It
may take up to 45 seconds for
completion.
The device is operating
correctly as a word clock
master.
This indicates that the device is
operating as a word clock master.
The device is operating
correctly as a word clock
slave.
This indicates that the device is
operating as a word clock slave
and synching to the word clock.
Flash x2Lit or
blinking
Lit
Blinking
Lit
STEP
1. Connect an external device
2. In the Function Access Area
3. In the SETUP screen, press
4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, pre
5. Specify the POLARITY MOD
the external device you're u
6. To assign the function or p
SETUP button.
7. In each field of the GPI IN SE
then press the OK button.
SETUP screen
Setup
Reference Manual
e of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this
SETUP window.
ed in the GPI IN SETUP window are the same as for the USER
tton
ch attribute. Each time you press the button, its indication
H and UNLATCH.
(a switch that alternately turns on/off each time it is pressed)
ted.
CH (a switch that is on only while pressed and is off when
d) is selected.238
NOTE
• With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is
input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of
external switch.
• With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch
is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type
of external switch as appropriate for your needs.
• Settings in the GPI page of the MIDI/GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved
as SETUP data.
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)
1 GPI IN status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port.
2 POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port.
............... (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will
become active when the switch is grounded.
............... (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will
become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level
voltage is input.
3 GPI IN SETUP button
The button shows the nam
button to display the GPI IN
NOTE
The items that can be select
DEFINED keys (page 197).
4 Switch attribute select bu
This button selects the swit
will alternate between LATC
................. LATCH
is selec
................. UNLAT
release
4
1
2
3
Setup
Reference Manual
age)
the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port.
utton
rity of the GPI OUT port.
tive) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.
ctive) Open when the GPI OUT port is active.
234
1
239
Using GPI OUT
The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by
performing operations on the CL series console.
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI p
1 GPI OUT status indicator
This indicates the status of
2 POLARITY MODE select b
This button selects the pola
............... (Low ac
............... (High a
STEP
1. Connect an external device to the CL series console's GPI connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.
5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of
the external device you're using.
6. To assign a function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI OUT
SETUP button.
7. In each field of the GPI OUT SETUP window, select the desired function and
parameter, then press the OK button.
SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen
Setup
Reference Manual
you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate
to the CL series console's GPI connector.
, press the SETUP button.
the MIDI/GPI button.
ss the FADER START tab.
cify the channel that will cause the external device to
eration.
MIDI/GPI screen240
3 GPI OUT SETUP button
The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this
button to display the GPI OUT SETUP window.
You can assign the following functions.
4 TEST button
While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control
signal.
Using FADER START
Make FADER START settings if
in tandem with fader operations.
Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
NO ASSIGN - - No assignment
CUE ACTIVE CUE ON - Turn on the [CUE] key of the
selected channel
DCA ONLY - Turn on the DCA [CUE] key
INPUT ONLY - Turn on the [CUE] key of an input
channel
OUTPUT ONLY - Turn on the [CUE] key of an output
channel
DANTE REDUNDANCY
IND.
PRIMARY This function activates when the
unit is operating on the primary
Dante audio network with a star
connection (redundancy network).
SECONDARY This function activates when the
unit is operating on the secondary
Dante audio network with a star
connection (redundancy network).
GPI IN ACTIVE
IND.
SPECIFIC PORT PORT 1 to PORT 5 The function assigned to GPI IN
port 1 - 5 becomes active
POWER ON - - The power of the CL series
console is turned on
USER DEF.
KEY ACTIVE
IND.
SPECIFIC
NUMBER
USER DEFINED
KEY 1 to USER
DEFINED KEY 16
The function assigned to the
USER DEFINED key becomes
active
STEP
1. Connect an external device
2. In the Function Access Area
3. In the SETUP screen, press
4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, pre
5. For each GPI OUT port, spe
operate, and the type of op
SETUP screen
Setup
Reference Manual
E
ill be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger
he fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls
evel. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this.
ecified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all
OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader)
will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the
e valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER
and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid.
fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from
g fader modes.
ng will be output when the fader of the selected channel
specified UPSTROKE level (-∞ to+10.0 dB) from a point
ng will be output when the fader of the selected channel
NSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB).
ut when the fader of the selected channel moves upward
OKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal
eaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB)
eceives a different trigger. This signal will be held until the
DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) or until that GPI OUT
ger.
selected channel will not cause a signal to be output.241
MIDI/GPI screen (FADER START page)
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all selections.
OUTPUT DESTINATION field
2 GPI OUT1 to GPI OUT5 buttons
Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings.
3 Fader indicator
This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select a fader.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
THRESHOLD field
4 UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROK
These specify the level that w
signal will be output when t
below the DOWNSTROKE l
NOTE
• The THRESHOLD values sp
channels (faders) and all GPI
for each GPI OUT port.
• Only the UPSTROKE value
DOWNSTROKE value will b
TALLY, both the UPSTROKE
MODE field
Here you can select the mode of
the GPI OUT port.
You can choose from the followin
5 FADER START
A trigger signal 250 msec lo
moves upward through the
below it.
6 FADER STOP
A trigger signal 250 msec lo
reaches the specified DOW
7 FADER TALLY
A trigger signal will be outp
through the specified UPSTR
will be held until the fader r
or until that GPI OUT port r
fader reaches the specified
port receives a different trig
8 NO ASSIGN
Operating the fader of the
3
2
8 5 6 7
4
1
Setup
Reference Manual242
The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI PORT will change
in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the
THRESHOLD field is set to -60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to -∞. (This illustration shows
the case in which is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is ,
the polarity of the output signal will be reversed.)
NOTE
At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high
level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited;
For details, refer to the control I/O specification in the CL data list (at the end of this manual).
FADER
START
FADER
TALLY
FADER
STOP
250 msec
250 msec
Help function
Reference Manual
e set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding
9-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force
hat character code set. You can specify the desired character code
tor to save the text file.
display the following text files (character code sets /languages).
8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)
t_JIS character code set (Japanese)
uages written in the UTF-8 character code set
window
ob or screen buttons to access the HELP window.
s 1 and 2.
ls the index area at the left.
s 3 - 8.
ls the main area at the right.
ed text) in the text
ls to the linked destination.
(a location with an  symbol and underlined text)
s the HELP window and opens the corresponding window.
n ........ Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currentlydisplayed location.
n ........ Returns to the preceding item in the history of links
you pressed.
n ........ Advances to the next item in the history of links you
pressed.
le from your USB flash drive.
, press the (Help) button.
press the (Help) button of the Function Access
he HELP window.243
Help function
You can view Help files (file extension .xml) provided by Yamaha. For the latest information on
help files, refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
In addition, using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with Microsoft
Windows, you can create a text file (file extension .txt) and display it on the console*.
* We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files
created by a third party other than Yamaha.
Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive
NOTE
A help file for only one language is stored in the console's internal memory. Once you load the
help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off. The first time you
press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the
help file to be loaded from internal memory. Once the data has finished loading, subsequently
pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly.
NOTE
By default, the character cod
a line consisting of [ISO-885
recognition of the file using t
set when using your text edi
The Help function is able to
• Text files written in the ISO• Text files written in the Shif
• Text files of the above lang
Viewing Help
Operation in the HELP
You can use the multifunction kn
• Turn multifunction knob
.............Scrol
• Turn multifunction knob
.............Scrol
• Pressing a link (underlin
.............Scrol
• Pressing a window link
.............Close
• Pressing the butto
• Pressing the butto
• Pressing the butto
STEP
1. Save the Help file provided by Yamaha or a user-created text file on your USB flash
drive.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
4. To select the Help/text file that you want to load, press one of the Help/text files in
the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or turn the multifunction knob in the
Centralogic section.
5. Press the LOAD button.
6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to load the file.
SAVE/LOAD window
STEP
1. Load the Help file or text fi
2. In the Function Access Area
3. To close the HELP window,
Area or the “x” symbol of t
Help function
Reference Manual
elp for a specific panel controller
EFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function,
ller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is
lp for the corresponding item will appear.
press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is
the faders and the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will not function as long
n the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
ions for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to
xplanations.
elp for a specific controller in the LCD screen
EFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function,
which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available
corresponding item will appear.
press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is
ll not function as long as you continue holding down the USER
elp function is assigned.
ions for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to
xplanations.244
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly
Assigning the Help function to USER DEFINED keys
Recalling the HELP window using only a USER DEFINED key
Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP window will
appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help
function is assigned.
Directly recalling the H
While holding down the USER D
press (or rotate) the panel contro
available for the controller, the he
To close the window, once again
assigned.
NOTE
• Panel controllers (other than
as you continue holding dow
• If there are multiple explanat
successively display these e
Directly recalling the H
While holding down the USER D
press the on-screen controller for
for the controller, the help for the
To close the window, once again
assigned.
NOTE
• The on-screen controllers wi
DEFINED key to which the H
• If there are multiple explanat
successively display these e
STEP
1. Load the Help file from your USB flash drive.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
4. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
5. In the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button corresponding to the USER
DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function.
6. In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button.
7. Press the “x” symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
SETUP screen USER SETUP window (USER
DEFINED KEYS page)
Other functions
Reference Manual
til initialization is complete.
e, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
ction point of the touch screen
ion)
tly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch
ration by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button, you
Y [INC]/[DEC] keys to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION, and
to start.
ccurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and
ly operate the unit.
e, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
ENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
n, press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button.
he TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen.
confirmation dialog box to start calibration.
ppear in the screen (a total of three times). Press each
s. e startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
MODE screen245
Other functions
This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other
chapters.
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot
operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
There are two types of initialization of the internal memory as shown below.
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default
settings.
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
The contents of memory - except for scene memories and libraries - will be returned to its
factory default settings.
CAUTION
The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory! Proceed with the operation
only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory.
However, the settings in DANTE SETUP will not be initialized. To initialize these settings, refer to
“Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings” (page 249).
NOTE
• Do not press any buttons un
• Once initialization is complet
of pressing the EXIT button.
Adjusting the dete
(Calibration funct
Follow the steps below to correc
screen.
NOTE
• If you are unable to start calib
can use the SCENE MEMOR
then press the [STORE] key
• To set the detection points a
posture in which you normal
• Once initialization is complet
of pressing the EXIT button.
STEP
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, select the initialization method.
3. Press the INITIALIZE button in the dialog box to confirm initialization.
4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start initialization.
5. A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button
on the startup menu screen.
Startup menu screen
STEP
1. While holding down the SC
power to the CL unit.
2. On the startup menu scree
3. Press the START button in t
4. Press the OK button in the
5. A cross-shaped cursor will a
location at which it appear
6. Press the EXIT button on th
operating mode.
Startup menu screen
Other functions
Reference Manual
as detected at start-up will already be selected in step 3.
ars, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute
e, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
put and output gain (Calibration
adjustments to the input and output gain.
button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset
0 dB.
e, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead
ENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
n the startup menu screen, press the button for the item
select it, and then use the corresponding multifunction
e startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal 246
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console, discrepancies may
occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these
discrepancies.
NOTE
The specified faders in the channel strip section, Centralogic section, and Master section will be
semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader
settings while the CL is starting up.
NOTE
• Faders for which a problem w
• If the RESTART button appe
calibration once again.
• Once initialization is complet
of pressing the EXIT button.
Fine-tuning the in
function)
If necessary, you can make fine
NOTE
• If you press the RESET ALL
to 0 dB.
The factory settings are also
• Once initialization is complet
of pressing the EXIT button.
STEP
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the FADER CALIBRATION button.
3. Press a [SEL] key to select the faders that you want to calibrate.
4. Press the START button in the FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen.
5. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
6. Each of the specified faders will move to -∞ (all the way down). If the fader positions
are not correct, move them manually to -∞ (all the way down).
7. After you adjust the fader position, press the NEXT button.
8. Repeat steps 6 to 7 to adjust three fader positions at 20 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB (all the way
up).
When adjustment to the +10 dB position is complete, calibration starts.
9. When calibration has been completed, press the APPLY button.
10. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
Startup menu screen
STEP
1. While holding down the SC
power to the CL unit.
2. In the MODE SELECT field o
you want to adjust.
3. Press an on-screen knob to
knob to adjust the value.
4. Press the EXIT button on th
operating mode.
Startup menu screen
Other functions
Reference Manual
adjustment of the slot output port gain)
RIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the
d slot in 0.01 dB steps.247
• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain)
Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the
specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps.
• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain)
Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the
specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps.
• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine
Access the SLOT OUTPUT T
output ports of the specifie
Other functions
Reference Manual
htness of the channel name
brightness of the channel name display.
e operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
NE MEMOR Y [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power
press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
ey of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust.
crease the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will
sting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in the
the change.
startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal 248
Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can adjust the channel colors. Adjust the channel colors one by one.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on
those models will not be shown.
• You cannot adjust more than one channel simultaneously.
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB
values.
• To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default
setting, press the RESET ALL button.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation
by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT
button.
Adjusting the brig
display
If necessary, you can adjust the
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continu
EXIT button.
STEP
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust
the color.
4. Press one of the color buttons in the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen
to select the desired color.
5. While comparing the color of the selected channel's indicator with the color of the
other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), use multifunction
knobs 6, 7, and 8 to adjust the color.
6. When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located in the
right of the screen to confirm the change.
7. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION
MODE screen
STEP
1. While holding down the SCE
to the CL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen,
3. Press the [CUE] key or [ON] k
Pressing the [CUE] key will in
decrease the brightness.
4. When you have finished adju
right of the screen to confirm
5. Press the EXIT button on the
operating mode.
Other functions
Reference Manual
sole settings and Dante audio
ttings to be initialized to their factory-set state when an error
rk.
ole settings including the Dante audio network settings that had
emory will be lost.
from the Dante audio network before initializing.
ENE MEMORY [STORE] key and [INC] key on the panel,
L unit.
itialization process is complete. Press the CLOSE button.249
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name
display
If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display.
NOTE
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting.
• Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Initializing the con
network settings
It is possible for Dante-related se
occurs on the Dante audio netwo
CAUTION
When you initialize, all cons
been previously saved in m
Disconnect all connections
STEP
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power
to the CL unit.
2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Hold down a [SEL] key on the panel, and turn multifunction knob 1 in the Centralogic
section.
Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward
the right will darken the contrast of all channels.
4. If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels,
hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or [ON] key.
Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the contrast.
5. When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in the
right of the screen to confirm the change.
6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
STEP
1. While holding down the SC
turn on the power to the C
2. A message indicates that in
Warning/Error Messages
Reference Manual
Data in an unsupported format was loaded.
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files
remaining in the directory.
Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor.
Too much data is being received at CL Editor's input port.
Too much data is being sent from CL Editor's output port.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup
window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen.
The network cable of a redundant secondary port has been
disconnected.
External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of
connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was
stored.
The PW800 (EXT) power supply connected to the CL series console
has stopped operating.
A snapshot was taken of the current bank settings.
The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB
flash drive is being accessed.
The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same
name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create.
Internal file access error
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is
write-protected.
Memory initialization has been completed.
The help file has not been loaded.
The IP address or gateway address settings are invalid.
The R series DIP switch settings are invalid.
Communication via the Network connector is not possible because
the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason.
Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the
Owner's Manual (separate document).
The MAC Address is invalid.
The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is
invalid or unsupported.
The internal (INT) power supply has stopped operating. Alternatively,
some other problem has occurred. Please contact your Yamaha
service center listed at the end of the Owner's Manual (separate
document).
The internal (INT) power supply has started up normally.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the
DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen.
No data has been stored in library #xxx that you attempted to recall.
Meaning250
Warning/Error Messages
Message Meaning
xxx Parameters Copied. Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Initialized. Parameter xxx was initialized.
xxx Parameters Pasted. Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy
Buffer. Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off! ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off.
Cannot Assign! In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3/CL1, you attempted to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model.
Cannot Bookmark This Popup. This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
Cannot Mount This Type of Device in
This Position.
You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot
be mounted.
Cannot Open This Page. This window cannot be opened.
Cannot Paste to Different Parameter
Type! The parameter cannot be pasted to a different type.
Cannot Paste! Cannot paste the character string.
Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
Cannot Select This Channel. You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason.
Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library.
Cannot Undo! You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available.
Channel Copied. Channel settings have been copied.
Channel Moved. Channel settings have been moved.
Channel Returned to Default Settings. Channel settings have been returned to the default settings.
Console initialized due to memory
mismatch.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup
memory has been lost, due to an update or failure of the backup
battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service
center listed at the end of the Owner's Manual (separate document).
Corrupted data fixed! The data was fixed.
Couldn’t Access File. File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason.
Couldn’t Write File. File could not be saved to the USB flash drive.
Current User Changed. [xxx] Current user was changed to [xxx].
DANTE audio resource overflow. There are insufficient audio resources on the Dante audio network.
DANTE Connection Error! The primary and secondary connections are incorrect in the daisy chain connections.
DANTE is not working by GIGA bit. GIGA bit is not working on the Dante audio network.
DANTE is working at Secondary. The Dante audio network is working on a secondary port.
DANTE module Error! An error has occurred in a Dante module.
Different File Format! Some Data was
not Loaded.
Directory Not Empty!
Editor: Data Framing Error!
Editor: Data Overrun!
Editor: Rx Buffer Full!
Editor: Tx Buffer Full!
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
Error occurred at Secondary Port.
External HA Connection Conflict!
External Power Supply is Cut Off!
Fader Bank Snapshot is Done.
File Access is Busy!
File Already Exists!
File Error [xx]!
File Protected!
Flash Memory Initializing Finished.
Help File Not Found!
Illegal Address!
Illegal DIP Switch Setting.
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use
Ethernet.
Illegal MAC Address!
Illegal Storage Format!
Internal Power Supply is Cut Off!
Internal Power Supply is Turned On.
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
LIBRARY #xxx is Empty!
Message
Warning/Error Messages
Reference Manual
Processing was interrupted.
The button operation was canceled because recorder processing
required time.
A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen.
CUE was canceled for RECORDER IN because you switched from
the RECORDER screen to another screen.
When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a
second time.
Invalid signals are being input to the Remote connector.
Too much data is being received at the Remote connector.
Too much data is being sent from the Remote connector.
p. The channel was removed from the link group.
Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted.
Finished saving to USB flash drive.
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the
data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
The audio playback link for the scene was canceled.
Invalid signals are being input to the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the SLOT x output port.
Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified
might be used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK.
The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a
USER DEFINED key does not exist.
Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix.
Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port.
You cannot use this function in Stereo mode.
The console has switched to Stereo mode.
The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the
USB flash drive.
The USB flash drive could not be recognized.
Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready.
You cannot use this function in Surround mode.
Meaning251
Loading Aborted. Loading from USB flash drive was aborted.
Loading Finished. Finished loading from USB flash drive.
Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low.
Maximum Number of Audio Files
Exceeded!
The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory
recorder has been exceeded.
Memory Error. The R series backup memory is corrupted.
MIDI: Data Framing Error!
MIDI: Data Overrun! An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.
Monitor Assignment is Restricted to
Max. 8 Sources!
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be
selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight.
No Access From Recorder! In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
No Channel Selected. A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen.
No Copy Item Selected. In the GLOBAL PASTE screen, you attempted to paste without having selected an item to paste.
No Corresponding Help Items. The corresponding section was not found in the Help file.
No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit. The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag.
No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR.
No Response from I/O DEVICE. The I/O devices not responding.
Operating as the word clock master. This console is the Clock Master.
Page Bookmarked. The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
Parameter out of range! Some data could not be loaded because the parameters do not match.
Password Changed. The password has been changed.
PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy! Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress.
PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was canceled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen.
Please use Dante Controller. The Dante Patch settings from the console are not valid.
Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding
now.
You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when
patching was not possible.
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. Please
contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner's
Manual (separate document).
PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used
during Preview.
PREVIEW Mode : Disabled Preview was disabled.
PREVIEW Mode : Enabled Preview was enabled.
Message Meaning
Processing Aborted.
Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!
RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] !
RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off.
Re-Enter Password!
REMOTE: Data Framing Error!
REMOTE: Data Overrun!
REMOTE: Rx Buffer Full!
REMOTE: Tx Buffer Full!
Removed from the Channel Link grou
Saving Aborted.
Saving Finished.
SCENE #xxx is Empty!
SCENE #xxx is Protected!
SCENE #xxx is Read Only!
Scene Playback Link Canceled!
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full!
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full!
Some Song Files Are Unidentified.
Song File Not Found!
STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error!
STAGEMIX: Data Overrun!
STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full!
STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full!
STEREO Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
STEREO MODE ON.
Storage Full!
Storage Not Found!
Storage Not Ready!
SURROUND Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
Message
Warning/Error Messages
Reference Manual
Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was
lost.
The format of the audio file is invalid.
The password you input was incorrect.
The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source
selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen
is not appropriate.
The current user does not have permission to create a user
authentication key.
Meaning252
SURROUND MODE ON. The console has switched to Surround mode.
Sync Error! [xxx] The CL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal.
Tap Operation Ignored. Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.
This Operation is Not Allowed. This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission.
This Operation is Not Allowed in This
View. This function is not allowed in this screen.
Too Large Files! Loading Failed.
Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The
maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes.
Or loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The
maximum supported file size is 1024 kilobytes.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot
Compare.
Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed
because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to
Flex15GEQ.
Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because
more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded! Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has exceeded the rated value.
Unassigned Encoder. Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated.
Unit Fan has Malfunctioned The fan in the R series console has malfunctioned.
Unit ID Duplicated! The UNIT ID is duplicated on the Dante audio network.
Unsupported File Format! The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an unsupported format.
USB Currently Active for Recorder
function!
Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory
recorder is recording or playing.
USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD! The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive.
USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped! Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash drive processing.
USB Memory Full ! Can't save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive.
USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped. Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating.
USB Memory is Protected! The USB flash drive's Protect setting is turned on.
USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder
Stopped.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was
disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating.
USB over current Error! Disconnect USB
device.
The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB
current.
USER DEFINED KEY BANK CHANGED [x]. The bank for the USER DEFINED KEY has switched to [x]. (x is A, B, C, or D.)
Version Changed. All Memories were
Initialized. The current memory was initialized when the version was updated.
Version mismatch. The versions of this console and the R series console do not match.
Message Meaning
Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!
Wrong Audio File Format!
Wrong Password!
Wrong Word Clock!
You Cannot Create User Key.
Message
Appendices
Reference Manual253
Index
Numerics
8BandPEQ .................................................. 132
A
Assignable encoders ................................... 206
Audio file (links to a scene recall).................. 99
AUTOMIXER............................................... 135
Automixer .................................................... 135
C
Calibration ................................... 245, 246, 248
Cascade connections .................................. 220
Centralogic section........................................ 12
Channel color ........................................ 28, 248
Channel colors ............................................ 224
Channel Job .................................................. 65
Channel library ........................................ 48, 57
Channel Link ................................................. 76
Console Lock............................................... 210
Control change
control parameters................................... 170
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel ..... 81
Cue...................................................... 102, 109
Operating................................................. 110
Custom fader bank ...................................... 208
D
Dante audio network ................................... 226
Dante audio network ..................................... 16
DAW............................................................ 179
DCA group..................................................... 65
Directly outputting.......................................... 23
Dynamics................................................. 58, 61
Libraries..................................................... 64
E
Effect ........................................................... 124
Libraries................................................... 153
Effects and tempo synchronization ............. 143
EQ ................................................................. 58
Libraries..................................................... 64
External head amps ............................ 154, 160
F
Factory set ................................................... 245
Fade function ................................................. 96
Focus Recall function..................................... 94
Function Tree................................................... 4
Functions that can be assigned to
the assignable encoders............................. 207
G
Gain ............................................................... 29
Analog gain ................................................ 29
Gain Compensation ....................................... 33
Global Paste function..................................... 93
GPI............................................................... 237
Graphic EQ .......................................... 124, 128
Libraries ................................................... 153
H
HA .................................................................. 29
Head Amp ...................................................... 29
Help function ................................................ 243
I
I/O devices ................................................... 154
Initializing ..................................................... 245
INPUT channels
Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus ..................... 37
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ............... 33
Input channels................................................ 26
Channel library ........................................... 48
Specifying channel name and icon ............ 27
Input Delay..................................................... 40
Input patch ..................................................... 17
Inserting ......................................................... 20
Internal clock................................................ 225
Internal effects ............................................. 137
L
Lamp brightness .......................................... 224
LED .............................................................. 224
Libraries ................................................. 64, 153
Library .......................................................... 168
M
Master fader ................................................ 209
MATRIX buses ...................................... 53, 223
MBCL (option) ............................................. 123
Meter bridge (option) ................................... 123
METER screen ............................................ 119
Meters.......................................................... 119
MIDI ............................................................. 165
MIX buses.................................................... 223
MIX channels
Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 53
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus............... 51
MIX MINUS.................................................... 84
MIX/MATRIX buses ....................................... 37
Monitor................................................. 102, 103
Mute group .................................................... 70
N
Name displays ............................................. 224
Network address.......................................... 225
Nuendo Live ................................................ 182
O
Oscillator.............................................. 114, 116
Output channels ............................................ 49
Channel library........................................... 57
Specifying channel name and icon ............ 50
Output Delay.................................................. 56
Output patch .................................................. 18
OVERVIEW Screen....................................... 13
P
Patching......................................................... 16
Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)................ 204
Preferences ................................................. 195
PREMIUM RACK......................................... 144
Premium Rack
Libraries ................................................... 153
Using........................................................ 144
PREVIEW mode .......................................... 100
Program change
recall operation ........................................ 168
R
Recall Safe function....................................... 73
S
Scene
Editing ....................................................... 90
SELECTED CHANNEL section....................... 6
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen ............. 7
Setup........................................................... 186
SETUP screen............................................. 186
Slot .............................................................. 218
STEREO/MONO bus............................... 33, 51
STEREO/MONO channels
Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 53
Surround...................................................... 107
T
Talkback...................................................... 114
Title list ........................................................ 178
TOUCH AND TURN.................................... 204
Touch screen............................................... 224
U
USB flash drive
Formatting ............................................... 217
Help/text file loading ................................ 243
Loading a file ........................................... 214
Playing back audio files........................... 177
Recording ................................................ 175
Saving and loading setup data ................ 211
USB memory recorder................................. 173
Assigning channels ................................. 173
USER DEFINED keys ................................. 197
Functions that can be assigned............... 199
Recalling Help ......................................... 244
USER DEFINED knobs............................... 203
Functions that can be assigned............... 204
User settings ............................................... 188
V
Viewing Help ............................................... 243
Virtual rack .................................................. 124
operations................................................ 125
W
Warning/Error Messages............................. 250
WIRELESS.................................................. 160
Word clock................................................... 218
EN
Table of Contents
EQ Library List.................................................................... 2
DYNAMICS Library List ...................................................... 3
Dynamics Parameters......................................................... 5
Effect Type List.................................................................... 7
Effects Parameters.............................................................. 8
Premium Rack Processor Parameters ................................ 20
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to
Control Changes ............................................................. 22
NRPN Parameter Assignments .......................................... 26
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability........................... 30
MIDI Data Format ............................................................... 36
Input/output characteristics................................................. 43
Electrical Characteristics .................................................... 45
Mixer Basic Parameters...................................................... 46
Pin Assignment Chart......................................................... 47
MIDI Implementation Chart................................................. 48Data List
Data List
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q - 4.5 4.5 0.125
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G 0.0 dB -5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz
Q - 7.0 4.5 -
24 Brass Sec.
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0
25 Male Vocal 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB
F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11
26 Male Vocal 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB -5.0 dB -2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11 10.0 5.6 -
27 Female Vo. 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB
F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz
Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14
28 Female Vo. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q - 0.16 0.20 -
29 Chorus & Harmo
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0
30 Total EQ 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB
F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz
Q 7.0 2.2 5.6 -
31 Total EQ 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz
Q 7.0 2.8 5.6 -
32 Total EQ 3
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 67.0 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz
Q - 0.28 0.70 -
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH2
EQ Library List
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
01 Bass Drum 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB -3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 1.25 10.0 0.90 -
02 Bass Drum 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF
G +8.0 dB -7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON
F 80.0 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 -
03 Snare Drum 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB
F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz
Q 1.25 4.5 0.11 -
04 Snare Drum 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +1.5 dB -8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q - 10.0 0.70 0.10
05 Tom-tom 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +2.0 dB -7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB
F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz
Q 1.4 10.0 1.25 0.28
06 Cymbal
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz
Q - 8.0 0.90 -
07 High Hat
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -4.0 dB -2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB
F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz
Q - 0.50 1.0 -
08 Percussion
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz
Q - 4.5 0.56 -
09 E. Bass 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q - 5.0 4.5 -
10 E. Bass 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB
F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q 0.10 5.0 6.3 -
11 Syn. Bass 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 0.10 8.0 4.5 -
12 Syn. Bass 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 1.6 8.0 2.2 -
13 Piano 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz
Q - 8.0 0.90 -
14 Piano 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB -8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 5.6 10.0 0.70 -
15 E. G. Clean
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB -5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 0.18 10.0 6.3 -
16 E. G. Crunch 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz
Q 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0
17 E. G. Crunch 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz
Q 8.0 0.40 0.16 -
18 E. G. Dist. 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q - 9.0 10.0 -
19 E. G. Dist. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +6.0 dB -8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q - 10.0 4.0 -
20 A. G. Stroke 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 0.90 4.5 3.5 -
21 A. G. Stroke 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -3.5 dB -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz
Q - 9.0 4.5 -
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
Data List
10 A. Dr. BD COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -24
Ratio ( :1) 3
Attack (ms) 9
Out gain (dB) 5.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 58
11 A. Dr. BD COMPANDER-H
Threshold (dB) -11
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) -1.5
Width (dB) 7
Release (ms) 192
12 A. Dr. SN COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -17
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 12
13 A. Dr. SN EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) -23
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 0
Out gain (dB) 0.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 151
14 A. Dr. SN COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) -8
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 11
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 10
Release (ms) 128
15 A. Dr. Tom EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) -20
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 2
Out gain (dB) 5.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 749
16 A. Dr. OverTop COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) -24
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 38
Out gain (dB) -3.5
Width (dB) 54
Release (ms) 842
17 E. B. Finger COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -12
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 15
Out gain (dB) 4.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 470
# Title Type Parameter Value3
DYNAMICS Library List
33 Bass Drum 3
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +3.5 dB -10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz
Q 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40
34 Snare Drum 3
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q - 4.5 2.8 0.10
35 Tom-tom 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz
Q - 4.5 1.25 -
36 Piano 3
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.5 dB -13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 8.0 10.0 9.0 -
37 Piano Low
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 -
38 Piano High
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz
Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10
39 Fine-EQ Cass
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q - 4.5 1.8 -
40 Narrator
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -4.0 dB -1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 4.0 7.0 0.63 -
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
# Title Type Parameter Value
1 Gate GATE
Threshold (dB) -26
Range (dB) -56
Attack (ms) 0
Hold (ms) 2.56
Decay (ms) 331
2 Ducking DUCKING
Threshold (dB) -19
Range (dB) -22
Attack (ms) 93
Hold (ms) 1.20 S
Decay (ms) 6.32 S
3 A. Dr. BD GATE
Threshold (dB) -11
Range (dB) -53
Attack (ms) 0
Hold (ms) 1.93
Decay (ms) 400
4 A. Dr. SN GATE
Threshold (dB) -8
Range (dB) -23
Attack (ms) 1
Hold (ms) 0.63
Decay (ms) 238
5 De-Esser DE-ESSER
Threshold (dB) -8
Frequency (kHz) 2.00
Type HPF
Q 1.6
6 Comp COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -8
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 30
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 250
7 Expand EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) -23
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 70
8 Compander (H) COMPANDER-H
Threshold (dB) -10
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 6
Release (ms) 250
9 Compander (S) COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) -8
Ratio ( :1) 4
Attack (ms) 25
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 24
Release (ms) 180
Data List
At fs=44.1 kHz
34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -8
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 26
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 3
Release (ms) 331
35 Chorus COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -9
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 39
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 226
36 Click Erase EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) -33
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 284
37 Announcer COMPANDER-H
Threshold (dB) -14
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) -2.5
Width (dB) 18
Release (ms) 180
38 Limiter1 COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) -9
Ratio ( :1) 3
Attack (ms) 20
Out gain (dB) -3.0
Width (dB) 90
Release (ms) 3.90 s
39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) 0
Ratio ( :1) ∞
Attack (ms) 0
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 319
40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -18
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 94
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee hard
Release (ms) 447
41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -16
Ratio ( :1) 6
Attack (ms) 11
Out gain (dB) 6.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 180
# Title Type Parameter Value4
*
18 E. B. Slap COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -12
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 6
Out gain (dB) 4.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 133
19 Syn. Bass COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -10
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 9
Out gain (dB) 3.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 250
20 Piano1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -9
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 17
Out gain (dB) 1.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 238
21 Piano2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -18
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 7
Out gain (dB) 6.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 174
22 E. Guitar COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -8
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 7
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 261
23 A. Guitar COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -10
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 5
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 238
24 Strings1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -11
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 33
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 749
25 Strings2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -12
Ratio ( :1) 1.5
Attack (ms) 93
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 1.35 S
# Title Type Parameter Value
26 Strings3 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -17
Ratio ( :1) 1.5
Attack (ms) 76
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 186
27 BrassSection COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -18
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 18
Out gain (dB) 4.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 226
28 Syn. Pad COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -13
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 58
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 238
29 SamplingPerc COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) -18
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) -2.5
Width (dB) 18
Release (ms) 238
30 Sampling BD COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -14
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 2
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 35
31 Sampling SN COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -18
Ratio ( :1) 4
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) 8.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 354
32 Hip Comp COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) -23
Ratio ( :1) 20
Attack (ms) 15
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 15
Release (ms) 163
33 Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) -20
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 31
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 342
# Title Type Parameter Value
Data List
ice-over applications in which the background music level is
nnouncer speaks.
evel exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is
t (RANGE).
nge Description
This determines the level of trigger signal
(KEY IN) required to activate ducking.
This determines the amount of attenuation
when ducking is activated.
This determines how soon the signal is ducked
once the ducker has been triggered.
2.13 sec
.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long ducking remains
active once the trigger signal has fallen below
the THRESHOLD level.
.0 sec
sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the ducker returns
to its normal gain once the trigger signal level
drops below the threshold. The value is
expressed as the duration required for the level
to change by 6 dB.
Time Time
In pu t L
ev el O
ut pu t L
ev el • Time Series Analysis
SHOLD
RANGE
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK DECAY
HOLD5
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics Parameters are the following types.
GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for vo
reduced automatically when an a
When the KEY IN source signal l
attenuated by a specified amoun
Input channels Output channels
DYNAMIC section 1 DYNAMIC section 2 DYNAMIC section 1
Type
GATE COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR
DUCKING COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard) EXPANDER
COMPRESSOR COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft)
COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard)
EXPANDER DE-ESSER COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft)
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) -72 to 0 (73 points)
This determines the level at which the gate
effect is applied.
RANGE (dB) -∞, -69 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation
when the gate closes.
ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)
This determines how fast the gate opens when
the signal exceeds the threshold level.
HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms - 2.13 sec48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open
once the trigger signal has fallen below the
threshold.
DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how fast the gate closes once
the hold time has expired. The value is
expressed as the duration required for the level
to change by 6 dB.
Input Level Time Time
O
ut pu t L
ev el In pu t L
ev el O
ut pu t L
ev el • I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis
RANGE
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK DECAY
HOLD
Parameter Ra
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)
RANGE (dB) -70 to 0 (71 points)
ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)
HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms -48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1
DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 4648kHz: 5 ms - 42.3
Input Level
O
ut pu t L
ev el • I/O Characteristics
RANGE
THRESHOLD
THRE
Data List
below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
nge Description
This determines the level of input signal
required to trigger the expander.
1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
This determines how soon the expander
returns to its normal gain once the trigger
signal level exceeds the threshold.
.0 sec
sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the signal is
expanded once the signal level drops below
the threshold. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by 6
dB.
oints) This sets the expander's output signal level.
)
This determines how expansion is applied at
the threshold. For higher knee settings,
expansion is applied gradually as the signal
exceeds the specified threshold, creating a
more natural sound.
Time Time
In pu t L
ev el O
ut pu t L
ev el • Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
SHOLD
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE6
COMPRESSOR
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified
RATIO.
The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the
level to the threshold. This means that the limiter's output level never actually exceeds the
threshold.
EXPANDER
An expander attenuates signals
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level at which
compression is applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of compression,
that is, the change in output signal level
relative to change in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be
compressed once the compressor has been
triggered.
RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor
returns to its normal gain once the trigger
signal level drops below the threshold. The
value is expressed as the duration required for
the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor's output signal level.
KNEE Hard, 1-5 (6 points)
This determines how compression is applied
at the threshold. For higher knee settings,
compression is applied gradually as the signal
exceeds the specified threshold, creating a
more natural sound.
Input Level Time Time
O
ut pu t L
ev el In pu t L
ev el O
ut pu t L
ev el • I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
RATIO
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
Parameter Ra
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞
ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)
RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 4648kHz: 5 ms - 42.3
OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 p
KNEE Hard, 1-5 (6 points
Input Level
O
ut pu t L
ev el • I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
RATIO
THRESHOLD
THRE
Data List
Description
reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay,
provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound.
se from three types depending on your location and needs: REV-X HALL,
X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
ert hall reverberation simulation with gate
reverberation simulation with gate
rb designed for vocals, with gate
reverb simulation with gate
o reverb
reflections without the subsequent reverb
d early reflections
d reverse early reflections
le mono delay
le stereo delay
le repeat delay with modulation
(left, center, right) delay
o delay with crossed left/right feedback
us er rietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation
normal chorus
age stereo phase shifter
mically controlled flanger
mically controlled phase shifter
o pitch shifter, producing stable results
o pitch shifter
olo
-panner
ry speaker simulation
modulator
ulated filter
mically controlled filter
rb and chorus in parallel
rb and chorus in series
rb and flanger in parallel
rb and flanger in series
rb and symphonic in parallel
rb and symphonic in series
rb and auto-pan in series
y and early reflections in parallel
y and early reflections in series7
COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1 0 dB and higher ..................................Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold ....................Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width ..........Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an
expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to
maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and
expansion processes.
DE-ESSER
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the
vocal.
Effect Type List
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered.
RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor or
expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger
signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold
respectively. The value is expressed as the duration
required for the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB) -18.0 to 0.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor's output signal level.
WIDTH (dB) 1-90 (90 points)
This determines how far below the threshold
expansion will be applied. The expander is activated
when the level drops below the threshold and width.
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD -54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect is applied.
FREQUENCY 1kHz-12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies.
TYPE HPF, BPF Type of filter used to detect the frequency band.
Q 10.0-0.10 (41 points) Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF.
0dB
Input Level
O
ut pu t L
ev el WIDTH
THRESHOLD
Title Type
REV-X Hall REV-X HALL New
and
Choo
REV-
REV-X Room REV-X ROOM
REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE
Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Conc
Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room
Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reve
Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate
Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stere
Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early
Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gate
Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gate
Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simp
Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simp
Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY Simp
Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap
Echo ECHO Stere
Chorus CHORUS Chor
Flange FLANGE Flang
Symphonic SYMPHONIC Propthan
Phaser PHASER 16-st
Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dyna
Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dyna
HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mon
Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stere
Tremolo TREMOLO Trem
Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto
Rotary ROTARY Rota
Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring
Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Mod
Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dyna
Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reve
RevChorus REVCHORUS Reve
Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reve
RevFlange REVFLANGE Reve
Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reve
RevSympho. REVSYMPHO. Reve
RevPan REVPAN Reve
Delay+Er. DELAY+ER. Dela
DelayEr. DELAYER. Dela
Data List
s M, REV-X PLATE
output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich
d provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the
e types depending on your location and needs: REV-X
X PLATE.
OOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Description
ype is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending
etting.
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Size of room
Gate closing speed
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Reverb density
Delay between early reflections and reverb
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Level at which gate kicks in
Gate opening speed
s-1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
Gate open time
42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Gate closing speed8
Effects Parameter
REV-X HALL, REV-X ROO
Newly-developed two input, two
reverberation, smooth decay, an
original sound. Choose from thre
HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REVREVERB HALL, REVERB R
One input, two output hall, room
Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel
DelayRev DELAYREV Delay and reverb in series
DistDelay DISTDELAY Distortion and delay in series
Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler
Distortion DISTORTION Distortion
Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation
Comp276 COMP276 This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a sought-after classic in recording studios.
Comp276S COMP276S This is a stereo model of COMP276.
Comp260 COMP260 This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter 1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR.
Comp260S COMP260S This is a stereo model of the COMP260.
Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601 This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It can be used to obtain a sense of drive.
OpenDeck OPENDECK This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
Title Type Description
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.28-27.94 s *1
*1. These values are for when the effect t
on the effect type and ROOM SIZE s
INI. DLY 0.0-120.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1-1.4
LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz-18.0 kHz
DIFF. 0-10
ROOM SIZE 0-28
DECAY 0-53
HPF THRU, 22.0 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 1.00 kHz-18.0 kHz, THRU
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
E/R DLY 0.0-100.0 ms
E/R BAL. 0-100%
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
GATE LVL OFF, -60 to 0 dB
ATTACK 0-120 ms
HOLD *1
*1. 0.02 ms-2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 m
DECAY *2
*2. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 msData List
GATE
ctions with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
at delay.
o delay.
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)
Reflection density
High-frequency feedback ratio
Number of early reflections
Feedback gain
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY9
STEREO REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
GATE REVERB, REVERSE
One input, two output early refle
MONO DELAY
One input, one output basic repe
STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stere
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time
REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type
INI. DLY 0.0-100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0-10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density
E/R BAL. 0-100% Balance of early reflections and reverb(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range Description
TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0-10 Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density
ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections
FB GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range
TYPE Type-A, Type-B
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0
LIVENESS 0-10
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
ER NUM. 1-19
FB GAIN -99 to +99%
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
Parameter Range
DELAY 0.0-2730.0 ms
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE *1
*1.
setting)
Parameter Range
DELAY L 0.0-1350.0 ms
DELAY R 0.0-1350.0 ms
FB. G L -99 to +99%
FB. G R -99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE L *1
*1.
NOTE R *1
Data List
y with crossed feedback loop.
ct.
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback delay time
Right channel feedback delay time
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel feedback
DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel feedback
DELAY
Description
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain10
MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
ECHO
Two input, two output stereo dela
CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effe
Parameter Range Description
DELAY 0.0-2725.0 ms Delay time
FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth
WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE *1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE *2
*2.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0-2730.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY C 0.0-2730.0 ms Center channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0-2730.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0-2730.0 ms Feedback delay time
LEVEL L -100 to +100% Left channel delay level
LEVEL C -100 to +100% Center channel delay level
LEVEL R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L *1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE C *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine center channel DELAY
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
Parameter Range
DELAY L 0.0-1350.0 ms
DELAY R 0.0-1350.0 ms
FB.DLY L 0.0-1350.0 ms
FB.DLY R 0.0-1350.0 ms
FB. G L -99 to +99%
FB. G R -99 to +99%
LR FBG -99 to +99%
RL FBG -99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE L *1
*1.
NOTE R *1
NOTE FBL *1
NOTE FBR *1
Parameter Range
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0-100%
PM DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE *1
*1.
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ Q 10.0-0.10
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
Data List
haser.
ly controlled flanger.
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Left and right modulation phase balance
Number of phase shift stages
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Decay speed
Delay time offset
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain11
FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage p
DYNA.FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamical
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0-100%
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
OFFSET 0-100
PHASE 0.00-354.38 degrees
STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE *1
*1.
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
Parameter Range
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI
SENSE 0-100
DIR. UP, DOWN
DECAY *1
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 msOFFSET 0-100
FB.GAIN -99 to +99%
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ Q 10.0-0.10
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
Data List
r. ect.
Description
Channel #1 pitch shift
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse
phase)
Channel #1 pan
Channel #1 delay time
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Channel #2 pitch shift
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse
phase)
Channel #2 pan
Channel #2 delay time
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
Tempo parameter sync on/off
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain12
DYNA.PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
HQ.PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifte
TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo eff
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source:input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE 0-100 Sensitivity
DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY *1
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Decay speed
OFFSET 0-100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
PITCH -12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift
FINE -50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine
DELAY 0.0-1000.0 ms Delay time
FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE 1-10 Pitch shift precision
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Parameter Range
PITCH 1 -24 to +24 semitones
FINE 1 -50 to +50 cents
LEVEL 1 -100 to +100%
PAN 1 L63 to R63
DELAY 1 0.0-1000.0 ms
FB. G 1 -99 to +99%
MODE 1-10
PITCH 2 -24 to +24 semitones
FINE 2 -50 to +50 cents
LEVEL 2 -100 to +100%
PAN 2 L63 to R63
DELAY 2 0.0-1000.0 ms
FB. G 2 -99 to +99%
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE 1 *1
*1.
NOTE 2 *1
Parameter Range
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0-100%
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE *1
*1.
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ Q 10.0-0.10
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
Data List
tor.
filter.
controlled filter.
Description
odulation source: oscillator or input signal
scillator frequency
scillator frequency modulation speed
scillator frequency modulation depth
empo parameter sync on/off
sed in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
Description
odulation speed
odulation depth
eft-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
ilter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
ilter frequency offset
ilter resonance
utput level
empo parameter sync on/off
sed in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Description
ontrol source:
nput signal or MIDI Note On velocity
ensitivity
pward or downward frequency change
2.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
ilter frequency change decay speed
ilter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
ilter frequency offset
ilter resonance
utput level13
AUTOPAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modula
MOD.FILTER
Two input, two output modulation
DYNA.FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth
DIR. *1
*1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R
Panning direction
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *2
*2.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start
SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed(see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW 0.05-10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed
FAST 0.05-10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed
DRIVE 0-100 Overdrive level
ACCEL 0-10 Acceleration at speed changes
LOW 0-100 Low-frequency filter
HIGH 0-100 High-frequency filter
Parameter Range
SOURCE OSC, SELF M
OSC FREQ 0.0-5000.0 Hz O
FM FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz O
FM DEPTH 0-100% O
SYNC OFF/ON T
FM NOTE *1
*1.
U
Parameter Range
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz M
DEPTH 0-100% M
PHASE 0.00-354.38 degrees L
TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF F
OFFSET 0-100 F
RESO. 0-20 F
LEVEL 0-100 O
SYNC OFF/ON T
NOTE *1
*1.
U
Parameter Range
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Ci
SENSE 0-100 S
DIR. UP, DOWN U
DECAY *1
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-4
F
TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF F
OFFSET 0-100 F
RESO. 0-20 F
LEVEL 0-100 O
Data List
flanger effects in parallel.
flanger effects in series.
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Reverb and flange balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Reverb and flanged reverb balance
(0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ14
REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
REVCHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and
REVFLANGE
One input, two output reverb and
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density
REV/CHO 0-100% Reverb and chorus balance(0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0-100% Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density
REV.BAL 0-100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance(0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0-100% Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
REV/FLG 0-100%
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE *1
*1.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
REV.BAL 0-100%
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE *1
*1.
Data List
ted reverb and auto-pan effect.
early reflections effects in parallel.
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all
reverb)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early
reflections)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Diffusion (spread)
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY15
REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
REVSYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
REVPAN
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connec
DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density
REV/SYM 0-100% Reverb and symphonic balance(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density
REV.BAL 0-100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance(0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
REV.BAL 0-100%
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0-100%
DIR. *1
*1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE *2
*2.
Parameter Range
DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms
DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms
FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DLY/ER 0-100%
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0
LIVENESS 0-10
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
ER NUM. 1-19
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE L *1
*1.
NOTE R *1
NOTE FB *1
Data List
reverb effects in series.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
Description16
DELAYER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
DELAYREV
One input, two output delay and
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY.BAL 0-100% Delay and early reflected delay balance(0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density
ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L *1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY/REV 0-100% Delay and reverb balance(0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)
DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L *1
NOTE R *1
NOTE FB *1
*1.
Parameter Range
DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms
DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms
FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
DELAY HI 0.1-1.0
DLY.BAL 0-100%
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
REV HI 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
SYNC OFF/ON
NOTE L *1
*1.
NOTE R *1
NOTE FB *1
Parameter Range
Data List
pler.
effect.
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY
buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the
REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal.
Recording delay.
For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus
values, recording starts before the trigger is received.
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the PLAY button is
pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has
been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP
NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or
playback)
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the
duration of the TRG MASK time.
5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
Playback start point in milliseconds
Playback end point in milliseconds
Loop start point in milliseconds
Number of times the sample plays
Playback pitch shift
Playback pitch shift fine
The PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.
Playback start point in samples
Playback end point in samples
Loop start point in samples
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone control
Noise reduction17
DISTDELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
FREEZE
One input, two output basic sam
DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion
Parameter Range Description
DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE 0-100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0-100 Master volume
TONE -10 to +10 Tone control
N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE *1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE *2
*2.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
DELAY 0.0-2725.0 ms Delay time
FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth
DLY.BAL 0-100% Distortion and delay balance(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
Parameter Range Description
TYPE 1 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency
LEVEL 1 0-100 Filter 1 level
RESO. 1 0-20 Filter 1 resonance
TYPE 2 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency
LEVEL 2 0-100 Filter 2 level
RESO. 2 0-20 Filter 2 resonance
TYPE 3 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency
LEVEL 3 0-100 Filter 3 level
RESO. 3 0-20 Filter 3 resonance
Parameter Range
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
REC DLY -1000 to +1000 ms
PLY MODE MOMENT, CONTI., INPUT
TRG LVL -60 to 0 dB
TRG MASK 0-1000 ms
START *1
*1. 0.0-5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 msEND *1
LOOP *1
LOOP
NUM 0-100
PITCH -12 to +12 semitones
FINE -50 to +50 cents
MIDI TRG OFF, C1-C6, ALL
START
[SAMPLE] 0-131000
END
[SAMPLE] 0-131000
LOOP
[SAMPLE] 0-131000
Parameter Range
DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH
DRIVE 0-100
MASTER 0-100
TONE -10 to +10
N. GATE 0-20
Data List
ristics of analog compressors that are widely used in
thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You
channel parameters.
ristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard
onaural channels independently. You can also link several
ristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard
trol the L and R channel parameters.
Description
Adjusts the input level
Adjusts the output gain
Ratio of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is
applied
When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
Description
Threshold of CH compressor
Knee of CH1 compressor
Attack time of CH1 compressor
Release time of CH1 compressor
Ratio for CH1 compressor
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
Threshold of CH2 compressor
Knee of CH2 compressor
Attack time of CH2 compressor
Release time of CH2 compressor
Ratio of CH2 compressor
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and
RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked
Description
Threshold of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Adjusts the output gain18
AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
COMP276
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in
recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You
can control two monaural channels independently.
COMP276S
This effect emulates the characte
recording studios. It produces a
can link and control the L and R
COMP260
This effect emulates the characte
for live SR. You can control two m
parameters via stereo links.
COMP260S
This effect emulates the characte
for live SR. You can link and con
Parameter Range Description
AMP TYPE *1
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE 0-100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0-100 Master volume
BASS 0-100 Bass tone control
MIDDLE 0-100 Middle tone control
TREBLE 0-100 High tone control
N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction
CAB DEP 0-100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
Parameter Range Description
INPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 input level
OUTPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain
RATIO 1 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio for CH1 compressor
ATTACK 1 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of CH1 compressor
RELEASE1 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of CH1 compressor
MAKE UP1 OFF, ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is applied
SIDEHPF1 OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
INPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 input level
OUTPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain
RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor
ATTACK 2 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor
RELEASE2 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of CH2 compressor
MAKE UP2 OFF, ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is applied
SIDEHPF2 OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
Parameter Range
INPUT -180 to 0 dB
OUTPUT -180 to 0 dB
RATIO 1:2, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1
ATTACK 0.022-50.4 ms
RELEASE 10.88-544.22 ms
MAKE UP OFF, ON
SIDE HPF OFF, ON
Parameter Range
THRE.1 -60 to 0.0 dB
KNEE1 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
ATTACK1 0.01-80.0 ms
RELEASE1 6.2-999 ms
RATIO1 1.0-500, ∞
OUTPUT1 -20 to 40 dB
THRE.2 -60 to 0.0 dB
KNEE2 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
ATTACK2 0.01-80.0 ms
RELEASE2 6.2-999 ms
RATIO2 1.0-500, ∞
OUTPUT2 -20 to 40 dB
ST LINK OFF, ON
Parameter Range
THRE. -60 to 0.0 dB
KNEE SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
ATTACK 0.01-80.0 ms
RELEASE 6.2-999 ms
RATIO 1.0-500, ∞
OUTPUT -20 to 40 dB
Data List
created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck
ange the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such
ayback speed, etc.
amically controlled processor, with individual solo and gain
.
Description
Selects the recording deck type
Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape
compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts
the sound.
Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck
Adjusts the bias of the recording deck
Selects the playback deck type
Adjusts the output level of the playback deck
Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck
Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck
When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change,
maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of
distortion without changing the output level.
Selects the tape speed
Selects the tape type
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
Filter slope
Low band gain
Mid band gain
High band gain
Overall gain
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
Threshold of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Bypasses the compressor
Threshold of the expander
Ratio of the expander
Release time of the expander
Bypasses the expander
Threshold of the limiter19
EQUALIZER601
This effect emulates the characteristics of 70's analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion
of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound.
OPENDECK
It emulates the tape compression
and a playback deck). You can ch
as the deck type, tape quality, pl
M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dyn
reduction metering for each band
Parameter Range Description
LO TYPE HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2 Type of EQ1
LO F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Cut-off frequency of EQ1
LO G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ1
MID1 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ2
MID1 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ2
MID1 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ2
MID2 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ3
MID2 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ3
MID2 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ3
INPUT -18.0 to +18.0 dB Input gain
OUTPUT -18.0 to +18.0 dB Output gain
MID3 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ4
MID3 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ4
MID3 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ4
MID4 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ5
MID4 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ5
MID4 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ5
HI TYPE LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2 Type of EQ6
HI F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz *1
*1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2)
Cut-off frequency of EQ6
HI G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ6
LO SW OFF, ON Switches EQ1 on/off
MID1 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ2 on/off
MID2 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ3 on/off
MID3 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ4 on/off
MID4 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ5 on/off
HI SW OFF, ON Switches EQ6 on/off
TYPE CLEAN, DRIVE
Selects the equalizer type.
The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound,
emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The
DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog
flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits.
Parameter Range
REC DEC Swss70, Swss78, Swss85, Amer70
REC LVL -96.0 to +18.0 dB
REC HI -6.0 to +6.0 dB
REC BIAS -1.00 to +1.00
REPR DEC Swss70, Swss78, Swss85, Amer70
REPR LVL -96.0 to +18.0 dB
REPR HI -6.0 to +6.0 dB
REPR LO -6.0 to +6.0 dB
MAKE UP Off, On
TP SPEED 15ips, 30ips
TP KIND Old, New
Parameter Range
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
SLOPE -6 dB, -12 dB
LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
HI. GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
TOTAL -72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
CEILING -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
CMP.THRE -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
CMP.RAT 1:1 to 20:1
CMP.ATK 0-120 ms
CMP.REL *1
CMP.KNEE 0-5
CMP.BYP OFF/ON
EXP.THRE -54.0 dB to -24.0 dB
EXP.RAT 1:1 to 5:1
EXP.REL *1
EXP.BYP OFF/ON
LIM.THRE -12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Data List
cessor Parameters
Q made by the RND company.
sor/limiter made by the RND company.
Description
Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will
pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Input gain
Center frequency of the LF band
Gain of the LF band
Switches the LMF band on/off
Q of the LMF band
Center frequency of the LMF band
Gain of the LMF band
Switches the MF band on/off
Q of the MF band
Center frequency of the MF band
Gain of the MF band
Switches the HMF band on/off
Q of the HMF band
Center frequency of the HMF band
Gain of the HMF band
Switches the LF/HF bands on/off
Center frequency of the HF band
Gain of the HF band
Description
Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will
be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through
the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type
Threshold level
Compression ratio
Attack time
Release time
Output level20
M.BAND COMP
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for
each band.
Premium Rack Pro
Portico5033
This models an analog 5-band E
Portico5043
This models an analog compres
LIM.ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the limiter
LIM.REL *1 Release time of the limiter
LIM.KNEE 0-5 Knee of the limiter
LIM.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the limiter
PRESENCE -10 to +10
Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the
threshold of the low band. Negative (-) values do the opposite. If this is
set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way.
LOOKUP 0.0-100.0 ms Lookup delay
MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Parameter Range Description
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
SLOPE -6 dB, -12 dB Filter slope
LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain
MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain
HI. GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain
TOTAL -72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain
CEILING -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
LOW THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the low band compressor
LOW RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the low band compressor
LOW ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the low band compressor
LOW REL *1
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Release time of the low band compressor
LOW KNEE 0-5 Knee of the low band compressor
LOW BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the low band compressor
MID THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the mid band compressor
MID RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the mid band compressor
MID ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the mid band compressor
MID REL *1 Release time of the mid band compressor
MID KNEE 0-5 Knee of the mid band compressor
MID BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the mid band compressor
HI. THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the high band compressor
HI. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the high band compressor
HI. ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the high band compressor
HI. RAT *1 Release time of the high band compressor
HI. KNEE 0-5 Knee of the high band compressor
HI. BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the high band compressor
LOOKUP 0.0-100.0 ms Lookup delay
MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level
Parameter Range Description
Parameter Range
ALL BYPASS OFF, ON
TRIM -12.0 to 12.0 dB
LF FREQ 30.00 to 300.0 Hz
LF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB
LMF IN OFF, ON
LMF Q 0.70 to 5.00
LMF FREQ 50.00 to 400.0 Hz
LMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB
MF IN OFF, ON
MF Q 0.70 to 5.00
MF FREQ 330.0 to 2500 Hz
MF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB
HMF IN OFF, ON
HMF Q 0.70 to 5.00
HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz
HMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB
LF/HF IN OFF, ON
HF FREQ 2.50k to 25.0k Hz
HF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB
Parameter Range
IN OFF, ON
FB OFF, ON
THRESHOLD -50.0 to 0.0 dB
RATIO 1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT
ATTACK 20 to 75 ms
RELEASE 100 ms to 2.50 sec
GAIN -6.0 to 20.0 dB
Data List
er that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the
nt of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or
e Description
Turns the corresponding band on/off
If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will
be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics
will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/
MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent.
Hi Shelf Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter
z Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter
Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter
B Threshold value at which processing begins to apply
0 Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal
Specifies whether the processor will operate when the
sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or
when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW)
TO Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is applied
e Description
B
Input gain. However, the output gain is also linked so that there
is no change in the pass-through volume. For example, if
INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output
gain is -5dB.
Stereo link function (STEREO only)
Meter switch (STEREO only)
Meter switch (DUAL only)
Compressor on/off
4:1, 6:1 Ratio of the compressor
Compressor gain
, 800ms,
Compressor release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2
(auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically
between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically
between 50 ms and 5 sec.
Threshold of the compressor
Limiter on/off
Attack time of the limiter FAST: 2 ms, SLOW: 4 ms
200ms,
Limiter release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto
2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between
100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms
and 5 sec.
Threshold of the limiter21
U76
This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations.
Opt-2A
This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor.
EQ-1A
This processor emulates a vintage EQ that's considered a classic example of a passive EQ.
Dynamic EQ
This is a newly developed equaliz
input signal, controlling the amou
expander.
Buss Comp 369
Parameter Range Description
INPUT -96.0 to 0.0 dB Input level
OUTPUT -96.0 to 0.0 dB Output level
ATTACK 5.50 to 0.10 ms Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest attack.
RELEASE 1100.0 to 56.4 ms Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest release.
RATIO ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20 Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect.
METER OFF, +4, +8, GR Switches the meter display
Parameter Range Description
GAIN -56.0 dB to 40.0 dB Output level
PEAK REDUCTION -48.0 dB to 48.0 dB Amount of gain reduction
RATIO 2.00 to 10.00 Compression ratio
METER SELECT
OUTPUT+10,
GAIN REDUCTION,
OUTPUT+4
Switches the meter display
Parameter Range Description
LOW FREQUENCY 20, 30, 60, 100 Hz Frequency range of the low range filter
(LOW) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the low range filter
(LOW) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the low range filter
HIGH FREQUENCY 3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz Frequency range of the high range filter
(HIGH) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the high range filter
(HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0 Band width of the high range filter
(HIGH) ATTEN SEL 5k, 10k, 20k Hz Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter
(HIGH) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the high range filter
IN OFF, ON
Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section
will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the
input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Parameter Rang
BAND ON/OFF OFF, ON
SIDECHAIN CUE OFF, ON
SIDECHAIN LISTEN OFF, ON
FILTER TYPE Low Shelf, Bell,
FREQUENCY 20.0 to 20.0k H
Q 15.0 to 0.50
THRESHOLD -80.0 to 10.0 d
RATIO ∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.5
MODE BELOW, ABOVE
ATTACK/RELEASE FAST, SLOW, AU
Parameter Rang
INPUT ADJUST -15.0 to +15.0d
LINK ON, OFF
METER IN, GR, OUT
VU IN, OUT
COMP IN ON, OFF
COMP RATIO 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1,
COMP GAIN 0.0 to +20.0dB
COMP RECOVERY 100ms, 400ms1500ms, a1, a2
COMP THRESHOLD -40 to -5dBFS
LIMIT IN ON, OFF
LIMIT ATTACK FAST, SLOW
LIMIT RECOVERY 50ms, 100ms, 800ms, a1, a2
LIMIT THRESHOLD -16 to -5 dBFS
Data List
n Be Assigned to Control Changes
Parameter 1 Parameter 2

MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-STEREO R
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)


CUE MODE —
ELEASE ON —
OINT —
INT —
POINT —

EL H —
EL L —


CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
DCA 1-DCA16
DCA 1-DCA 16
CH 1-CH 72*1
RACK1-8E
PARAM 32 L
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
GEQ RACK1-GEQ RACK16
EFFECT RACK1- EFFECT
RACK8IN 31A
N 31B22
Automixer Parameters Parameters That Ca
Parameter Range Description
Group a, b, c Channel control field group
Override OFF, ON Turns on/off overriding of the channel control field
ChMode man, auto, mute Channel control field mode (man/auto/mute)
ChModePreset man, auto, mute Preset setting of the channel control field
Weight -100 to 15 Relative sensitivity among input channels in the channel control field
MeterType gain, input, output Meter type of the master field
MasterOverride OFF, ON Turns on/off overriding of the master field
MasterMute OFF, ON Turns on/off the mute setting of the master field
Gain 0 to 127 Automixer gain displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “gain”
InputLevel 0 to 127 Input level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “input”
OutputLevel 0 to 127 Output level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “output”
PostWeightingFilter 0 to 127 Level indicator of the channel control field
Mode
NO ASSIGN —
BALANCE OUTPUT
CH ON
INPUT
OUTPUT
CUE
OUTPUT
CUE MODE
SURROUND
FADER CUE R
INPUT CUE P
DCA CUE PO
OUTPUT CUE
DCA UNITY
OUTPUT LEV
OUTPUT LEV
ACTIVE CUE
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH
DCA
ON
FADER H
FADER L
DIRECT OUT ON
EFFECT
BYPASS
MIX BALANC
PARAM 1 H -
FADER H
INPUT
OUTPUT
FADER L
INPUT
OUTPUT
GEQ
ON A
ON B
GAIN 1A-GA
GAIN 1B-GAI
Data List
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
IX24 ON
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
- MATRIX 8 ON
- MIX 24 POINT
INT - MATRIX 8 POINT
X24H
MATRIX8 H
X24L
MATRIX8 L
- MIX 23/24 PAN
AN - MATRIX7/8 PAN
INT - MATRIX 8 POINT
MIX 1-MIX 24
- MATRIX 8 ON
VEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
VEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN
N
MIX 1-MIX 24N

CT
N
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
OMNI 1-2-OMNI 7-8
PB OUT

EL LINK
PTION
ITOR
DER H
DER L
BYPASS
MASTER 1-MASTER 8
MIX1-MIX24
MATRIX1-MATRIX8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
Parameter 1 Parameter 223
INPUT ATT INPUT CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
INPUT DYNAMICS1
ON
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY/RELEASE H
DECAY/RELEASE L
RATIO
KNEE
GAIN H
GAIN L
INPUT DYNAMICS2
ON
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO/TYPE
GAIN H
GAIN L/Q
KNEE/WIDTH
FILTER FREQ
INPUT EQ
ON
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT HPF
ON CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R FREQ
INSERT
INPUT CH 1-CH 72*1
OUTPUT
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
LCR
ON
CSR
MIX/MATRIX SEND
MIX 1 ON - M
MATRIX 1 ON
MIX 1 POINT
MATRIX 1 PO
MIX 1 H - MI
MATRIX1 H -
MIX 1 L - MI
MATRIX1 L -
MIX 1/2 PAN
MATRIX1/2 P
MIX TO MATRIX
MATRIX 1 PO
MATRIX 1 ON
MATRIX 1 LE
MATRIX 1 LE
MATRIX 1/2
MIX TO STEREO
TO STEREO O
TO MONO O
PAN
MONITOR
OUTPUT
SOURCE SELE
DEFINE ASSIG
DIMMER ON
PHONES LEV
CUE INTERRU
MONO MON
MONITOR FA
MONITOR FA
DELAY AUTO
DELAY ON
MUTE MASTER ON
OUTPUT ATT OUTPUT
OUTPUT DYNAMICS1
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
Mode
Data List
L
GEQ RACK 1A-16B
EFFECT RACK 1A-8B
SS
H
L
SS
H
L
SS
H
L
SS
H
L
EQ H
EQ L
EQ H
EQ L
N
EQ H
EQ L
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
RACK1-8
PARAM 64 L
RACK1-8
PARAM 64 L
Parameter 1 Parameter 224
OUTPUT EQ
ON
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW HPF ON
HIGH LPF ON
PAN/BALANCE INPUT CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
PEQ
A/B LINK
GEQ RACK 1A-16B
EFFECT RACK 1A-8B
ON
BAND1 BYPASS
BAND1 GAIN H
BAND1 GAIN L
BAND1 FREQ
BAND1 Q
BAND2 BYPASS
BAND2 GAIN H
BAND2 GAIN L
BAND2 FREQ
BAND2 Q
BAND3 BYPASS
BAND3 GAIN H
BAND3 GAIN L
BAND3 FREQ
BAND3 Q
BAND4 BYPASS
BAND4 GAIN H
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
PEQ
BAND4 GAIN
BAND4 FREQ
BAND4 Q
BAND5 BYPA
BAND5 GAIN
BAND5 GAIN
BAND5 FREQ
BAND5 Q
BAND6 BYPA
BAND6 GAIN
BAND6 GAIN
BAND6 FREQ
BAND6 Q
BAND7 BYPA
BAND7 GAIN
BAND7 GAIN
BAND7 FREQ
BAND7 Q
BAND8 BYPA
BAND8 GAIN
BAND8 GAIN
BAND8 FREQ
BAND8 Q
HPF ON
HPF FREQ
HPF SLOPE
LPF ON
LPF FREQ
LPF SLOPE
NOTCH A ON
NOTCH A FR
NOTCH A FR
NOTCH A Q
NOTCH B ON
NOTCH B FR
NOTCH B FR
NOTCH B Q
NOTCH C O
NOTCH C FR
NOTCH C FR
NOTCH C Q
PHASE INPUT
PREMIUM EFFECT A
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H -
PREMIUM EFFECT B
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H -
Mode
Data List25
RECALL SAFE ON
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
GEQ RACK 1A-16B
EFFECT RACK 1A-8B
PREMIUM RACK 1A-8B
DCA 1-DCA16
STEREO TO MATRIX
MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT
STEREO L-MONO(C)
MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN
SURROUND MONITOR
SOURCE SELECT

2CH MONITOR ASSIGN
DOWNMIX
SURROUND SPEAKER SOLO
SURROUND SPEAKER L
SURROUND SPEAKER R
SURROUND SPEAKER C
SURROUND SPEAKER LFE
SURROUND SPEAKER Ls
SURROUND SPEAKER Rs
SURROUND PAN
LR PAN
SELECTED CH
CH 1-CH 72*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
FR PAN
FR PAN REVERSE
DIV
L ON
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
Ls ON
Rs ON
LFE LEVEL H
LFE LEVEL L
TO MONO ON CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
TO STEREO ON CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
*1. CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Data List
INPUT57-64 EQ
LOW TYPE 11EA 11F1
HIGH TYPE 11F2 11F9
INPUT57-64 HPF FREQ 11FA 1201
INPUT57-64 to MIX1/2-
7/8 PAN
MIX1/2 1202 1209
MIX3/4 120A 1211
MIX5/6 1212 1219
MIX7/8 121A 1221
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6 1222 1229
MATRIX7/8 122A 1231
INPUT57-64 to STEREO ON 1232 1239
INPUT57-64 RECALL
SAFE ON 123A 1241
INPUT57-64 to MONO ON 1242 1249
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS1
RATIO 124A 1259
KNEE/WIDTH 125A 1269
GAIN 126A 1279
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS2
reserved 127A 1289
FILTER FREQ 128A 1299
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
RECALL SAFE ON 129A 12A9
EQ INPUT, MIX1-20,
MATRIX, STEREO LR
ON 1304 1381
LOW Q 1382 13FF
LOW FREQ 1400 147D
LOW GAIN 147E 14FB
LOW MID Q 14FC 1579
LOW MID FREQ 157A 15F7
LOW MID GAIN 15F8 1675
HIGH MID Q 1676 16F3
HIGH MID FREQ 16F4 1771
HIGH MID GAIN 1772 17EF
HIGH Q 17F0 186D
HIGH FREQ 186E 18EB
HIGH GAIN 18EC 1969
ATT 196A 19C1
HPF ON 19E8 1A65
LPF ON 1A66 1AE3
INPUT DYNAMICS1
ON 1AE4 1B3B
ATTACK 1B44 1B9B
THRESHOLD 1BA4 1BFB
RANGE 1C04 1C5B
HOLD 1C64 1CBB
DECAY/RELEASE 1CC4 1D1B
INPUT DYNAMICS2 ON 1D24 1DA1
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR DYNAMICS1
ATTACK 1DA2 1E1F
THRESHOLD 1E20 1E9D
RELEASE 1E9E 1F1B
RATIO 1F1C 1F99
GAIN 1F9A 2017
KNEE/WIDTH 2018 2095
PAN/BALANCE INPUT 2096 20ED
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)26
NRPN Parameter Assignments
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
FADER
INPUT 0000 0057
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR 0060 007D
INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL
MIX9 SEND 007E 00D5
MIX10 SEND 00DE 0135
MIX11 SEND 013E 0195
MIX12 SEND 019E 01F5
MIX13 SEND 01FE 0255
MIX14 SEND 025E 02B5
MIX15 SEND 02BE 0315
MIX16 SEND 031E 0375
INPUT to MATRIX1 - 4
LEVEL
MATRIX1 SEND 037E 03D5
MATRIX2 SEND 03DE 0435
MATRIX3 SEND 043E 0495
MATRIX4 SEND 049E 04F5
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX LEVEL
MATRIX1 SEND 04FE 0513
MATRIX2 SEND 0514 0529
MATRIX3 SEND 052A 053F
MATRIX4 SEND 0540 0555
MATRIX5 SEND 0556 056B
MATRIX6 SEND 056C 0581
MATRIX7 SEND 0582 0597
MATRIX8 SEND 0598 05AD
ON
INPUT 05B6 060D
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR 0616 0633
INPUT to MIX9-16 ON
MIX9 SEND 0634 068B
MIX10 SEND 0694 06EB
MIX11 SEND 06F4 074B
MIX12 SEND 0754 07AB
MIX13 SEND 07B4 080B
MIX14 SEND 0814 086B
MIX15 SEND 0874 08CB
MIX16 SEND 08D4 092B
INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON
MATRIX1 SEND 0934 098B
MATRIX2 SEND 0994 09EB
MATRIX3 SEND 09F4 0A4B
MATRIX4 SEND 0A54 0AAB
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX ON
MATRIX1 SEND 0AB4 0AC9
MATRIX2 SEND 0ACA 0ADF
MATRIX3 SEND 0AE0 0AF5
MATRIX4 SEND 0AF6 0B0B
MATRIX5 SEND 0B0C 0B21
MATRIX6 SEND 0B22 0B37
MATRIX7 SEND 0B38 0B4D
MATRIX8 SEND 0B4E 0B63
MIX1-8 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST 0B64 0B6B
PHASE INPUT 0B6C 0BC3
INSERT ON
INPUT 0BCC 0C13
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR 0C2C 0C49
INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/
POST
MIX9 SEND 0C4A 0CA1
MIX10 SEND 0CAA 0D01
MIX11 SEND 0D0A 0D61
MIX12 SEND 0D6A 0DC1
MIX13 SEND 0DCA 0E21
MIX14 SEND 0E2A 0E81
MIX15 SEND 0E8A 0EE1
MIX16 SEND 0EEA 0F41
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
PRE/POST
MATRIX1 SEND 0F4A 0FA1
MATRIX2 SEND 0FAA 1001
MATRIX3 SEND 100A 1061
MATRIX4 SEND 106A 10C1
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
LEVEL
MIX1 SEND 10CA 10D1
MIX2 SEND 10D2 10D9
MIX3 SEND 10DA 10E1
MIX4 SEND 10E2 10E9
MIX5 SEND 10EA 10F1
MIX6 SEND 10F2 10F9
MIX7 SEND 10FA 1101
MIX8 SEND 1102 1109
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND 110A 1111
MATRIX6 SEND 1112 1119
MATRIX7 SEND 111A 1121
MATRIX8 SEND 1122 1129
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
ON
MIX1 SEND 112A 1131
MIX2 SEND 1132 1139
MIX3 SEND 113A 1141
MIX4 SEND 1142 1149
MIX5 SEND 114A 1151
MIX6 SEND 1152 1159
MIX7 SEND 115A 1161
MIX8 SEND 1162 1169
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX5 SEND 116A 1171
MATRIX6 SEND 1172 1179
MATRIX7 SEND 117A 1181
MATRIX8 SEND 1182 1189
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
PRE/POST
MIX1 SEND 118A 1191
MIX2 SEND 1192 1199
MIX3 SEND 119A 11A1
MIX4 SEND 11A2 11A9
MIX5 SEND 11AA 11B1
MIX6 SEND 11B2 11B9
MIX7 SEND 11BA 11C1
MIX8 SEND 11C2 11C9
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX5 SEND 11CA 11D1
MATRIX6 SEND 11D2 11D9
MATRIX7 SEND 11DA 11E1
MATRIX8 SEND 11E2 11E9
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Data List
GEQ RACK1A-3B
ON 27C4 27C9
GAIN1 27CA 27CF
GAIN2 27D0 27D5
GAIN3 27D6 27DB
GAIN4 27DC 27E1
GAIN5 27E2 27E7
GAIN6 27E8 27ED
GAIN7 27EE 27F3
GAIN8 27F4 27F9
GAIN9 27FA 27FF
GAIN10 2800 2805
GAIN11 2806 280B
GAIN12 280C 2811
GAIN13 2812 2817
GAIN14 2818 281D
GAIN15 281E 2823
GAIN16 2824 2829
GAIN17 282A 282F
GAIN18 2830 2835
GAIN19 2836 283B
GAIN20 283C 2841
GAIN21 2842 2847
GAIN22 2848 284D
GAIN23 284E 2853
GAIN24 2854 2859
GAIN25 285A 285F
GAIN26 2860 2865
GAIN27 2866 286B
GAIN28 286C 2871
GAIN29 2872 2877
GAIN30 2878 287D
GAIN31 287E 2883
FADER MIX21-24, MONO 28E4 28E8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
MIX1 SEND 28EA 2929
MIX2 SEND 292A 2969
MIX3 SEND 296A 29A9
MIX4 SEND 29AA 29E9
MIX5 SEND 29EA 2A29
MIX6 SEND 2A2A 2A69
MIX7 SEND 2A6A 2AA9
MIX8 SEND 2AAA 2AE9
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND 2AEA 2B29
MATRIX6 SEND 2B2A 2B69
MATRIX7 SEND 2B6A 2BA9
MATRIX8 SEND 2BAA 2BE9
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)27
INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16
PAN
MIX9/10 20F6 214D
MIX11/12 2156 21AD
MIX13/14 21B6 220D
MIX15/16 2216 226D
INPUT to MATRIX1/2,
3/4 PAN
MATRIX1/2 2276 22CD
MATRIX3/4 22D6 232D
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX PAN
MATRIX1/2 2336 234B
MATRIX3/4 234C 2361
MATRIX5/6 2362 2377
MATRIX7/8 2378 238D
MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST 238E 2395
BALANCE MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR 2396 23B3
MIX, STEREO LR, MONO
to MATRIX PRE/POST
MATRIX1 SEND 23B4 23CE
MATRIX2 SEND 23D0 23EA
MATRIX3 SEND 23EC 2406
MATRIX4 SEND 2408 2422
MATRIX5 SEND 2424 243E
MATRIX6 SEND 2440 245A
MATRIX7 SEND 245C 2476
MATRIX8 SEND 2478 2492
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX ON
MATRIX1 SEND 2494 2498
MATRIX2 SEND 249A 249E
MATRIX3 SEND 24A0 24A4
MATRIX4 SEND 24A6 24AA
MATRIX5 SEND 24AC 24B0
MATRIX6 SEND 24B2 24B6
MATRIX7 SEND 24B8 24BC
MATRIX8 SEND 24BE 24C2
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
MIX1 SEND 24C4 24D3
MIX2 SEND 24D4 24E3
MIX3 SEND 24E4 24F3
MIX4 SEND 24F4 2503
MIX5 SEND 2504 2513
MIX6 SEND 2514 2523
MIX7 SEND 2524 2533
MIX8 SEND 2534 2543
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 ON
MIX1 SEND 2544 2553
MIX2 SEND 2554 2563
MIX3 SEND 2564 2573
MIX4 SEND 2574 2583
MIX5 SEND 2584 2593
MIX6 SEND 2594 25A3
MIX7 SEND 25A4 25B3
MIX8 SEND 25B4 25C3
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
MIX1 SEND 25C4 25D3
MIX2 SEND 25D4 25E3
MIX3 SEND 25E4 25F3
MIX4 SEND 25F4 2603
MIX5 SEND 2604 2613
MIX6 SEND 2614 2623
MIX7 SEND 2624 2633
MIX8 SEND 2634 2643
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MIX1/2 2644 2653
MIX3/4 2654 2663
MIX5/6 2664 2673
MIX7/8 2674 2683
EFFECT RACK1-8
BYPASS 26B4 26BB
MIX BALANCE 26BC 26C3
PARAM1 26C4 26CB
PARAM2 26CC 26D3
PARAM3 26D4 26DB
PARAM4 26DC 26E3
PARAM5 26E4 26EB
PARAM6 26EC 26F3
PARAM7 26F4 26FB
PARAM8 26FC 2703
PARAM9 2704 270B
PARAM10 270C 2713
PARAM11 2714 271B
PARAM12 271C 2723
PARAM13 2724 272B
PARAM14 272C 2733
PARAM15 2734 273B
PARAM16 273C 2743
PARAM17 2744 274B
PARAM18 274C 2753
PARAM19 2754 275B
PARAM20 275C 2763
PARAM21 2764 276B
PARAM22 276C 2773
PARAM23 2774 277B
PARAM24 277C 2783
PARAM25 2784 278B
PARAM26 278C 2793
PARAM27 2794 279B
PARAM28 279C 27A3
PARAM29 27A4 27AB
PARAM30 27AC 27B3
PARAM31 27B4 27BB
PARAM32 27BC 27C3
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Data List
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MATRIX1/2 382A 382E
MATRIX3/4 3830 3834
MATRIX5/6 3836 383A
MATRIX7/8 383C 3840
MIX9-24 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST 3842 3851
GEQ RACK4A-6B
ON 3852 3857
GAIN1 3858 385D
GAIN2 385E 3863
GAIN3 3864 3869
GAIN4 386A 386F
GAIN5 3870 3875
GAIN6 3876 387B
GAIN7 387C 3881
GAIN8 3882 3887
GAIN9 3888 388D
GAIN10 388E 3893
GAIN11 3894 3899
GAIN12 389A 389F
GAIN13 38A0 38A5
GAIN14 38A6 38AB
GAIN15 38AC 38B1
GAIN16 38B2 38B7
GAIN17 38B8 38BD
GAIN18 38BE 38C3
GAIN19 38C4 38C9
GAIN20 38CA 38CF
GAIN21 38D0 38D5
GAIN22 38D6 38DB
GAIN23 38DC 38E1
GAIN24 38E2 38E7
GAIN25 38E8 38ED
GAIN26 38EE 38F3
GAIN27 38F4 38F9
GAIN28 38FA 38FF
GAIN29 3900 3905
GAIN30 3906 390B
GAIN31 390C 3911
LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4,
MIX1-16
ON 3912 3969
CSR 396A 39C1
DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON 39C2 3A01
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
STEREO ON 3A02 3A41
DCA1-12
ON 3A42 3A4D
FADER 3A4E 3A59
MUTE MASTER ON 3A5A 3A61
RECALL SAFE ON 3A66 3B05
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)28
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX LEVEL
MATRIX1 SEND 2BEA 2BEE
MATRIX2 SEND 2BF0 2BF4
MATRIX3 SEND 2BF6 2BFA
MATRIX4 SEND 2BFC 2C00
MATRIX5 SEND 2C02 2C06
MATRIX6 SEND 2C08 2C0C
MATRIX7 SEND 2C0E 2C12
MATRIX8 SEND 2C14 2C18
ON MIX21-24, MONO 2C2A 2C2E
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 ON
MIX1 SEND 2C30 2C6F
MIX2 SEND 2C70 2CAF
MIX3 SEND 2CB0 2CEF
MIX4 SEND 2CF0 2D2F
MIX5 SEND 2D30 2D6F
MIX6 SEND 2D70 2DAF
MIX7 SEND 2DB0 2DEF
MIX8 SEND 2DF0 2E2F
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX5 SEND 2E30 2E6F
MATRIX6 SEND 2E70 2EAF
MATRIX7 SEND 2EB0 2EEF
MATRIX8 SEND 2EF0 2F2F
MIX9-24 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST 2F36 2F45
INSERT MIX21-24, MONO 2F46 2F4A
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
MIX1 SEND 2F4C 2F8B
MIX2 SEND 2F8C 2FCB
MIX3 SEND 2FCC 300B
MIX4 SEND 300C 304B
MIX5 SEND 304C 308B
MIX6 SEND 308C 30CB
MIX7 SEND 30CC 310B
MIX8 SEND 310C 314B
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX5 SEND 314C 318B
MATRIX6 SEND 318C 31CB
MATRIX7 SEND 31CC 320B
MATRIX8 SEND 320C 324B
DCA13-16
ON 324C 324F
FADER 3252 3255
BALANCE MIX21-24 (,MONO) 3258 325C
MIX21-24, MONO EQ
ON 325E 3262
LOW Q 3264 3268
LOW FREQ 326A 326E
LOW GAIN 3270 3274
LOW MID Q 3276 327A
LOW MID FREQ 327C 3280
LOW MID GAIN 3282 3286
HIGH MID Q 3288 328C
HIGH MID FREQ 328E 3292
HIGH MID GAIN 3294 3298
HIGH Q 329A 329E
HIGH FREQ 32A0 32A4
HIGH GAIN 32A6 32AA
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
MIX21-24, MONO EQ
HPF ON 32AC 32B0
LPF ON 32B2 32B6
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ
LOW TYPE 3440 347F
HIGH TYPE 3480 34BF
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
LOW TYPE 34C0 34E2
HIGH TYPE 34E4 3506
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 EQ
LOW TYPE 3508 3517
HIGH TYPE 3518 3527
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
HPF FREQ 3528 3537
DIRECT OUT INPUT65-
72 ON 3538 353F
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND 3540 354F
MATRIX6 SEND 3550 355F
MATRIX7 SEND 3560 356F
MATRIX8 SEND 3570 357F
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX5 SEND 3580 358F
MATRIX6 SEND 3590 359F
MATRIX7 SEND 35A0 35AF
MATRIX8 SEND 35B0 35BF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX5 SEND 35C0 35CF
MATRIX6 SEND 35D0 35DF
MATRIX7 SEND 35E0 35EF
MATRIX8 SEND 35F0 35FF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6 3600 360F
MATRIX7/8 3610 361F
MONITOR
SURROUND MONITOR
FADER 3620 3620
SPEAKER MUTE
SOLO 3621 3621
SPEAKER MUTE L 3622 3622
SPEAKER MUTE R 3623 3623
SPEAKER MUTE C 3624 3624
SPEAKER MUTE LFE 3625 3625
SPEAKER MUTE Ls 3626 3626
SPEAKER MUTE Rs 3627 3627
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ 3640 367F
MIX21-24, MONO
DYNAMICS1
ON 3680 3684
ATTACK 3686 368A
THRESHOLD 368C 3690
RELEASE 3692 3696
RATIO 3698 369C
GAIN 369E 36A2
KNEE/WIDTH 36A4 36A8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MIX1/2 36AA 36E9
MIX3/4 36EA 3729
MIX5/6 372A 3769
MIX7/8 376A 37A9
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6 37AA 37E9
MATRIX7/8 37EA 3829
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Data List
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ ATT 3F34 3F56
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 TO
STEREO ON 3F58 3F67
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24 TO MONO ON 3F68 3F7F
LCR IN65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24
ON 3F80 3F97
CSR 3F98 3FAF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS1
RATIO 3FB0 3FBF
KNEE/WIDTH 3FC0 3FCF
GAIN 3FD0 3FDF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS2
reserved 3FE0 3FEF
FILTER FREQ 3FF0 3FFF
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)29
HA
EXTERNAL GAIN1 3B06 3B0B
INPUT GAIN 1 3B0F 3B15
EXTERNAL GAIN2 3B16 3B1B
INPUT GAIN 2 3B1F 3B25
EXTERNAL GAIN3 3B26 3B2B
INPUT GAIN 3 3B2F 3B35
EXTERNAL GAIN4 3B36 3B3B
INPUT GAIN 4 3B3F 3B45
EXTERNAL GAIN5 3B46 3B4B
INPUT GAIN 5 3B4F 3B55
EXTERNAL GAIN6 3B56 3B5B
INPUT GAIN 6 3B5F 3B65
EXTERNAL GAIN7 3B66 3B6B
INPUT GAIN 7 3B6F 3B75
EXTERNAL GAIN8 3B76 3B7B
INPUT GAIN 8 3B7F 3B85
EXTERNAL +48V 1 3B86 3B8B
INPUT +48V 1 3B8F 3B95
EXTERNAL +48V 2 3B96 3B9B
INPUT +48V 2 3B9F 3BA5
EXTERNAL +48V 3 3BA6 3BAB
INPUT +48V 3 3BAF 3BB5
EXTERNAL +48V 4 3BB6 3BBB
INPUT +48V 4 3BBF 3BC5
EXTERNAL +48V 5 3BC6 3BCB
INPUT +48V 5 3BCF 3BD5
EXTERNAL +48V 6 3BD6 3BDB
INPUT +48V 6 3BDF 3BE5
EXTERNAL +48V 7 3BE6 3BEB
INPUT +48V 7 3BEF 3BF5
EXTERNAL +48V 8 3BF6 3BFB
INPUT +48V 8 3BFF 3C05
EXTERNAL HPF1 3C06 3C0B
INPUT HPF1 3C0F 3C15
EXTERNAL HPF2 3C16 3C1B
INPUT HPF2 3C1F 3C25
EXTERNAL HPF3 3C26 3C2B
INPUT HPF3 3C2F 3C35
EXTERNAL HPF4 3C36 3C3B
INPUT HPF4 3C3F 3C45
EXTERNAL HPF5 3C46 3C4B
INPUT HPF5 3C4F 3C55
EXTERNAL HPF6 3C56 3C5B
INPUT HPF6 3C5F 3C65
EXTERNAL HPF7 3C66 3C6B
INPUT HPF7 3C6F 3C75
EXTERNAL HPF8 3C76 3C7B
INPUT HPF8 3C7F 3C85
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
MONO ON 3C86 3CC5
MIX1-16 TO MONO ON 3CC6 3CD5
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
SLOT OUT DELAY
ON 3CD6 3D05
TIME HIGH 3D06 3D35
TIME LOW 3D36 3D65
OMNI OUT DELAY
ON 3D66 3D6D
TIME HIGH 3D76 3D7D
TIME LOW 3D86 3D8D
DIGITAL OUT DELAY
ON 3D96 3D97
TIME HIGH 3D98 3D99
TIME LOW 3D9A 3D9B
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS1
RATIO 3D9C 3DD3
KNEE/WIDTH 3DD4 3E0B
GAIN 3E0C 3E43
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS2
reserved 3E44 3E7B
FILTER FREQ 3E7C 3EB3
GEQ RACK7A-8B
ON 3EB4 3EB7
GAIN1 3EB8 3EBB
GAIN2 3EBC 3EBF
GAIN3 3EC0 3EC3
GAIN4 3EC4 3EC7
GAIN5 3EC8 3ECB
GAIN6 3ECC 3ECF
GAIN7 3ED0 3ED3
GAIN8 3ED4 3ED7
GAIN9 3ED8 3EDB
GAIN10 3EDC 3EDF
GAIN11 3EE0 3EE3
GAIN12 3EE4 3EE7
GAIN13 3EE8 3EEB
GAIN14 3EEC 3EEF
GAIN15 3EF0 3EF3
GAIN16 3EF4 3EF7
GAIN17 3EF8 3EFB
GAIN18 3EFC 3EFF
GAIN19 3F00 3F03
GAIN20 3F04 3F07
GAIN21 3F08 3F0B
GAIN22 3F0C 3F0F
GAIN23 3F10 3F13
GAIN24 3F14 3F17
GAIN25 3F18 3F1B
GAIN26 3F1C 3F1F
GAIN27 3F20 3F23
GAIN28 3F24 3F27
GAIN29 3F28 3F2B
GAIN30 3F2C 3F2F
GAIN31 3F30 3F33
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Data List
STE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.
SER LEVEL
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
NAME O
PATCH
PROCESSING O
PATCH
PATCH
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PATCH
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING
PROCESSING O
FADER/ON*4 O
FADER/ON*4 O
FADER/ON*4 O
PROCESSING*4 O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O30
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability
This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter.
It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PA
 Input channels
Parameter Stereo*1 CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8
U
ALL Parameter Select button
HA
Gain O*10 HA*10 O HA, GLOBAL HA HA
Gain Compensation O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA
+48V O HA, GLOBAL HA HA
Phase O HA, GLOBAL HA HA
AG-DG Link O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA
Digital Gain O*10 DIGITAL GAIN*10 O DIGITAL GAIN HA
Name, Icon, Color O INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME INPUT
Input Patch O INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT
LR-MONO
SELECT * ST IN channels only O ALL
*14 INPUT
Insert1,
Insert2
Out Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT
In Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA HA
On INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT
Point INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT
Direct Out
Out Patch O INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT
On, Level DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT
Point DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT
HPF O INPUT HPF O INPUT HPF INPUT
Att O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT
EQ O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT
Dynamics1
Key-In Source O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT
Key-In Filter O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT
Others O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT
Dynamics2
Key-In Source O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT
Others O INPUT DYNAMICS2 O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT
To Mix
On O INPUT MIX ON*2 O INPUT MIX ON*7 INPUT
Level O INPUT MIX SEND*2 O INPUT MIX SEND*7 INPUT
Pan/Balance O*11 O INPUT MIX SEND*7 INPUT
Pre/Post O INPUT MIX SEND*2 O INPUT MIX SEND*7 INPUT
Surround
Pan O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT
Divergence O O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT
LFE O O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT
Data List
nnel must also be set to ON.
ME.
FADER/ON*4 O
FADER/ON*4 O
FADER/ON*4 O
PROCESSING*4 O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
FADER/ON O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
FADER/ON O
FADER/ON O
GROUP ASSIGN O
ROUP ASSIGN O
O*6
SER LEVEL
Channel
Library31
*1 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1-8.
*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1-24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1-8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination cha
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NA
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*10 Operates differentially
*11 Balance only
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
To Matrix
On O INPUT MATRIX ON*3 O INPUT MATRIX ON*7 INPUT
Level O INPUT MATRIX SEND*3 O INPUT MATRIX SEND*7 INPUT
Pan/Balance O*11 O INPUT MATRIX SEND*7 INPUT
Pre/Post O INPUT MATRIX SEND*3 O INPUT MATRIX SEND*7 INPUT
DELAY
ms O*10 INPUT DELAY*10 O INPUT DELAY INPUT
ON O INPUT DELAY O INPUT DELAY INPUT
To Stereo O TO STEREO O INPUT TO ST INPUT
To Mono O TO STEREO O INPUT TO MONO INPUT
Pan/balance O*11 O INPUT TO ST INPUT
Pan Mode O O *5 INPUT
LCR
On O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT
CSR O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT
Mode O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT
On O INPUT CH ON O INPUT CH ON INPUT
Fader O*10 INPUT FADER*10 O INPUT FADER INPUT
Mute Assign O INPUT MUTE O *5 MUTE
DCA Assign O INPUT DCA O *5 DCA G
Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE
Channel Link O GLOBAL CH LINK
Cue O
Key In Cue
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER
Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER
Global Paste O
Parameter Stereo*1 CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8
U
ALL Parameter Select button
Data List
nnel must also be set to ON.
ME.
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
PUT NAME O
PUT PATCH
PUT PATCH
PUT PATCH
PROCESSING
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING
PROCESSING O
FADER/ON*4 O
FADER/ON*4 O
FADER/ON*4 O
PROCESSING*4 O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
FADER/ON O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
FADER/ON O
FADER/ON O
H MIX SEND*4
H MIX SEND*4
H MIX SEND*4
H MIX SEND*4
E GROUP ASSIGN O
GROUP ASSIGN O
RE O*632
MIX Channels
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination cha
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NA
Parameters
Linked for
a stereo
pair
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color O MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUT
Output Patch O MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUT
Insert1,
Insert2
Out Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUT
In Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUT
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MIX
On O INSERT O MIX INSERT MIX
Point O INSERT O MIX INSERT MIX
Att O EQ O MIX EQ MIX
EQ O EQ O MIX EQ MIX
Dynamics1
Key-In Source O MIX DYNA1 MIX
Others O DYNAMICS O MIX DYNA1 MIX
To Matrix
On O TO MATRIX ON O MIX MATRIX ON*7 MIX
Level O*13 TO MATRIX SEND O MIX MATRIX SEND*7 MIX
Pan/Balance O TO MATRIX SEND O MIX MATRIX SEND*7 MIX
Pre/Post O TO MATRIX SEND O MIX MATRIX SEND*7 MIX
To Stereo O TO STEREO O MIX TO ST MIX
To Mono O TO STEREO O MIX MONO MIX
Pan/Balance O*11 O MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MIX
LCR
On O TO STEREO O *5 MIX
CSR O TO STEREO O *5 MIX
Mode O TO STEREO O *5 MIX
On O CH ON O MIX CH ON MIX
Fader O FADER O MIX FADER MIX
From Input
On O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WIT
Level O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WIT
Pan/Balance O*11 WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WIT
Pre/Post O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WIT
Mute Assign O MUTE O *5 MUT
DCA Assign O DCA O *14 DCA
Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STO
Channel Link O GLOBAL CH LINK
Cue O
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER
Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER
Global Paste O
Data List
nnel must also be set to ON.
R LEVEL
Channel
Library
NAME O
PATCH
PATCH
PATCH
PROCESSING
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING O
PROCESSING
PROCESSING O
FADER/ON O
FADER/ON O
FADER/ON O
TRIX SEND*4
TRIX SEND*4
TRIX SEND*4
TRIX SEND*4
OUP ASSIGN O
UP ASSIGN O
O*633
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*13 Linked only for stereo MATRIX
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
MATRIX Channels
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination cha
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
Parameters
Linked for
a stereo
pair
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12
USE
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color O MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT
Output Patch O MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT
Insert1, Insert2
Out Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT
In Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT
+48V, Gain, Gain
Compensation O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MATRIX
On O INSERT O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX
Point O INSERT O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX
Att O EQ O MATRIX EQ MATRIX
EQ O EQ O MATRIX EQ MATRIX
Dynamics1
Key-In Source O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX
Others O DYNAMICS O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX
To Matrix
On TO MATRIX ON
Level TO MATRIX SEND
Pan/Balance TO MATRIX SEND
Pre/Post TO MATRIX SEND
Balance O O MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MATRIX
On O CH ON O MATRIX CH ON MATRIX
Fader O FADER O MATRIX FADER MATRIX
From Input
From Mix
From Stereo/Mono
On O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MA
Level O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MA
Pan/Balance O*11 WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MA
Pre/Post O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MA
Mute Assign O MUTE O *5 MUTE GR
DCA Assign O DCA O *14 DCA GRO
Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE
Channel Link O GLOBAL CH LINK
Cue O
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER
Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER
Global Paste O
Data List
ME.
nnel must also be set to ON.
ME.
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O*634
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NA
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
STEREO, MONO Channels
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination cha
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NA
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
Parameter
Linked for
a stereo
pair
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12
USER LEVEL
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color O STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME
Output Patch O STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
Insert1, Insert2
Out Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
In Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
+48V, Gain, Gain
Compensation STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
On O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
Point O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
Att O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
EQ O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
Dynamics1
Key-In Source O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
Others O O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
To Matrix
On O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON*7 STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4
Level O*13 O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7 STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4
Pan/Balance O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7 STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4
Pre/Post O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING*4
Balance O O STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
On O O STEREO, MONO CH ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
Fader O O STEREO, MONO FADER STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
Mute Assign O O *5 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA Assign O O *14 DCA GROUP ASSIGN
Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE
Cue O
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O
Data List
RECALL SAFE
USER LEVEL
ALL
O MUTE GROUP MASTER
MUTE GROUP MASTER
MUTE GROUP MASTER
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN35
DCA
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
MUTE
Parameters
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
USER LEVEL
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color O DCA NAME DCA MASTER
On O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER
Fader O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER
Fade Time, On O *9 STORE
Input DCA Assign DCA GROUP ASSIGN
Parameters
Name
On Dimmer
MUTE Assign
Data List
.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
eception
f [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed
rom MIDI OUT.
f SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx]
ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are
eceived regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene
emory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled according to the
ettings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].
ransmission
f [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to
he [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and
remium rack library are recalled.
f SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
f the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library have been
ssigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered
ROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
ROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because
here is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
ou can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
f SINGLE is selected
ou can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.
ou can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
bank of up to 16 can be specified.
f MULTI is selected
he Rx and Tx channels will be the same.
he assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select
essages will not be added.
ou can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
TATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change *
ATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB
TATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change *
ATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB
TATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change *
ATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB
The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not
be added during transmission.
Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is
omitted.
TATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program change
ATA 0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)36
MIDI Data Format
This section explains the format of the data that the CL series
is able to understand, send, and receive.
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
1.2 NOTE ON (9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN]
(Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110)
messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx]
is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings
of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be
assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes”
(page 22).
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx]
is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h,
63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the
specified parameter.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a
parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these
messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can
be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes”
(page 22).
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a
specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and
DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be
Assigned to Control Changes” (page 22).
CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because
there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
If [TABLE] is selected
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data
paramSteps = paramMax-paramMin + 1;
add = paramWidth / paramSteps;
mod = paramWidth-add * paramSteps;
curValue = paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps
paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps
paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152
steps
paramWidth = 2097152;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3-4) When only High data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128;
if ( rxValue > paramWidth)
rxValue = paramWidth;
param = ( rxValue-mod / 2) / add;
If [NRPN] is selected
1
R
I
f I
is r m s T
I
t p I
I
a P
P
t (
Y
I
Y
Y
A
I
T
T
m Y
STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note off message
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored)
STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note on message
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change
DATA 00 Control number (00)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change
DATA 20 Control number (32)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96-101 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change
DATA 01100010 62 NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB
S
D
S
D
S
D
*
S
D
Data List
1) 0-300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),
2) 1-199 Input EQ Library Number (1-40 Request Only)
3) 1-199 Output EQ Library Number (1-3 Request Only)
4) 1-199 Dynamics Library Number (1-41 Request Only)
5) 0-199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
6) 1-199 Effect Library Number (1-27 Request Only)
7) 512-583 Input 1-72,
8) 584-599 STIN 1L-8R,
9) 768-791 MIX 1-24,
10) 1024-1031 MATRIX 1-8,
11) 1280-1282 STEREO L-C,
12) 512-530 GEQ 1-19, 531-538 EFFECT GEQ 1-8,
13) 0-199 8BandPEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
14) 512-519 EFFECT 1-8,
15) 512 Current Data,
16) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,
17) 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data,
18) 0-199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
19) 0-199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
20) 512-527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, … 8A, 8B
21) 0-100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only)
22) 1536-1607 Input 1-72 (for Dynamics2),
23) 1608-1623 STIN 1L-8R (for Dynamics2),
24) 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only)
ata is lost when you write to the preset library.
he unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a CL series.
o calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE
OUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary
omplement, and set bit 7 to 0.
HECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
ulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time
hen a Bulk Dump Request is received.
Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump
equest.
n the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of
-bit data.
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” *21)
U76 LIB “U76_____” *21)
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” *21)
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” *21)
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” *21)
Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” *21)
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” *24)
Mixer Setup “MIXERSET” Fix (512)
Outport Setup “OUT_PORT” Fix (512)
Monitor Setup “MONITOR_” Fix (512)
MIDI Setup “MIDI_SET” Fix (512)
Lib Number “LIB_NUM_” Fix (512)
Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_” Fix (512)
Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_” Fix (512)
Preference (Current) “PREF_CUR” Fix (512)
Preference (Admin) “PREF_ADM” Fix (512)
Preference (Guest) “PREF_GST” Fix (512)
User Defined Keys (Current) “UDEF_CUR” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
User Defined Keys (Admin) “UDEF_ADM” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
User Defined Keys (Guest) “UDEF_GST” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Custom Fader Bank (Current) “CFAD_CUR” Fix (512)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin) “CFAD_ADM” Fix (512)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest) “CFAD_GST” Fix (512)
User Level (Current) “UKEY_CUR” Fix (512)
User Level (Guest) “UKEY_GST” Fix (512)
Module Name(mm) Data Number(dd)37
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
2.1 SONG SELECT (F3)
Reception
Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory
recorder.
2.2 TIMING CLOCK (F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four
times per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized
(e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of
400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
2.4 SYSTEM RESET (FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.1 MMC
< MMC STOP >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.
< MMC PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
< MMC DEFERED PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
< MMC RECORD STROBE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts
recording.
< MMC PAUSE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses.
3.2 BULK DUMP
This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored
within the unit.
The basic format is as follows.
The CL series console uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
D
T
T
C
c C
B
w A
R
I
7
STATUS 11110011 F3 Song select
Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127)
STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock
STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing
STATUS 11111111 FF System reset
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000001 01 Stop(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000010 02 Play(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000011 03 Deferred Play(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000110 06 Record strobe
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00001001 09 Pause(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Command rx/tx Function
F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm ... mm dd
dd ... ee F7
rx/tx BULK DUMP DATA
F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm ... mm dd dd F7 rx BULK DUMP REQUEST
Module Name(mm) Data Number(dd)
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” *1) *15) *16) *17)
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” *2) *7) *8)
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” *3) *9) *10) *11)
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” *4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *22) *23)
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” *18) *7) *8)
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” *19) *9) *10) *11)
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” *5) *12)
8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” *13)
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” *6) *14)
Premium Effect “PEFFECT_” *20)
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” *21)
Data List
.1.3 Data category
.2 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY STORE, RECALL -
.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
eception
ata will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
umber of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
he data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
he corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
ransmission
ata will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when
PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
.2.2 Function Name
Data Category Name
0x01 00000001 Current Scene /Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
TATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
D No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
UB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
ROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
ODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
ATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
UNCTION NAME 01001100 “L” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
ODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
ATA 0nnnnnnn nh Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Number Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
OX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Function Name
Store “LibStr__”
Recall “LibRcl__”
Unknown Factor Store “LibUnStr”
Unknown Factor Recall “LibUnRcl”
Store Undo (only Score) “LibStrUd”
Recall Undo (only Scene) “LibRclUd”38
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
Reception
This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches
the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is
received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER
REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be
transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which
CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE
will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be
transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.
4 PARAMETER CHANGE details
4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP
4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL
CHANGE EVENT LIST].
4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE
immediately the data is received.
4
4
4
R
D
n T
T
T
D
[
4
Command rx/tx Function
F0 43 1n 3E 19 ... F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
rx/tx CL series native parameter change
F0 43 3n 3E 19 ... F7
PARAMETER REQUEST
rx/tx CL series native parameter request
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh Element no High.
0eeeeeee el Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih Index no High.
0iiiiiii il Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl Channel no Low.
0ddddddd dd Data
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh Element no High.
0eeeeeee el Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih Index no High.
0iiiiiii il Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl Channel no Low.
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
S
I
S
G
M
D
F
M
D
E
Data List
.3.2 Function Name
.3.3 Module Name
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
ODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
ATA 0sssssss sh number -source start High
0sssssss sl number -source start Low
0eeeeeee eh number -source end High
0eeeeeee el number -source end Low
0ddddddd dh number -destination start High
0ddddddd dl number -destination to start Low
OX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Function Name
Copy “LibCpy__”
Paste “LibPst__”
Clear “LibClr__”
Cut “LibCut__”
Insert “LibIns__”
Edit Undo “LibEdtUd”
Module Name Function
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” Clear Only
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” Clear Only
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” Clear Only
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” Clear Only
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” Clear Only
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” Clear Only
8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” Clear Only
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” Clear Only
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” Clear Only
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” Clear Only
U76 LIB “U76_____” Clear Only
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” Clear Only
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” Clear Only
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” Clear Only
Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” Clear Only
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” Clear Only39
4.2.3 Module Name
*1) 0:CH1 - 71:CH72
72:ST IN 1L - 87:ST IN 8R
*2) 256:MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24
*3) 512:MATRIX 1 - 519: MATRIX 8
*4) 1024:STEREO L - 1026:STEREO C
*5) 512: will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
*6) 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, ... 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B
38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B,
40: EFFECT GEQ2A, ... 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B
*7) 0:Effect1- 7:Effect8
*8) 1280:CH1 - 1351:CH72
1352:ST IN 1L - 1367:ST IN 8R
*9) 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B,
2: Premium Rack 2A, ... 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B
4.3 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY EDIT -
4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is
received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
4
4
Module Name
Scene “SCENE___”
Input EQ “INEQ____”
Output EQ “OUTEQ___”
Dynamics “DYNA____”
Input CH “INCHNNL_”
Output CH “OUTCHNNL”
GEQ “GEQ_____”
8BandPEQ “8PEQ____”
Effect “EFFECT__”
Portico5033 “P5033___”
Portico5043 “P5043___”
U76 “U76_____”
Opt-2A “OPT-2A__”
EQP-1A “EQ-1A___”
Dynamic EQ “DYNAEQ__”
Buss Comp 369 “BSCMP369”
Dante Input Patch “DANTEIN_”
Function Number Channel*1) tx/rx
“LibStr__” SCENE 1-300 *5) tx/rx
INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 *1) tx/rx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 *2) *3) *4) tx/rx
Dynamics LIB 42-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) tx/rx
INPUT CH LIB 1-199 *1) tx/rx
OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4) tx/rx
GEQ LIB 1-199 *6) tx/rx
8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 *6) tx/rx
EFFECT LIB 28-199 *7) tx/rx
Premium Effect LIB 1-100 *9) tx/rx
Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 *5) tx/rx
“LibUnStr” SCENE 1-300 0 tx
INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 0 tx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 0 tx
Dynamics LIB 42-199 0 tx
INPUT CH LIB 1-199 0 tx
OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 0 tx
GEQ LIB 1-199 0 tx
8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 0 tx
EFFECT LIB 28-199 0 tx
Premium Effect LIB 1-100 0 tx
Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 0 tx
“LibRcl__” SCENE 0-300 *5) tx/rx
INPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *1) tx/rx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4) tx/rx
Dynamics LIB 1-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) tx/rx
INPUT CH LIB 0-199 *1) tx/rx
OUTPUT CH LIB 0-199 *2) *3) *4) tx/rx
GEQ LIB 0-199 *6) tx/rx
8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 *6) tx/rx
EFFECT LIB 1-199 *7) tx/rx
Premium Effect LIB 0-100 *9) tx/rx
Dante Input Patch LIB 0-10 *5) tx/rx
“LibUnRcl” SCENE 0 *5) tx
INPUT EQ LIB 0 *1) tx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 *2) *3) *4) tx
Dynamics LIB 0 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) tx
INPUT CH LIB 0 *1) tx
OUTPUT CH LIB 0 *2) *3) *4) tx
GEQ LIB 0 *6) tx
8BandPEQ LIB 0 *6) tx
EFFECT LIB 0 *7) tx
Premium Effect LIB 0 *9) tx
Dante Input Patch LIB 0 *5) tx
“LibStrUd” SCENE 0 0
“LibRclUd” SCENE 0 0
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
Function Number Channel*1) tx/rx
M
D
E
Data List
.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE
.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
ransmission
hen CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer
ill be sent back with the following Parameter change.
his packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.
op number is requested number or more.
ExampleCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
equest Number: 0
ata : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
equest Number: 8
ata : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
equest Number: 11
ata : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
equest Number: 102
ata : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” 0-100 (0:response only)
Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” 0-100 (0:response only)
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” 0-10 (0:response only)
TATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
D No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
UB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
ROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
ODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
ATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
UNCTION NAME 01001100 “L” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
01000101 “E” (ASCII CODE)
01111000 “x” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01110011 “s” (ASCII CODE)
01110100 “t” (ASCII CODE)
ODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
ATA 0sssssss ss Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data )
0nnnnnnn nh Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Request Number Low
0ttttttt th Top Number High
0ttttttt tl Top Number Low
0eeeeeee eh End Number High
0eeeeeee el End Number Low
OX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Module Name Number40
4.4 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE -
4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
When the message is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be
edited.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
4.4.3 Module Name
4
4
T
W
w T
T
-
S
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
01000001 “A” (ASCII CODE)
01110100 “t” (ASCII CODE)
01110010 “r” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
01110100 “t” (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh Element High
0eeeeeee el Element Low
0iiiiiii ih Index High
0iiiiiii il Index Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
0000dddd dd Data28~31bit
0ddddddd dd Data21~27bit
0ddddddd dd Data14~20bit
0ddddddd dd Data7~13bit
0ddddddd dd Data0~6bit
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
01000001 “A” (ASCII CODE)
01110100 “t” (ASCII CODE)
01110010 “r” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
01110100 “t” (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh Element High
0eeeeeee el Element Low
0iiiiiii ih Index High
0iiiiiii il Index Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Module Name Number
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 0-300 (0:response only)
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 1-200 (1-40:response only)
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 1-200 (1-3:response only)
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” 1-200 (1-41:response only)
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” 0-200 (0:response only)
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” 0-200 (0:response only)
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 0-200 (0:response only)
8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” 0-199 (0:response only)
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 1-200 (1-27:response only)
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” 0-100 (0:response only)
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” 0-100 (0:response only)
U76 LIB “U76_____” 0-100 (0:response only)
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” 0-100 (0:response only)
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” 0-100 (0:response only)
S
I
S
G
M
D
F
M
D
E
Data List
.7 FUNCTION CALL - MODULE -
.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
eception
ata will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
umber of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
he data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
he corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received
depending on the effect type).
.7.2 Module Name
his will not work when the Effect Type is different.
User Defined Keys (Admin) “UDEF_ADM”
User Defined Keys (Guest) “UDEF_GST”
Custom Fader Bank (Current) “CFAD_CUR”
Custom Fader Bank (Admin) “CFAD_ADM”
Custom Fader Bank (Guest) “CFAD_GST”
User Level (Current) “UKEY_CUR”
User Level (Guest) “UKEY_GST”
TATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
D No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
UB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
ROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
ODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
ATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
UNCTION NAME 01001101 “M”
01101111 “o”
01100100 “d”
01000110 “F”
01111000 “x”
01010100 “T”
01110010 “r”
01100111 “g”
ODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
ATA 0eeeeeee ee Effect number (0:RACK1-7:RACK8)
0ppppppp pp Release:0, Press:1
OX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Module Name Number
Freeze Play button “FRZPLAY_” 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
Freeze Record button “FRZREC__” 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
Module Name41
4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
4.5.3 Module Name
4.6 FUNCTION CALL - COLLECTION STORE -
4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on.
4.6.2 Function Name
4.6.3 Module Name
4
4
R
D
n T
T
(
4
T
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “b” (ASCII CODE)
01000101 “E” (ASCII CODE)
01111000 “x” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “i” (ASCII CODE)
01110011 “s” (ASCII CODE)
01110100 “t” (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Request Number Low
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Module Name Number
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 1-300
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 41-200
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 4-200
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” 42-200
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” 1-200
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNL” 1-200
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 1-200
8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” 1-199
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 55-200
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” 1-100
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” 1-100
U76 LIB “U76_____” 1-100
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” 1-100
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” 1-100
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” 1-100
Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” 1-100
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” 1-10
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “C” (ASCII CODE)
01101001 “o” (ASCII CODE)
01100010 “l” (ASCII CODE)
01010101 “U” (ASCII CODE)
01101110 “n” (ASCII CODE)
01010011 “S” (ASCII CODE)
01110100 “t” (ASCII CODE)
01110010 “r” (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Number Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Function Number tx/rx
“ColUnStr” Setup 0 tx
User Defined Key 0 tx
Program Change 0 tx
Control Change 0 tx
Module Name
Mixer Setting “MIXERSET”
Outport Setting “OUT_PORT”
Monitor Setting “MONITOR_”
MIDI Setting “MIDI_SET”
Lib Number “LIB_NUM_”
Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_”
Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_”
Preference (Current) “PREF_CUR”
Preference (Admin) “PREF_ADM”
Preference (Guest) “PREF_GST”
User Defined Keys (Current) “UDEF_CUR”
S
I
S
G
M
D
F
M
D
E
Data List42
4.8 FUNCTION CALL - CHANNEL -
4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
4.8.2 Module Name
*1) 0:CH1 - 71:CH72
256:MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24
512:MATRIX 1-519:MATRIX 8
4.9 LEVEL METER DATA
4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the
corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.
If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to
be sent in at least every 10 seconds.
Reception
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering
data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and
time will vary depending on devices).
When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled.
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for
a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
If this is received with an Address UL = 0x7F, transmission of all meter data will
stop (will be disabled) immediately.
Transmission
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01000011 “C”
01101000 “h”
01101100 “l”
01010000 “P”
01101001 “i”
01110010 “r”
01000011 “C”
01110000 “p”
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA 0sssssss sh Source Channel Number H *1)
0sssssss sl Source Channel Number L *1)
0ddddddd dh Destination Channel Number H *1)
0ddddddd dl Destination Channel Number L *1)
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Module Name
Pair On (with Copy) “PAIRONCP”
Pair On (with Reset Both) “PAIRONRS”
Pair Off “PAIROFF_”
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
0ddddddd dd Data1
: :
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
0ccccccc ch Count H
0ccccccc cl Count L
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Data List
PUT CHARACTERISTICS
RACTERISTICS
AL OUT
rs are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
ta th Level Audio Connector
t or
it 1000Base
-T
64ch Input/64ch Output
@48kHz
EtherCON Cat5e
Format
Data
Length
Level Connector
Professional Use 24bit RS422 XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)*2
Name Fixed/Variable Data Description
fixed
1 professional use
0 audio
0x4 off
0 lock
uency variable
0x0 others
0x3 32 kHz
0x2 44.1 kHz
0x1 48 kHz
fixed
0x1 2ch mode
gement 0x0 fixed
0x1 24 bits Audio Data
0x00 fixed 0x00 eference Signal
fixed
0x0
-
0
uency variable 0x0 others
uency Scan Flag fixed 0 -43
Input/output characteristics
ANALOG INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
*1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4dBu (1.23V) or the nominal
output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all faders and level controls are
maximum position.)
*2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
* In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms.
* All input AD converters are 24bit linear, 128times oversampling.
* +48V DC ( phantom power ) is supplied to ONI IN (1-8) and TALKBACK XLR type
connectors via each individual software controlled switches.
ANALOG OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
*1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
*2. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip= LEFT, Ring= RIGHT, Sleeve= GND)
*3. There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level.
*4. The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max.
* In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms.
* All output DA converters are 24bit, 128times oversampling.
DIGITAL INPUT & OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT CHA
*1. Channel Status of DIGIT
*2. XLR-3-32 type connecto
Input
Terminals GAIN
Actual
Load
Impedance
For Use
With
Nominal
Input Level
ConnectorSensitivity
*1 Nominal
Max. before
clip
OMNI IN
1-8
+66dB
7.5kΩ
50-600Ω
Mics &
600Ω
Lines
-82dBu
(61.6μV)
-62dBu
(0.616mV)
-42dBu
(6.16mV) XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)*2
-6dB
-10dBu
(245mV)
+10dBu
(2.45V)
+30dBu
(24.5V)
TALKBACK
+64dB
10kΩ
50-600Ω
Mics &
600Ω
Lines
-70dBu
(0.245mV)
-60dBu
(0.775mV)
-40dBu
(7.75mV) XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)*2
+20dB
-26dBu
(38.8mV)
-16dBu
(0.123V)
+4dBu
(1.23V)
Output
Terminals
Actual
Source
Impedanc
e For Use
With
Nominal
GAIN
SW*3
Output Level
Connector
Nominal
Max. before
clip
OMNI
OUT 1-8
75Ω
600Ω
Lines
+24dB
(default)
+4dBu
(1.23V)
+24dBu
(12.3V) XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced)*1
+18dB
-2dBu
(616mV)
+18dBu
(6.16V)
PHONES 15Ω

Phones
- 75mW*4 150mW Stereo Phone Jack
(TRS)
(Unbalanced)*240Ω
Phones
- 65mW*4 150mW
Terminal Format
Da leng
Primary/
Secondary
Dante
24bi
32b
Terminal
DIGITAL
OUT*1
AES/EBU AES/EBU
Byte Bit Field
0
0 Block Format
1 Mode
2-4 Emphasis
5 Fs Lock
6-7 Sampling Freq
1
0-3 Channel Mode
4-7 Users Bit Mana
2
0-2 Use of AUX
3-7 Source
3 0-7 Multi Channel
4
0-1 Digital Audio R
2 -
3-6 Sampling Freq
7 Sampling Freq
Data List44
I/O SLOT (1-3) CHARACTERISTICS
Each I/O Slot accepts a mini-YGDAI card. Only Slot1 has a serial interface.
CONTROL I/O CHARACTERISTICS
*1. Input pin: TTL level, w/ internal pull-up (47kΩ)
Output pin: Open drain output (Vmax=12V, maximum sink current/pin=75mA)
Power supply pin: Output voltage Vp=5V, Max. output current Imax=300mA
*2. 4 pin=+12V, 3 pin=GND, Lamp rating 5W. Voltage control by software.
Terminal Format Level Connector
MIDI
IN MIDI - DIN Connector 5P
OUT MIDI - DIN Connector 5P
WORD
CLOCK
IN - TTL/75Ω terminated BNC Connector
OUT - TTL/75Ω BNC Connector
GPI (5IN/5OUT) - -
D Sub Connector 15P
(Female)*1
NETWORK IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100Base-TX RJ-45
LAMP (CL5: x3, CL3:
x2, CL1: x1)
- 0V-12V*2 XLR-4-31 type*2
USB HOST USB 2.0 - USB A Connector (Female)
DC POWER INPUT - - JL05 Connector
METER (CL3/CL1 only) - D Sub Connector 9P
(Female)
Data List
Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
44.1 kHz
45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%)
44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%)
44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz -0.1%)
42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz -4.0%)
-200 +200 ppm
48 kHz
50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%)
48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%)
47.952 kHz (48 kHz -0.1%)
46.080 kHz (48 kHz -4.0%)
ITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz
ITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz 10 ns
d Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 44.1
kHz
d Clock : Int 48 kHz 48
d Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
-50 +50 ppm
d Clock : Int 48 kHz
d Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 4.429
ns d Clock : Int 48 kHz 4.06945
Electrical Characteristics
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms
Frequency Response. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz-20 kHz, referenced to
the nominal output level @1 kHz
Total Harmonic Distortion. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz
Hum & Noise. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise
* Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.
Dynamic Range. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
* Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter.
Sampling Frequency
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
GAIN: +66dB
-1.5 0.0 0.5
dB PHONES 8 Ω -3.0 0.0 0.5
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
+4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: +66dB 0.1
%
+4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: -6dB 0.05
Internal OSC
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Full Scale Output @1 kHz 0.02
PHONES 8 Ω Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max. 0.2
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
-128
EIN
dBu
-62
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
-84 -79
All INPUTs OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB
Master fader at nominal level and all
OMNI IN 1-8 in faders at nominal level.
-70
- OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off -88
- PHONES 8 Ω Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level Control Min. -88
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: -6dB 108 dB
- OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω DA Converter 112 dB
Parameter
External Clock
Frequency
Range
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Fs=
Jitter of PLL DIGDIG
Internal Clock
Frequency
Wor
Wor
Accuracy
Wor
Wor
Jitter
Wor
Wor
Data List
Output Port
Processor
4 Band
Equalizer
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Dynamics 1
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 MIX24/
MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
On On/Off
Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63
DCA Group 16 Groups
Mute Group 8 Groups
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
Oscillator Level= 0 to -96dB (1 dB step)On/Off= Software control
Function Parameter
Out Port Delay 0 msec to 1000 msec
Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse
Gain -96 to +24 dB
Function Parameter
GEQ 31 bands x 16(24) or 15 bands x 32(48) systems
PEQ (8 bands PEQ + 3 notchs + HPF, LPF) x 32(48) systems
AUTOMIXER 8(16) channels
Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems
Premium Rack
Parameter
Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x
8 systems
Function Parameter46
Mixer Basic Parameters
Libraries
 Input Function
Output Function


Name Number Total
Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 300 301
Input CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200
Output CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200
Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199
Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199
Dynamics Library Preset 41 + User 158 199
Effect Library Preset 27 + User 172 199
GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200
Premium Rack Library
Portico5033
Portico5043
U76
Opt-2A
EQ-1A
Dynamic EQ
Preset 1 + User 199 200
Dante Input Patch Library Preset 1 + User 10 11
Function Parameter
Phase Normal/Reverse
Digital Gain -96 dB to +24 dB
L,R-MONO L-MONO/R-MONO/LR-MONO/STEREO IN
HPF
Slope= -12dB/Oct, -6dB/Oct
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
Attenuator -96 dB to 0 dB
4 Band
Equalizer
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Direct Out Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Dynamics 1
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
Threshold=Gate: -72 dB to 0 dB
Others: -54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Hold= 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec
Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Dynamics 1
Releace= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Range= Gate: -∞ dB to 0 dB
Ducking: -70 dB to 0 dB
Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF
Dynamics2
Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz
TYPE= HPF, BPF
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
On On/Off
Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63Pan Mode: Pan/Balance
DCA Group 16 Groups
Mute Group 8 Groups
Mix Send
24 sends
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes
(Surround Pan can be set 1 to 6 mixes)
Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
(Position L63 to R63, R63 to F63 for Surround)
Matrix Send
8 Sends
Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100%
DELAY 0 ms to 1000 msec
Function Parameter
Attenuator -96 dB to 0 dB
Function Parameter
Data List
ETER (CL3/CL1 only)
Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name
1 RESET 6 +3.3LD
2 SDA 7 +3.3LD
3 DGND 8 LDGND
4 SCL 9 LDGND
5 +3.3D
1
6
5
9
47
Pin Assignment
DC POWER INPUT GPI M
Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name
1 +24V 13 GND
2 +24V 14 GND
3 +24V 15 GND
4 +24V 16 GND
5 +24V 17 GND
6 +24V 18 GND
7 +24V 19 CAUTION(+)
8 +24V 20 CAUTION(-)
9 +24V 21 DETECT A
10 GND 22 DETECT B
11 GND 23 DETECT GND
12 GND Frame GND
1234
56789
101112131415
1617181920
212223
Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name
1 GPO1 9 GPO2
2 GPO3 10 GPO4
3 GPO5 11 GND
4 GND 12 GND
5 +5V 13 +5V
6 GPI1 14 GPI2
7 GPI3 15 GPI4
8 GPI5
91011
8 123
15
Data List
n Chart
C
o m m o n :
S
o n g S
e l .
:
T
u n e X X
O X
R
e c o r d e r C
o n t r o l S
y s t e m R
e a l T
i m e :
C
l o c k :
C
o m m a n d s X X
O X
E
f f e c t C
o n t r o l A
u x M
e s s a g e s :
A
l l S
o u n d O
f f :
R
e s e t A
l l C
n t r l s :
L
o c a l O
N
/
O
F
F
:
A
l l N
o t e s O
F
F
:
A
c t i v e S
e n s e :
R
e s e t X X X X X X
X X X X O O
N
o t e s *
1
B
u l k D
u m p /
R
e q u e s t a n d P
a r a m e t e r C
h a n g e /
R
e q u e s t .
*
2
M
M
C
M
o d e 1
:
O
M
N
I
O
N
,
P
O
L
Y
M
o d e 3
:
O
M
N
I
O
F
F
,
P
O
L
Y
M
o d e 2
:
O
M
N
I
O
N
,
M
O
N
O
M
o d e 4
:
O
M
N
I
O
F
F
,
M
O
N
O
O
:
Y
e s X
:
N
o 48
M IDI Implementatio2
1
0
2
.
r a M
1
:
e t a D
]
e l o s n o C
g n i x i M
l a t i g i D
[
A
H
A
M
A
Y M
o d e l :
C
L
5
/
C
L
3
/
C
L
1
M
I
D
I
I
m p l e m e n t a t i o n C
h a r t V
e r s i o n :
1
.
0
F
u n c t i o n .
.
.
T
r a n s m i t t e d R
e c o g n i z e d R
e m a r k s B
a s i c C
h a n n e l D
e f a u l t C
h a n g e d 1

1
6
1

1
6
1

1
6
1

1
6
M
e m o r i z e d M
o d e D
e f a u l t M
e s s a g e s A
l t e r e d X X
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
,
3
X X
M
e m o r i z e d N
o t e N
u m b e r T
r u e V
o i c e 0

1
2
7
X
0

1
2
7
X
V
e l o c i t y N
o t e O
n N
o t e O
f f O
9
n H
,
v =
0
,
1
2
7
X
O
9
n H
,
v =
1
-
1
2
7
O
E
f f e c t C
o n t r o l A
f t e r T
o u c h K
e y
s C
h
s X X
X X
P
i t c h B
e n d X
X
C
o n t r o l C
h a n g e 0
,
3
2
6
,
3
8
9
8
,
9
9
1
-
3
1
,
3
3
-
9
5
,
1
0
2
-
1
1
9
O O O O
O O O O
B
a n k S
e l e c t D
a t a E
n t r y N
R
P
N
L
S
B
,
M
S
B
A
s s i g n a b l e C
n t r l P
r o g C
h a n g e :
T
r u e #
O
0

1
2
7
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
0

1
2
7
0

3
0
0
A
s s i g n a b l e 2
*
,
1
*
O
1
*
O
e v i s u l c x E
m e t s y S
:
S
o n g P
o s .
X
X
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2015 MA-D1
Manual Development Department
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

PDF Document reader online

This website is focused on providing document in readable format, online without need to install any type of software on your computer. If you are using thin client, or are not allowed to install document reader of particular type, this application may come in hand for you. Simply upload your document, and Docureader.top will transform it into readable format in a few seconds. Why choose Docureader.top?

  1. Unlimited sharing - you can upload document of any size. If we are able to convert it into readable format, you have it here - saved for later or immediate reading
  2. Cross-platform - no compromised when reading your document. We support most of modern browers without the need of installing any of external plugins. If your device can oper a browser - then you can read any document on it
  3. Simple uploading - no need to register. Just enter your email, title of document and select the file, we do the rest. Once the document is ready for you, you will receive automatic email from us.

Previous 10

Next 10